FanStory.com
"Implantation"


Chapter 1
Shattered Illusion

By Douglas Goff

Warning: The author has noted that this contains the highest level of sexual content.

Number Eight finished and climbed off Number Seven, making his way to the shower. It was the same every morning. A chime woke them. They had sex, they showered, then they headed to breakfast. This was followed by work. Day in and day out they performed the same ritual for as long as Number Eight could remember.

Their home module was one room. Bedroom, shower, and toilet all shared the same open space. Although sparse, it was roomy and comfortable enough, besides, it was all that he had ever known.

Number Seven sat on the edge of their bed and stared at him, waiting for her turn to use the shower. She was over a foot shorter than him, and was slightly over-weight, with short black-hair. She wasn't particular attractive, and looked a bit "frumpy", but she was his partner and he had no complaints.

Number Eight reached in and turned on the shower, stepping in a moment later. He had accidentally turned it all the way to the hot position, and it burnt him. He didn't get out, he just stood there, because he felt something. It wasn't the intense heat, the steaming water was bearable, but the feeling of different. Something different from their mundane, routine existence.

After Number Eight turned off the shower, he went over to the large mirror beside the nearby sink and began to dry off. He observed his muscular toned frame in the mirror. He stood six foot tall and weighed about a hundred and eighty pounds. His short hair was light brown and his eyes were blue.

When he raised his right arm to dry beneath it, his gaze caught sight of something just below his armpit, on his side. The scorching hot water had turned his skin red, but white markings had raised up against the red. When Number Eight leaned in closer to the mirror, he could see that it was writing.

He stared hard at the image that was now fading as his skin cooled. There was a series of nine numbers, followed by six more below those. Below that was O+. Underneath that was the word Protestant. That was interesting, but what really caught his eye was the top three words, Daniel Allen Taylor. Then they were gone, his skin returning to its pre-heat burn color.

Number Eight turned to tell Number Seven, but she had already entered the shower. It would be hard for her to hear him, besides, the images were gone. What were they? What could they possibly mean? He pondered these questions while he and his partner dressed in their brown work shirts and pants. Once they heard the breakfast chime, they slipped on their canvas shoes and headed out to breakfast.

The dining module was full, with all of the other pod members present. There were six couples residing at the orchard pod, each living in a home module that exactly matched their own. Number Seven and Number Eight went over to the drink dispenser and after pushing a button, received a large glass of breakfast.

The dining module had three square tables with four chairs each, providing the exact amount of seats for each member of the pod. Number Seven and Eight made their way over to the only two available chairs, and sat across from Number Five and Number Six.

Number Five was a stunning young redhead, with intense blue eyes, and a curvaceous body. Number Eight barely noticed her, hoping to get a chance to speak with her partner. Number Six was a middle-aged balding man with slightly greying hair. He was lanky, but otherwise fairly unremarkable.

Number Eight couldn't stop thinking about what he had seen under his arm that morning, and wanted to talk about it, so said to Number Six, "Hey, I saw something this morning."

"Drink your breakfast." Number Seven interrupted him, drinking from her own glass.

Number Eight gave her a small smile and swallowed down the thick white substance. It tasted like a fruity shake, with a slight tartness to it. They had the same thing every breakfast, and that was the only meal of the day. It took him two attempts to finish off the drink. He looked over at Number Six, wanting to speak with him, but the memory of what he wanted to talk about had faded away, along with most of his other thoughts.

The third chime signaled that it was work time. When they made their way to the apple orchard, they had to pass the command module. They rarely went in there, just when they were sick, and for check-ups. Walking by it usually gave Number Eight a bad feeling, but he had no idea why.

Standing outside the door were always a pair of overseers. They flanked both sides of the entrance, like silent sentinels. These two never spoke, just stood there, guarding. They wore black hard suits, almost like armor, with matching black helmets. The face shields were mirrored, failing to reveal what was hidden within the helmet.

On their chests was a circle made of red light. It was about the size of an egg, but round. When the overseer in the command module examined you, the lighted circle always turned from red to green. The overseers had never harmed him, but he still didn't like being around them. They made him feel uneasy.

The twelve pod dwellers entered the apple grove and began pruning and watering the five-hundred tree grove. Eight hours later, the fourth chime would sound, signaling the end of the workday. A fifth chime would tell them that it was time to sleep. Every day, five chimes. They signaled wake up, breakfast, work, end of work, and sleep. Day in and day out.

The following day, Number Eight awoke with a start. He had been having the dream again. Flashing lights, large explosions, and popping sounds surrounded him while he ran across a grassy field. Bodies lay everywhere. The dream was smoky confusion. He used to have it all the time, but then it had faded off. This was the first time that he had the dream in a long time.

A moment later, the first chime sounded. Number Eight rolled over and climbed on top of Number Seven. He finished a few minutes later, and climbed off her and headed for the shower, following his mind-numbing daily routine. When he reached for the shower handle, he froze, a memory exploding upon him.

The images of the marks under his arm came flooding back into his mind. How had he forgotten them in the first place? Were they real? Were they a dream? Number Eight was very confused. He reached into the shower and turned it all the way to hot.

After stepping in for a moment, he climbed back out and rushed over to the mirror. Upon lifting his arm, he saw the clear markings again. Number Eight stared at them until they faded away. 'Daniel Allen Taylor' was clearly there. He hadn't been dreaming.

Then he was. Flashes, bangs, and screams came rushing into his head, his reoccurring nightmare coming back to him vividly, with a man running up to him and shouting in his face, "Run Dat run! They are coming!"

Then Number Eight nearly blacked out, and had to grab the sink to steady himself, the dream leaving his mind as quickly as it had struck him. What the hell was going on? None of this made any sense to him. He knew that he had seen the markings under his arm the day before, but had forgotten about them, just after.....just after drinking his breakfast.

Number Seven stepped out of the shower, and seeing his face, asked, "Are you okay?"

He debated telling her, but decided to wait, answering, "I just have a lot on my mind."

She smiled at him and said, "That is the beauty of living in the pod. We never have anything on our minds. Get dressed. Second chime is about to sound."

Number Seven and Number Eight dressed and sat on the end of their bed, waiting. Neither spoke. They rarely did. Once the chime sounded, they put on their canvas shoes and exited their pod. Once again, they were the last ones to the dining module. This was always the case, because their home module was the farthest away.

This morning, they sat across from Number One and Number Two. Number One was a short petite blond lady with light blue eyes. Number Two was a very muscular black man with a thin moustache. Neither spoke as they were drinking their tart fruit shakes. Number Seven began drinking hers. Number Eight merely stared at his cup, eying the white milky substance.

The name Daniel Allen Taylor weighed heavily on his mind. 'Who was he, and more importantly, why was the man's name imprinted under his arm? Should he tell the others, or just drink his breakfast and forget about the whole thing?'

"Drink your breakfast." Number Seven sat peering at him curiously, then uncharacteristically placed her hand on his and added, "Are you sure that you are okay?"

He stared into her brown eyes, and switched his cup with hers, saying, "I'm fine. I already drank my breakfast. You need to drink yours before the second chime sounds."

She looked down at the cup in front of her, confused, and started, "I did....." Then Number Seven shrugged and started drinking his breakfast.

"I'm going on vacation," Number One said, rubbing the small bulge in her stomach.

"When?" Number Eight asked, knowing that when their female partners became pregnant, they went away for awhile.

"During my last check up in the command module, the overseers said that I would be leaving very soon."

"She deserves a nice vacation." Number Two smiled. "I am very happy for her."

"The men never get vacations," Number Eight mused.

Number two frowned at him for a moment, then smiled again, saying, "Number One deserves a nice vacation, I am very happy for her."

Third chime sounded, and the twelve pod residents headed for the apple orchard. This time when they passed the command module, the overseers seemed more ominous to Number Eight. He stared into the black helmet of one, and when he turned his head to watch Number Eight passing, the man quickly looked at his feet.

Once they were in the orchard, the group busily began pruning the trees and watering them. Number Eight was near the back end of the pod wall, using pruning sheers, when an intense pain started inside of his head. The headache rapidly grew in strength, bringing on dizziness. The world spun with growing intensity, then he passed out onto the ground.

Some time later, he felt someone shaking him. "Are you okay, do you need an overseer?"
It was Number Five, staring at him with her intense blue eyes, her red hair falling over her shoulders, barely covering her ample breasts. He was surprised that he had never noticed how beautiful she was before.

"No, I am okay. I think I just got dizzy in the sun," he assured.

"I think I should get an overseer." She frowned, biting her lower pouty red lip.

He had to fight off an urge to kiss her, struggling to get a grip on himself. "No, I will go to the command module once we hear fourth chime."

She stared at him for a moment longer, and then walked away, heading to whatever duty she had to attend to. He caught himself staring at her shapely behind while she left. She was one attractive woman, he thought. Then a fly started to buzz around his face.

Number Eight waved it off, noticing that it flew straight into a spider web hanging between two branches, where it began to struggle. A long-legged black spider began traversing from the top of the web towards the unfortunate fly.

"Oh no!" Number Eight gasped, staring at the scene with a fascinated horror. The fly managed to get a couple of legs free and looked like he was about to escape, then the spider was upon it, biting and wrapping the insect.

"Oh no!" Number Eight whispered again, this time with great anguish, his face aghast, while his lips started to tremble. "I've killed you."

Large wet tears flowed steadily down his cheeks and he openly cried like a baby. He fell to the ground in a fetal position, sorrow racking his body as he sobbed uncontrollable. Then it was over as quickly as it had begun. He sat up, looking about to see if anyone had seen his emotional outburst. Fortunately, he was alone in the back of the orchard.

Fourth chime sounded, causing the emotional man to jump up. He wiped the big wet tears from his face with his brown sleeve, and made his way out of the orchard. He needed to get control of himself. Day one without the breakfast drink had been intense.

First chime sounded and Number Eight rolled over and climbed on top of Number Seven. As usual, it was over rather quickly. He jumped out of bed and showered, and after drying off his body, sat on the end of his bed while he towel dried his hair.

Then he caught a glimpse of Number Seven through the shower door. She was rinsing the shampoo from her hair, with her hands over her head. This caused her breast to jiggle. Number Eight stared hard, feeling the passion start to boil in his veins. He got up from the bed and went over and opened the shower door.

"What...?" she said, but then he was on her.

Number Eight took her in the shower, this time with the sex lasting much longer and taking place in various positions. They had just finished when second chime sounded. They both had to rush to get dried and dressed.

"You are changing," Number Seven said to him while they slipped on their canvas shoes.

None of the other couples noticed that they were extra late to the dining module. The others just mumbling some platitudes about the weather like they did every day. Once they sat down with their fruity breakfast drinks, Number Eight once again switched his full cup with Number Seven's empty one. This time she didn't even bother to protest, she just drank it down, as if that was the daily routine.

Number Eight couldn't help but look over at Number Five, watching every sip she took of her drink. He started to feel aroused. He couldn't help but noticed that after drinking the fruity white liquid, his counterparts' eyes glazed over even more, if that were possible. This look seemed to wear off a bit during the day, but would come back every morning with the breakfast drink.

Number Twelve, a curly brown haired middle-aged man was sitting across from him, shifting in his seat. Next to Number Twelve was Number Eleven, a younger black woman with even curlier hair. Annoyingly, Number Twelve's shifting kept blocking Number Eight's view of the stunning Number Five. Plus, he kept rambling on about the nice day. Number Eight felt another emotion bubbling to the surface.

"Could you just shut up and stop moving all about!" Number Eight exploded at Number Twelve. The raised voice caused everybody in the dining module to stop talking, and they all looked over at Number Eight.

"Sorry, sorry. Couldn't sleep last night. My apologies," he lied, and decided that he would need to steer clear of the red-headed woman until he figured out what was going on.

"You should go over to the command module and see about that sleeping problem," Number Twelve suggested, and then continued to ramble on about the weather, as if nothing had happened.

The rest of the day went fairly smoothly, with Number Eight staying mostly to himself in the orchard, avoiding the others as much as he could. Nobody that he did see seemed to remember his outburst in the dining module.

At fourth chime, he moodily made his way back to his home module, passing by Number Twelve, who said, "Beautiful day that were having."

Number Eight responded with an angry, "Take your weather and shove it up your ass."

He slammed the door behind him and found Number Eight sitting on the end of their bed, waiting for the fifth chime to tell her to go to sleep. He sat down beside her and took her hand. He wanted some answers.

"Can we talk?" he asked.

"Yes. That is what we are doing," she answered.

He smiled at her unwitting joke, and continued, "Don't you think that it is odd that we just sit here waiting for a chime to tell us to go to bed? I mean...we live our life off the chimes."

"That is what we are supposed to do," she answered.

"But, what if we didn't want to?" he asked.

"What? What do you mean? Why wouldn't you want to?" She looked confused.

"Well, what if we wanted to go on vacation. Just go somewhere. Why couldn't we?" he questioned.

"I will go on vacation once you impregnate me." She smiled at him.

"No. That is not the same. Why couldn't we go somewhere together, just leave the pod?" he pushed.

"We can't do that," she said, confused. "We don't do that."

He liked her confused look, it was somewhat tender. "Well, why do I have to wait for first chime to do this?" He leaned in and kissed her on the lips, unable to remember the last time that they had kissed, or if they ever had.

She pulled away from him, causing Number Eight to grab her around the waist and kiss her even harder. She didn't pull away from him this time, just became compliant. He had her clothes off quickly and made love to her twice.

The second time, she let out a small moan, causing it to end quickly. He hadn't heard a woman moan in passion in as long as he could remember. Still, it frustrated him that she had just lain there and taken it. He wanted more of a response from her.

Fifth chime sounded, and before rolling over and falling to sleep, she said, "You are changing." Day two without the breakfast drink had ended.

Explosions, smoke, flashing lights, and screams visited his sleep. There was more. Much more for him to discover. It was buried there, just under the surface of his memory, wanting him to remember. Then there was that face, calling him 'Dat'.

First chime woke them. When he didn't roll over, Number Seven did and opened her legs. Number Eight just shook his head and got out of bed. He was tired of living like a robot. The rest of their morning routine went smoothly.

Once in the dining module, he sat across from Number Two, with Number One being obviously absent. After switching cups with Number Seven, he learned that the overseers had sent the blond-haired, blue-eyed lady on vacation last night. Number Two seemed happy about it and simply smiled, content that his partner would be back soon.

Once they reached the apple orchard, the pod residents saw that the burlap bags and wooden baskets had arrived, signaling that it was harvest time. This would take several weeks to complete. The men would pick the apples and load the baskets and take them to the four sheds located in the corners of the orchard. The women would then load the apples into the larger burlap sacks.

Number Eight went to the farthest corner again, and began picking the ripe red fruit. Without thinking about it, he took a large bite from one. This was the third day that he hadn't eaten the breakfast drink and he was having pains in his stomach. After eating three of the succulent juicy apples, the pains subsided.

A moment later he passed gas loudly. For a second, he bit his lip, then he lost control and burst into laughter. He laughed so hard that his eyes watered. He fell on the ground and rolled about, feeling intense joy. When he sat up, he saw her.

Number Five was in the shed, bent over, stacking burlap bags. Her rounded firm curves aroused him immediately. He tried to fight his strong urges, but it was too late. He came up behind the red-haired beauty and pushed her forward onto the burlap sacks, then pulled her pants down. She resisted initially, but after he was on top of her back, she stopped. After a few forceful moments, it was over.

"I am not Number Seven," she said, looking unnerved. "I am Number Five."

"I know." He looked at his feet, unable to meet her gaze, his cheeks turning bright red.

Number Five continued to stare at him with her intense blue eyes. He became painfully aware that he was naked, and after pulling up his brown pants, he ran from the shed. He was flooded with the feelings of a new emotion. Guilt.

Author Notes Implantation is a book that I had a great time writing. Lots of interesting characters and a couple of unexpected twists. This is my first time sharing a part of it. I hope you enjoy Chapter One, Shattered Illusion.


Chapter 2
Dat

By Douglas Goff

Warning: The author has noted that this contains the highest level of sexual content.

Had he just raped Number Five? What the hell was wrong with him? He was an emotional mess. He was acting like an animal, being driven by his emotions with an intensity that he could not control. Lust, anger, sadness, joy, and now guilt were all threatening to consume him. He had to get control over himself. Should he just start drinking breakfast again?

That night while they sat on their bed, waiting for fifth chime, Number Eight was contemplating how to try and explain what he was going through to Number Seven. She just sat still and stared at the wall in front of her. He reached out and took her hand.

"Are we going to make love again?" she asked, and started to lie back on the bed.

"No. No, I want to talk," he replied.

"We are talking," she simply stated.

"Look. I'm planning on leaving the pod," he began. "Will you go with me?"

"Go?" she said, "There is nowhere to go. You are changing."

"Yes. Yes I am," he answered, getting an idea. "Do you want to understand what I am going through? Will you help me?"

"Of course," she answered. "You are my partner."

"Good then. If you want to understand and help me, I need you to skip breakfast tomorrow," he said. "I need you to switch your full cup with the empty cup of whoever sits across from you. Can you do that for me?"

"Will that help you?" she asked, squeezing his hand.

"Yes, if you don't drink your breakfast, that will help me," he affirmed.

"Okay. I will not drink my breakfast tomorrow to help you." She smiled at him.

He leaned in and gave her a soft kiss, then the chime sounded. Seconds later they were asleep. Loud bangs and booms broke into his peaceful slumber. Gun shots, artillery, and flashes all flooded out of his subconscious. Then a helicopter flew by overhead.

Next came the young face, screaming into his, "Corporal Dat, run! They are coming."

Number Eight sat straight up in his bed, sweat covering his body. The words under his arm were a meat tag, worn by members of the military. They bore the same information that was on the standard issue dog tags. These were worn to help identify the body in case of death in combat.

He was Dat. Daniel Allen Taylor. With that memory, all the rest came flooding back in. He had been a corporal in the United States Marines when they had arrived. It had been 2032, when the invaders had taken the entire planet in twelve short hours. They had smashed through satellite, radar, and encrypted technology the first hour, shutting down every nation's defenses.

Some remnants of the US Marine forces station at the destroyed Camp Pendleton base had been hiding in the Los Angeles Memorial Coliseum, where the Dodgers, Raiders, and the Bruins had once played. That evening, the enemy ripped the roof off and descended upon them.

An overseer had pointed the baton that they always carried on their side at him. He unloaded his service 9mm into its face, with no effect. The overseer had fired some type of energy beam at him and a green circle formed around him.  One second, he had been standing on the green grass of the stadium, and the next he was standing in a large glass room filled with hundreds of people.

The next two days had been awful. They had stood shoulder to shoulder, naked and packed in tight like sardines. People had started to urinate and defecate on themselves. They would fall asleep on their feet, leaning against the bodies surrounding them. People would cry and some would scream out. 

The only other thing in the large glass box were tubes hanging from the ceiling. Hundreds of them. Water sprayed out of them every four hours, cleaning them off, which quickly disappeared into small drains covering the expansive floor.

The worst was the hunger. They could drink every few hours, but there was no food. Then someone got the idea to suck on the hose. He could hear others exclaiming that it was food. The more people who partook of the hose food, the quieter the glass box became. He held out for another full day, before he had to eat.

He could remember grabbing the hose and putting it to his lips. He sucked cautiously, and had been rewarded with the fruity white liquid with the tart taste. He could remember sucking from the hose several times the following day, then nothing. He couldn't remember what had happened after that. It was like his memories started fresh, about six or seven years ago, in the orchard pod.

He had one more strong memory from his past. He was almost too afraid to entertain it. Andrea. He had been married and they had two kids. Four-year-old Adrian and two-year-old Alesia. Andrea had been the love of his life. She was a petite blond that he had called ‘Tinker Bell', because she greatly resembled the Disney character. He would not allow himself to think about where they were now.

"You are changing," Number Seven said from the bed beside him, causing him to realize that he must have woken her.

"Just remember to skip your breakfast. That will help me," he reiterated.

The first chime sounded. He climbed on top of Number Seven, realizing while they had sex that although he didn't love her, he did care deeply about her. They had been together for over six years now, and his real family was most likely gone. She was the closest thing to family that he had left. He planned to lay low, and carefully plan out his next move. When second chime sounded, they slipped on their canvas shoes and headed to the dining module.

Once again, they were the last couple there. Of course, he thought, when he saw that the only available table was with Number Five and Number Six. He hesitantly sat down across from the older male, glancing over at Number Five, who was staring down at the cup between her hands. 

Number Seven looked at him and drank down her breakfast, then took his cup and drank it. Her eyes took on the glazed look while she reached over and took his hand in hers. He shook his head, realizing that she was never going to understand what was going on.

"I understand that you made love to my partner." Number Six said.

Number Seven immediately released his hand, with a hurt look upon her face. Number Eight clenched his fists, expecting a fight with Number Six. Number Five glanced up at him, and when their eyes connected, she quickly looked back down.

"Number Seven is your partner. Number Five is my partner. You make love to Number Seven, not number Five. I'm glad that we worked this out," he said, and then drank down his white fruity drink, causing his eyes to glaze. "My, what a lovely day we are having today. I hope it doesn't rain."

"What the hell?" Number Eight responded. "I slept with your woman and all you are going to say is what a lovely day?"

The third chime sounded, causing the trio at his table to rise, with Number Six stating, "Time for work. We have a lot of apples to pick."

Later that day, Number Eight entered the apple shed and saw Number Five filling burlap sacks. She had her red hair up and looked exquisite. When she saw him, she started to go, but then stopped. She turned back and stared at him with her electric blue eyes.

"What did you do to me?" she asked.

"I know it was wrong," he said. "I am going through some . . . changes."

"No, I mean you did something to me," she repeated. "I have never given you a second thought before yesterday. Now I can't stop thinking about you. Your deep blue eyes. Your rippling muscles. Your face. I don't understand. What did you do to me. It's been so long since a man has looked at me with such . . . passion."

He leaned in and kissed her pouty red lips. She let him for a moment, then put her hands on his chest and pushed him back, biting her lower lip. He took a step back towards her, wanting more. Much more.

"No, I am Number Five," she said.

"I am Daniel Allen Taylor," he answered.

"I don't understand," she stated, clearly confused.

"Look. If you want to understand everything, stop drinking that crap that they give you for breakfast. Then come talk to me. That drink somehow makes you forget your past, and mind-numbs you. It messes with your memories. If you keep drinking that stuff, then don't bother me again,” he said and walked out of the shed, upset at how turned on she had made him, yet it was a victory as he had managed to control himself.

He worked hard the rest of the day, with only a couple of incidents. He noted that the ladders provided to pick apples from the tops of the trees would also allow him to climb over the smooth white eight-foot walls that ringed the orchard pod. It was the beginnings of a plan.

At well past noon, he had consumed seven of the delicious apples, and had stacked the cores in a pile. For some reason, the pile of apple cores struck him as funny. A smirk turned into a giggle, followed by a laugh. Finally, he was rolling in the dirt, belly laughing, with tears running down his face.

Once the emotional tidal wave had passed, he sat up and saw Number Twelve staring at him. The curly brown hair middle-aged man had a look of fear on his face. Daniel simple growled at the man, who scurried away. This caused another outburst of uncontrollable laughter that lasted a few more minutes. By the time he had finished, his sides hurt.

About an hour later, he took another basket of apples to the storage shed. When he walked in, he saw Number Six standing there with his arm around Number Five's waist. He gave them an angry scowl and stormed out of the shed. Once he retreated to the far end of the grove, he took his jealousy out on the first thing that he could find.

He punched, kicked, crushed, smashed, and pummeled a stack of the wooden collecting baskets, until they were no more than a pile of rubbish. He stood there panting from the exertion, his mind racing with hatred for Number Six. He just knew that he was climbing on top of her at first chime every morning, Number Six didn't deserve Number Five. She was his!

It took several minutes for the intense jealousy to subside. It left him feeling quite foolish, and exhausted. He sat down with his back against the smooth white wall and drifted off to sleep. When fourth chime sounded, it woke him up. He noticed that he had bloody knuckles from his earlier rounds with the collection baskets.

I'm going absolutely crazy," he mumbled to himself.

 After tossing the smashed pieces of baskets over the wall, he made his way back out of the apple orchard. When he passed by the two overseers, one turned its head and watched him.

"What are you looking at?" he scowled, and kept walking.

When Daniel entered his home module, Number Seven was sitting on the end of the bed, staring at the wall.

"I thought you were going to help me and skip the breakfast drink." He stared at her.

"You are changing," she said.

"No shit," he answered, raising his voice. "You would understand if you skipped breakfast."

"Why would I?" she asked, a slight quiver in her voice.

"To help me!" he shouted.

"Lower your voice or the overseers will come and take you for a checkup," she warned, her lips now trembling.

"Don't drink the breakfast drink tomorrow," he demanded. Happy that she was finally seeing some type of emotion from the woman.

"I will drink it," she said, "I don't want to change. I like it here. I like our life together. I don't want that to change. I don't want to lose you."

He stared at her, then came over and sat down on the bed beside her, wiping a single tear that ran down her cheek. There was no use he thought. She was already lost in this fake reality, and didn't want to come out.

"It's okay." He hugged her close. "Tomorrow you will drink your breakfast, and after your eyes glaze over, you will be back to your happy self." He caressed her and tended to her for several minutes, overcome with strong feelings of sympathy. After fifth chime, they were asleep in seconds.

He had an intense dream that night, but this time there were no explosions, lights, or screaming. He dreamed of his former wife Andrea. Her beautiful face. Her tender ways and mannerisms, her incredible laugh. The dream felt so very real.

At first chime, Number Seven rolled over and made herself available to him, but he simply got out of bed and jumped in the shower. He couldn't make love to another woman with the images of Andrea so fresh in his head. When second chime sounded, they slipped on their canvas shoes and headed out to the dining module.

Once they had their fruity drinks, they sat down next to Number Two and a woman that Daniel didn't recognize. She was a short petite blond with light blue eyes, but she was not Number One. Daniel stared at her hard, thinking that she looked a lot like his former wife Andrea. The bone structure, the body shape, and the hair style. Maybe it was just his mind playing tricks on him.

"Look who is back from vacation." Number Two smiled broadly.

"Welcome back Number One," Number Seven said, drinking her breakfast.

"That's not Number One," Daniel advised, switching his full cup with Number Seven's empty one, almost subconsciously now.

"Stop it Number Eight. You have known my partner for years," the muscular black man said, the smile leaving his face.

Daniel thought it best to go along for now, and said, "I was just making a little joke."

"Oh, that is a good one," Number Two answered, the big smile returning to his face.

"How was your vacation, Number One?" Daniel asked, curious what the new woman would say.

"It was wonderful," she answered, with even her voice sounding like Andrea's. "The weather was very nice."

"I bet it was." Daniel smirked.

"What do you mean, Number Eight?" Number Two questioned.

"Oh, nothing," he said, glad to hear third chime.

Not one time during breakfast did he bother to look over at Number Five. He worked hard the first half of the day, and tried even harder not to have any emotional outbursts. He had a weak moment when he found a dead mouse under one of the full apple baskets, and nearly burst into tears as sadness threatened to overtake him.

"It's just a mouse. It's just a mouse," he kept telling himself, until he finally managed to hold off the crying fit.

"Can I talk to you?" Number Five managed to find him at noon.

He immediately noticed that the top three buttons on her brown shirt were unbuttoned, and she was showing a lot of cleavage. He bit his tongue hard, fighting off his urges. Daniel climbed down the ladder he was on and walked away from the beautiful redhead. It took every ounce of strength that he had not to look back at her.

By fourth chime, he was pretty proud of himself. He had managed to control himself and had no outbursts that day, although it had left him feeling very frustrated.  He did do a lot of thinking about the new Number One.

The overseers were obviously taking the pregnant women and keeping them and their babies. For what purpose, he did not know. Then they sent in replacement women, and somehow, everybody just accepted the new partner. Every time he learned something new about his situation, he just became more confused.

Daniel sat on the edge of his bed beside Number Seven and thought about his options. He needed to get someone to stop drinking the white substance, but who, and how? Number Seven was out. She was content to be a mind-numbed zombie. Maybe he could start switching other people's drinks as well? He decided to watch for an opportunity. Then fifth chime sounded.

Andrea came back in his dreams. This time it was not about her tender ways, although the dream was equally as real. The vivid dream was about her passionate side, starting out with kisses and caresses. Then he was on top of her, giving it to her good, which lasted for several minutes.

Once he finished, he realized that something wasn't right. He was on top of somebody, with his hand over her mouth. There was a stream of bright moonlight coming through the open door to the home module, only it wasn't his home module. He could make out Number One's blue eyes staring up at him, and could feel her hot breath against the palm of his hand, her breathing heavy with the exertion and from him blocking her airway.

He immediately looked over to the other side of the bed at Number Two, who was still in a heavy slumber. The muscular black man was slightly snoring with his mouth wide open. Daniel climbed off the woman, realizing that he was completely naked, and without any shoes.

"I am Number One," she said.

"You're dreaming," he answered and made his way to the open door.

"Oh. Okay. That makes more sense, because you are not Number Two." The petite blond rolled over and closed her eyes.

Daniel closed the module door and started to make his way back to his own home, when he saw bright lights coming from the orchard. Curiosity got the better of him, and thanks to a full moon, he could see that the two overseers were not at the command module.

He made his way to the corner of the command module and peeked around it into the orchard half of the pod. What he saw startled him. They were at least a half dozen overseers, loading the burlap sacks full of apples into a round vehicle that hovered two feet off the ground. A second hover craft waited behind that one for loading. Both had soft blue lights coming from underneath them, but were quiet.

There was a third one of the hovering vehicles, loaded with full burlap sacks heading straight for the back of the orchard. That vehicle let off a slight hum as it moved. The overseer driving the hovercraft pushed a button on the console and an entire section of the white wall turned into a glowing green circle of some type. The vehicle floated right into the big power circle and with a fizzling sound, disappeared!

Daniel turned to go, but noticed that the door into the command module had been left slightly ajar. He looked back at the remaining hover cars and saw that the overseers were still loading the second vehicle. He took a deep breath, and stepped inside the command module.

It was the first time that he had ever entered the command module unescorted. He came in through the only apparent entryway. He always found it odd that there were no chairs, although everything else appeared to be the same. Computers, screens, buttons, and the glass sliding doors that led into the small room with the exam table were all in place. That is, except for the elongated pod in the center of the room. It was about eight feet long and maybe two feet wide.

Daniel noticed that the capsule had the same light blue glow coming from underneath it and was hovering about a foot off the ground. He curiously walked up to the box and observed that the top half was covered in glass. There was a slight foggy layer covering the entire see-through section.

Daniel placed his hand on the glass and immediately felt that it was cold. There seemed to be a blue glow coming from inside of the capsule as well. He cautiously wiped off a small section of the surface and saw a face staring up at him in the dim blue light. Daniel ran from the building, not stopping for anything until he reached the safety of his own home module.

Once he crawled back into bed with Number Seven, it took him a very long time to fall asleep. He couldn't get the horrible image of what he had seen out of his mind. It was the frozen face of the original Number One, the blond woman's eyes wide open with a look of pure terror on her face.

Author Notes In Chapter One, a man named Number 8 finds himself living a fairly mundane life inside of an apple orchard. It is a boring routine life, that is until he finds odd markings under his arm and stops drinking the one meal of the day, a fruity breakfast drink. His emotions go haywire, from lust to joy to sadness. The chapter culminates with him forcefully having sex with Number Five, a woman that he had barely noticed before, and who was not his assigned partner.


Chapter 3
Emotional Carnage

By Douglas Goff

Number Eight crouched in the corner of his home module, his panicked eyes stared at the front door. The fear had come with first chime. The overseers must have seen him. They must know that he was out last night. He was certain that they were going to burst through the door at any moment.

“What are you doing?” Number Seven asked, a look of concern on her face as she crouched beside him, then took his hand. “You need to get dressed. Second chime is going to sound anytime now.”

His heartrate steadied, and the panic slowly left him. Maybe they didn’t know. Surely, they would have come already if they had discovered his nocturnal activities. He got up and quickly dressed. The chime sounded, and he slipped into his canvas shoes.

Once they arrived at the dining module and got their drinks, they sat at the only open table. Across from them were Number Two, and Number One, who looked at him curiously. He could see Number Five looking at him from an adjoining table, her eyes wide open, as if she were trying to tell him something.

“Good morning,” Daniel said to the couple at his table.

“Beautiful weather we are having.” Number Two smiled at them. “I hope it doesn’t rain.”

“I dreamed that you came to our home module last night and we had sex Number Eight,” Number One said, nonchalantly.

The other three people at the table raised their heads and stared at her, until Number Two broke into a laugh, and said, “Great joke!”

Number Eight put his hand over his mouth, subconsciously telling himself not to speak, yet he did, “Your partner just told you that she dreamed about having sex with me and you think it’s funny?”

“I just said great joke,” the muscular black man smiled at him.

“So, what if I told you that I actually did sneak into your home module last night and had sex with your partner while you slept beside us?” Daniel said, unable to stop himself.

“Oh, Number Eight, you are as funny as Number One.” Number Two simply smiled at him.

"Why is that funny?” Daniel knew that he was pushing it, but his curiosity was winning out.

“Because Number One is my partner and your partner is Number Seven. Very funny.” Number Two let out another laugh and then stood up when third chime sounded.

Number Eight shook his head as he slowly rose to his feet. While he made his way to the orchard, he couldn’t help but wonder what they could possibly be putting in the breakfast drink that would make everyone so docile. He stared at his feet when he passed by the two overseers at the command module. They took no notice of him.

It took him a half-hour to fill his first basket with apples, because he ate several of the ones that he picked and tossed the cores over the white wall. When he made his way to the storage shed, he saw Number Five standing there waiting for him.

Her red hair was hanging down to her shoulders and her brown shirt was halfway unbuttoned. She stared at him with a look of pure desire as she bit her lower lip. When he hesitated, she walked straight up to him and kissed him hard on the mouth.

“You, um…stopped drinking breakfast,” he stammered.

“Shut up.” She shoved him hard onto the burlap sacks.

They spent the next three hours in the shed, fulfilling each other’s needs. After they were spent, they quickly dressed, and sat staring at each other giggling. Then they both broke out into uncontrollable laughter. This lasted for a few minutes.

“My name was Victoria,” she finally broke the silence. “I was married and had a daughter.”

The woman broke out crying with large wet tears rolling down her face. This turned into deep sobs that shook her entire body. Daniel joined in, and for several minutes they clung tightly to each other until the tears stopped.  

“What the hell is going on?” she asked him. “I am an emotional wreck.”

“It’s the breakfast drink. That fruity mix with the tart taste is laced with something,” he explained. “Somehow it makes one susceptible to routine and very compliant. But once you are off it, watch out! Lust, anger, sadness, fear, panic, guilt, and joy all hit you in bursts. I’m starting to get some control back, barely.”

“Tell me about it,” she said. “It’s like a roller coaster ride.”

“What did you do before the invasion?” he asked.

“I was a nurse at Henry Ford Hospital in Detroit,” she advised, then asked, “And you?”  

“I was a US Marine stationed at Camp Pendleton,” he answered. “Experimental Weapons Battalion.”

“Figures,” she giggled. “You are built like a marine.”

“I guess we need to figure out what to do next,” he said.

“The only thing that I can think about is my hunger,” she frowned. “I am starving.”

Daniel tossed her an apple, from which she took a large juicy bite. They both ate a couple more, before they made their way to the door of the hut. After looking about and seeing no one, she gave him a tender kiss and turned to go.

“Hey, let’s play it very low key,” he cautioned her. “Go about everything as normal until we see an opportunity, or come up with a plan.”

“Okay,” she smiled. “We are in this together.”

For the next week, they met in the shed and spent a couple of hours satisfying each other. Afterwards, they would talk, and Daniel filled her in about the original Number One and what the overseers did to pregnant women. Finally, they decided to just go over the wall with a ladder and take their chances outside of the orchard pod. They decided to spend the next couple of days gathering supplies, then they would go.

“Should we try to bring anyone else?” Victoria asked, while pulling up her pants.

“I doubt anyone would come.” Daniel looked perplexed, then added, “I tried to talk to Number Seven a few times about skipping breakfast, but she seems to be too far gone.”

“You’re still sleeping with her!” Victoria hissed, and slapped him hard across the face. “I hate you!”

He grabbed her arms and pinned the supple woman against his body, waiting for her emotional storm to pass. Once her breathing calmed down and she stopped struggling against him, he let her go. She simply shrugged, and then gave him a weak smile. Their emotional outbursts were going to bring them down if they weren’t careful.

They went to the doorway of the shack and looked about, seeing nothing more than a few baskets and ladders nearby. Victoria turned and gave Daniel a lingering kiss, while she finished buttoning up her shirt. Then they went their separate ways. Neither of them had noticed Number Six standing at the top of a nearby ladder, staring at them. He had been concealed by the branches of the apple tree.

The following day, once third chime sounded, Daniel hurried back to the shed in the apple orchard. When he entered, he did not see Victoria. Instead, Number Six stood in the center of the room with his arms crossed.

“I thought that we had settled this,” the middle aged, balding man said.

“Where is she?” Daniel asked, approaching the older man.

“Number Five is not your concern. She is my partner,” he answered. “Number Seven is your partner.”

“Where is she,” Daniel asked again, his chest bumping Number Six’s, his anger starting to rise.

“I sent her to be examined by the overseers,” he replied. “She is changing.”

“You did what?” Daniel was really upset now, and bumped the man’s chest even harder.

“Number Five is my partner,” Number Six said, and hesitantly raising his finger, gave Daniel a light poke in the chest.

The anger within Daniel rose like a tidal wave, sweeping over any semblance of control that he had been maintaining. He grabbed the older man’s finger and broke it, causing him to scream. Daniel followed up with an elbow to his face, breaking his nose. Then he was on top of the fallen man, punching him in the head, repeatedly, until he was bleeding from several spots.

Finally, Daniel found a large rock on the floor, and caved in Number Six’s head. Daniel rolled off the dead man, ending up on his back, breathing heavily. Now the fear came like another tidal wave, causing him to panic. He jumped up and walked in circles, his mind racing, unsure of what to do next. He wasn’t sure how long he had walked the circle, before his mind relaxed, and the intense fear left him.

Daniel dragged the battered and bruised body of Number Six out of the shed and laid it under some pruned branches stacked against the back wall. He retrieved the large bloodied rock and tossed it over the white wall.

For a brief moment, he thought about gathering their supply bag from the tree that they had tied it in. He could grab a ladder and make a break for it. The thought was fleeting because he couldn’t leave Victoria. He felt a deep love for the beautiful redhead, stronger than anything that he had ever felt before, although he wasn’t sure if the emotion was being generated from his withdrawal from the breakfast drink.

At fourth chime, he made his way from the orchard. When he passed the command module, Victoria exited the structure and walked beside him. Neither dared to look at each other for fear that the overseers were watching.

“What the hell happened in there?” he mumbled under his breath.

“They did a full exam, and told me that I am going to go on vacation soon, because I am newly pregnant,” she whispered back.

“Look, Number Six won’t be coming home tonight…”, he started.

“What did you do?” she interrupted him, slightly raising her voice.

“Listen to me. Don’t report it,” he ordered. “Tomorrow after third chime, we go over the wall. That should give us a good head start, before they even realize that we are gone at fourth chime.”

“Together,” she said, and lightly brushed his hand with hers. They turned in opposite directions to go to their home modules.

Number Seven and he sat on the edge of their bed, waiting for fifth chime. Neither spoke, but she reached over and took his hand in hers. He could see a small teardrop run down her check and onto the side of her chin, where it teetered for a moment, until it splashed onto the comforter.

Finally, she spoke, “Don’t go.”

“How do you know?” he asked.

“You don’t think that I haven’t noticed that things are missing?” she questioned. “The scissors, some of your clothes, your hygiene stuff.”

He thought about lying for a moment, but simply said, “I have to go.”

“It’s that beautiful Number Five isn’t it?” she accused. “You want to be her partner and not mine.”

Her tears began to flow freely now, showing a rare tender side to the usually emotionless woman. He cared about Number Seven, and took her in his arms and hugged her tightly. The hugs turned to kisses, and soon they made love, ignoring fifth chime sounding.

This time, it wasn’t the cold impassionate sex that they had shared every morning for the past several years, but was the passion experienced between two lovers. When they finished, they fell asleep in each other’s arms.

Flashing lights and screams woke him. Was he dreaming again? No, the screams were coming from Number Seven. Then somebody had him by his hair and was dragging him out of bed. He took two hard blows to his back from a baton that the overseers carried, knocking him to the floor. When he tried to rise, he took another shot to the ribcage, dropping him again.

Both he and Number Seven were dragged by their hair from their home module and put in a line on the street. All twelve of the orchard pod citizens, minus Number Six, were put on their knees in a row in front of the home modules. It was still dark outside.

There were at least twenty overseers ringing the humans. All carried the black batons in their hands. One, no more distinct than the others, stepped forward. He walked down the line of kneeling people and stopped in front of Number Eleven.

“You were scheduled for vacation next week. You are leaving now,” the overseer said, his voice sounding a bit mechanical, and somehow hollow.

Daniel chanced a glance down the line and managed to share a look with Number Five. She looked scared, and a bit confused. The curly-brown-haired Number Twelve stood up, as if to protest. He promptly received a black baton to the gut, dropping him back down to his knees.

The two closest overseers stepped forward, and after their red chest light turned green, they grabbed Number Eleven by her arms, pulling her to her feet. They led her away, heading for the command module. Remembering the original Number One, Daniel knew what kind of “vacation” she was in for. He couldn’t let them take Victoria.

The lead overseer continued down the line, and stopped in front of Number Five. She was three people down from Daniel. The overseer stared down at her, while she simply stared at his black boots. The overseer seemed to be thinking for a moment, then he pointed at her and waved a couple of his companions over.

“You were due for a vacation in a few weeks,” the lead overseer said. “You will be taken to the command module and prepared as well. The rest of you are being moved.”

It’s now or never, he thought as two overseers grabbed Victoria by her arms and raised her to her feet. She didn’t resist, just looked towards Daniel, who was already moving. He hit the lead overseer from behind, driving him into one of the two that were flanking Victoria. Damn they were heavy! When they slammed into each other, both toppled to the ground, dropping their batons.

One landed at Victoria’s feet. She swiftly picked it up and used it to bash in the third overseer’s helmet. His entire mirrored face shield cracked. Then Daniel had her by the hand and they were running at a full out sprint towards the orchard. The overseers raised their batons and took aim.

The sound of energy blasts filled the air, and Daniel saw several large red power circles open up to their left and right, disappearing as quickly as they had appeared. Then there was no mistaking the sound of Number Seven’s voice.

“No!” she screamed as she jumped in front of an overseer who was aiming his baton at Daniel’s back.

The overseer pushed a button on the side of his baton and an energy beam shot forward, hitting Number Seven, causing a red circle to form around her. With a sizzle, she was gone. A small pile of black ash sat where Number Seven had just been.

Daniel had no time to mourn. They were still sprinting through the apple orchard, with the overseers in pursuit. They didn’t have time to untie the supply bag from up in the tree. They barely had time to grab a ladder and slam it against the wall. Then they went up and over it, jumping to the ground and heading out into an open field, just as the sun began to rise.

“We made it!” Victoria smiled at him.

Daniel noticed several green power circles in the grass and was about to point them out to her when she stepped in one. With a sizzling sound, she was gone. He stood and stared for a moment, shocked that one second she was there, and the next she had vanished.


Chapter 4
On The Run

By Douglas Goff

He never looked back. Daniel took off at a sprint, and after dodging a couple more of the green power circles, kept going. He crossed three fields, and even saw two more white-walled pods, but steered well clear of them. Then he dropped into a valley, and followed it west, with the sun to his back. This led him to a small town, of maybe two hundred buildings.

Daniel passed a couple of buildings on the outskirts, but avoided going into town, thinking that it would be the first place that the overseers would look. He followed a small creek that ran west from the town and hit a river that ran north to south. He swam across the river, then continued west up a step rise. Here there were a couple of cabins, overlooking the river back to his east.

The cabins were locked, but Daniel managed to climb through a small window into one, where he laid down on a dusty bed and quickly fell asleep. His dreams were haunted with the beautiful face and images of Victoria.

When he woke several hours later, he was disorientated. Had he missed first chime? He reached out for Number Seven, ready to climb on top of her, then the memories of his crazy flight last evening came flooding back to him.

The biggest concern was that he had no food. He knew how to hunt, trap and fish, but was hesitant to leave the cabin. Still, he waited until it was dark again before he went down to the river. After he caught a fish, he set a couple of snare traps.

He gathered some wood and snuck back into the cabin. After locating a lighter, he started a small fire in the fireplace and cooked his fish. He could remember eating a lot of fish, but he couldn’t remember one tasting this good. He giggled for about a half hour over the fish, then realizing that he had killed it, he sobbed uncontrollably for another half hour.

In this manner, Daniel spent the next two weeks. He snuck out at night for food, and stayed in the cabin during the day, sleeping and having emotional outbreaks. He ate several fish, a squirrel, and a groundhog.

The bouts of shame over his recent rapes and murder were the worst, followed up by his sobbing over his lost wife Andrea and lost love Victoria. This was followed by him stomping around the cabin smashing tables, lamps, mirrors, and pretty much anything that he could get his hands on during terrible anger tantrums. More then a few times, he regained his composure and found himself cowering in terror under the bed, hiding from the aliens.  It had been a tough two weeks.

The good news was that his emotional tantrums were becoming more and more infrequent, and he was finally regaining control of himself. He had also found some useful items. A first aid kit, a hunting knife, a flashlight, and some new clothes. He packed away some blue jeans that were just a little loose and a couple of long sleeve shirts.

One thing that he had noticed during his nighttime food outings was that every once in a while he would see series of small blue and green lights in the sky. One day while he was peeking out of the cabin window, he saw an eagle sized flying machine go by, with the same blue and green lights on it. The enemy had drones. Their lights were easier to see during the night, so that pretty much sealed the deal that he would be traveling at that time.

Tonight, he had big plans. He was going to sneak back to the town that he had passed through during his flight from the orchard pod. He was hoping to gather some intelligence on the enemy and learn anything that could help him.

Once it became dark, he waited for another hour, then left the safety of his cabin. It didn’t take him long to make it back down to the small town, where he headed straight for the bar. Not that he needed a drink, although a stiff one sure would come in handy after what he had been through, but he was seeking something else.

He had seen the Black Castle Tavern on the outskirts of the town when he went through the first time, and made his way back there. It had several damaged motorcycles strewn about the parking lot. The door was unlocked, and he quickly went inside.

Daniel lit the candle that he had brought, and noted that the interior was about what he expected. A rough and tumble biker bar, with a couple of pool tables and a beat-up old jukebox in the corner.  He began searching behind and under the bar. Next, he went to the manager’s rundown office and found what he was looking for.

Behind the desk was a Mossberg 12 gauge over-under shotgun. Upon closer inspection, he noted that it was a Maverick HS-12 Thunder Ranch edition. It was black and weighed just over six pounds. He was able to find a shell box in the desk drawer with 17 rounds in it. He had figured that the police stations had been emptied out, but knew that a good biker bar just might pay off. Now he was armed.

He had also gained some information. On top of the desk were invoices, showing that he was in Castle Rock, Washington. Odd, he had just assumed that he was still in California. He grabbed a bottle of Jack and another of Captain Morgan and headed back to the front door. A quick peek outside revealed that he was still alone.

Once he exited the bar and started to head back towards his cabin, he saw something that caught his attention. A building in the downtown area was covered in recruitment posters. ‘Join the Resistance!’ lined the walls. He cautiously made his way into the building.

Daniel’s well-trained eye quickly spotted several green power circles placed in random spots on the floor. He carefully made his way over to a desk, and saw something odd. Pictures of the old prison on Alcatraz, calling it ‘America’s Last Stand’. It appeared that Alcatraz was the headquarters for the resistance. The location wasn’t what he found to be odd.

Why would the resistance be openly advertising their headquarters? Even in a small town, the overseers were likely to eventually see these posters and fliers. It didn’t add up. Regardless, he needed to get back to his cabin before daylight. A noise startled him. A banging noise. He carefully made his way back to the front door.

Blue and green lights passed by right as he opened the door. He froze in place while it passed by. About fifty feet away, the drone stopped and hovered. Still, the banging noise was coming from the opposite direction, some distance down the street.

Daniel made his way back into the resistance center and sat with his back against the front wall, near a window. It wasn’t safe to try and make it back to his cabin. It took him awhile in that position, but eventually he drifted off into a fitful sleep. It was a talent earned in the Marine Corps. Most marines could fall asleep anywhere at anytime.

He startled awake several hours later, Victoria’s perfect face fading away with the sleep that had just left him. The banging sounds had awoken him, because now they were much closer. In fact, it sounded like they were coming from right outside the window that he had been sleeping under.

Daniel got onto his knees and peeked out of the window. He could tell by the position of the sun that it was a few hours past noon. A very loud bang interrupted his thoughts. That’s when he caught sight of him. A man!

He was tall, round, and bald. The man was prying at the aluminum shutter with a bar. Once it popped off, the man turned and tossed it into a gray power circle where it disappeared with a sizzle. Then he crossed to the other side of the window and started to work on that shutter.

Daniel was so excited to find another human that he quickly rose and stepped out of the tavern door, saying “Hey, did you escape too?”

The tall heavyset man slowly turned and faced him. He wore the same tan pants and shirt that they had worn at the orchard pod. The man had no hair on his entire head, including his eyebrows. On his forehead, running the complete circle of his brow was a silver metal band.

Yet, the most startling thing was his eyes. They were completely covered in a milky white film. The large man cocked his head and sniffed the air. He let out a loud grunt, and raising his metal bar, charged at Daniel.

The man’s weapon was actually more than a bar. It was three feet long and made of iron. On one end it had a two-pronged fork for prying, while the other end had a hand sized hammer head. It looked to be well constructed, and could be used for prying, pulling, and smashing things. The hammer head was what was coming straight for Daniel’s head.

He barely dodged the blow, and threw a hard right punch into the man’s gut, spinning away from the attacker. The man responded quickly, swinging his free fist at the retreating Daniel, catching him in the side of the head. The blow was tremendous, sending him sprawling.

            Daniel came to a rest on his butt, just in time to take the pronged side of the bar into his left shoulder. The prongs were about two inches long, wide at the end, but ending narrow. Probably for pulling out various sized nails, bolts, and screws.

The deep penetration of the weapon caused him to yell out in pain. He responded by kicking the large man directly in his knee, causing him to buckle and fall onto his other knee. Daniel quickly kicked the man in the face, knocking him backwards.

            Daniel crab crawled away from his attacker, and rose to his feet, just as the milky white-eyed man was staggering back to his feet. He grabbed the 12-gauge Thunder Ranch by the stock and yanked it from the top of his pack, ripping it free from the Velcro straps that held it down.

            The bald man took one step forward when a blast from the shotgun removed his face. He staggered backwards, falling into the gray power circle. With a loud sizzle, he was gone. Daniel turned to go back to his cabin, and found himself facing one of the drones with the flashing blue and green lights.

It hovered two feet away from him, at face level. He raised the shotgun and blew the drone to pieces. He reloaded two fresh shells into the 12-gauge while he took a moment to think. His shoulder ached, and his shirt was turning red in that area, but he didn’t have time to worry about that.

He was sure that the overseers had seen him via the drone, so there was no returning to his cabin. They were coming and he needed to get as far away from here as possible. Daniel strapped his weapon back on top of his pack and ran. 

He ran for two hours straight, maintaining a steady pace. Being a marine, he was in good shape and knew how to run. He had scored a 300, the maximum score, on his last military physical fitness test (PFT). The test consisted of pullups, sit-ups, and a three-mile run. It was a tough feat to max the PFT, and he had done it twice.

He stayed on dirt roads, following the setting sun west, and at the two-hour point, he found an old red wooden barn just off the road. Daniel made his way inside, and after sitting on a hay bale, he took off his shirt to inspect his wound. There were two deep gouge holes in his shoulder that were still leaking blood.

He pulled out the small first aid kit from his pack that he had found in the bathroom of his cabin. He opened the bottle of whiskey and took a deep draw from it, before he poured antiseptic onto his wounds. When the pain subsided, he taped gauze over the holes and applied direct pressure over the wounds, hoping that it would stop the bleeding.

By the time that he had finished, it was getting dark outside. Daniel made a semi-comfortable bed out of the hay bales, and fell into a deep sleep. Once again, he was awakened by noises. These were humming sounds coming from outside the barn. He went over to a small four pane window and after wiping it clean, took a look outside. What he saw sent fear from the pit of his stomach to the rest of his body.

A long column of the overseers’ hover cars were passing by on the dirt road. There were at least ten of the cars, emitting the blue light from underneath, and accounting for the loud humming noise. There were four overseers in each car. One driving, one watching a screen, and two manning some type of mounted weapon at the rear of the vehicle.

The front car turned and slid up to the barn, while the other nine cars continued down the dirt road, heading west. He could see the next lead car turn off and head towards a white farmhouse. The two overseers that weren’t manning the large gun exited the hovercar and started to approach the barn. He needed to hide, and fast!.

He grabbed his pack and rolled off the hay bales, pulling a couple of them on top of himself, while groaning from the pain in his stiff shoulder. Then he heard the barn door slide open. Daniel put his hand on the shotgun, more for comfort than anything. He was only able to load two rounds at a time into the Thunder Ranch, and there were four foes to contend with.

He could hear the overseers rummage around for a bit, and saw them turn over a couple of wooden crates. He tensed up when he could see two black boots through a sliver of space between the two hay bales. Then the two overseers abruptly turned and left the barn. Daniel took a deep breath of air, not having realized that he had been holding his breath.

Once he heard the familiar hum of the hover car moving, he cautiously made his way back to the small window and looked out. He saw the hover car that had been at the barn pass by the farmhouse and continue down the road. He found it odd that the two overseers on the mounted gun in the hover car at the farmhouse never even acknowledge the others in the passing car. His enemy seemed to be very emotionless.

A couple of minutes later, two overseers exited the farmhouse and got back into the hover car. They then followed the route that the other cars had taken down the dirt road. But Daniel wasn’t focused on them anymore. There was no mistaking what he had seen. The curtain on an attic window in the farmhouse had fallen back into place. Somebody had been watching to see of the overseers had left, just as he had been doing.

Daniel decided to wait for the cover of darkness to make his move to the farmhouse. First, he had to stop his bleeding, because his gauze was now soaking wet. He had used his antiseptic earlier, so this time he poured whiskey on the wound, and after squeezing his fists through the pain, he tried stuffing gauze inside of the two holes, then covered the whole bloody mess with another pad.

The sun had told him that it was around noon, so he laid back down, trying to get some more rest. His mind was racing, with thoughts of Victoria and Andrea, and the people in his pod. He was certain that they were all dead now, because of him. He drank half of the bottle whiskey, before he finally drifted off.

Sometime after dark, he startled awake. Had he missed first chime? He rolled over to get on top of Number Seven, before he remembered where he was. He was startled to realize that they had programed him so well, that his subconscious automatically reverted back to his daily routine so easily.

He removed his red stained shirt, and noticed that the new bandage was now soaked in blood. When he stood up, he grew dizzy and had to steady himself. Daniel once again changed his bandage, using the last pad that he had. After his head cleared, he put on a pair of blue jeans and one of the long sleeve shirts from the cabin.  

Daniel made his way to the four paned window and looked towards the farmhouse. He could make out its outline in the light from the halfmoon, but everything inside looked dark. Good. He wanted whoever was inside there to be asleep. He had blown off the face of the only other human that he had met outside of the pod and didn’t want a repeat.

Daniel slid out of the barn door, and low crawled the hundred yards to the farmhouse. Once there, he made his way to a large front window, which was boarded up. He could see only darkness between the boards. He debated climbing the stairs to the front door which was surrounded by a wraparound deck. He decided against that route, thinking that the boards would creak with his weight.

Daniel made his way around the north side of the house, where there were two smaller windows that were also boarded up. This time, he could make out some dim light through the spaces between the boards on the second window, He could also make out a couple of muffled voices coming from the room. Whoever was inside was still up, and there was more than one of them.

Daniel made his way to the back of the house, where he found more boarded up windows and a backdoor. There were three old wooden steps leading up to the door. After thinking for a minute, he removed the 12 gauge from on top of his pack and, and made his way very slowly up the steps.

Daniel placed his hand on the smooth black doorknob and gave it a slow turn. He had expected it to be locked, but the knob turned, and the door slid open an inch. Now he could hear the muffled voices coming from the right side somewhere within the house. He pushed the door another inch farther open. CRASH!

Aluminum cans tumbled down onto the tile floor behind the door. An alarm. No sense being quiet now, he thought as he pushed into the room and made for the dark corner to the left. A couple of things caught his attention.

First, he could smell popcorn, which made his stomach rumble. He hadn’t eaten in a day. Second, he was in a large backroom, with two doorways that led further into the house. The one to his direct front was dark, while the one to his left had a dim light flowing from the open entryway. Third, he could no longer hear the mumbling. Whoever was in here was now waiting for him.

The wounded Daniel made his way through the dark entrance to his front, immediately bumping into a chair. He found himself in a dining room, although the table was gone, and only three chairs remained. There was no other exit. Daniel felt his shoulder ache, and reached up and touched his wounds with his free hand. The fresh shirt was soaked in wet blood.

Daniel felt dizzy, and considered retreating from the house. Yet, maybe they had medicine, or at least pain killers. He made his way back into the large back room, and after taking a deep breath to stop his dizziness, he headed for the dimly lit archway. It led into a long hallway. He could see three closed doors running the length of it, were it appeared to empty into a dark room.

The first door was where the light was coming from. Daniel could see it chasing away the darkness from underneath, as well as spilling out from the keyhole. He walked very slowly towards the door.

His last footstep caused a slight creak from the floorboards. He tensed up, half expecting bullets to fly through the closed door. When none did, he reached out and grabbed the door handle. He turned the knob, and shoved the door open, keeping his body at a slight angle in the doorway.

Standing directly in front of him was a young Hispanic girl, who was about seven years old. She had shoulder length black hair and big dark brown eyes. The little girl smiled when Daniel lowered his shotgun. He smiled back at her.

Daniel took his left hand and touched his shirt at the shoulder, which was now soaked in blood, and again fought off the dizziness that threatened to overcome him. His head was now pounding, and he felt faint. Then he heard the click.

That caught his attention and out of his peripheral vision he could see a figure in a dark hoodie holding a nickel plated .357 to the side of his head. The click had been the hammer being pulled back. It looked like a cheaper version of the Smith and Wesson model, possible a Taurus. Cheap didn’t matter much at this range.

Dejalo,” a gruff voice demanded.

Daniel stood there for a moment, the room spinning, when he heard the same voice say in a language that he didn’t understand, “Suelta el arma o te dejo caer!”

There had been no need to repeat the order, because the Thunder Ranch had hit the floor mid-sentence, with Daniel as he finally did pass out. The last thing that he had noticed was that the little girl was no longer smiling.


Chapter 5
Rosalita

By Douglas Goff

Daniel had woken several times, but could only manage to see a bright light shining in his face. He also realized that he was sitting in a chair, with his hands tightly bound behind his back. His bouts of consciousness only lasted for a few seconds each time, before he blacked out again.

He slowly came to again. This time it was different. Before, he had wanted to stay conscious, but now he didn’t. The hooded figure was in front of him, blocking out the bright light. The person was holding a glowing hot poker from a fireplace.

Calmarse. Calmarse,” was all he could hear coming from under the hood in a very low voice.

“No! No!” Daniel screamed as the figure shoved the hot poker into his bleeding shoulder wound.

He screamed in agony and then again when the dark figure shoved it into the second hole. The pain was so intense that Daniel got his wish and passed out. The next time he came to, he was surprised to see that someone had cleaned the wound and bandage it with a fresh dressing.

It was daytime. He could tell because there were slivers of daylight slipping between the cracks of the boards on the window in front of him. He was still tied to the chair, and felt a dull ache in his shoulder. Since it was freshly wrapped in clean bandages, that meant that his captors couldn’t be all bad. It also meant that they wanted him alive.

Looking around, he realized that he was in a bedroom. By the looks of it, it didn’t get much use. The twin bed, dresser, and a second chair near him had thin layers of dust on them. While he was studying his room, he heard someone unlock the door behind him and come in.

A woman came around to the front of his chair holding a bowl and spoon in her hand. She was a middle-aged Hispanic woman, maybe forty-five, with her black hair worn up in a bun. Even with the two-inch scar on her face, she was somewhat attractive and had a medium build. He noted that she wore tattered blue jeans and a black and white checkered flannel shirt. She wore the .357 in a leather shoulder holster. He had been correct about it being a Taurus.

“Let me go,” he blurted out.

The woman ignored his order, and slid the free chair over in front of his. She sat down, and began to spoon feed him soup. He was about to protest, but he was starving, and the first taste had been absolutely delicious. It was some type of mushy corn soup. He didn’t say another word until she had fed him the entire bowl.

“Take me to your leader,” he demanded as she rose and put the chair back where it had been.

Yo no hablo ingles,” she answered.

“Spanish?” he said. “Your speaking Spanish?”

Si,” she replied.

Daniel thought quickly, trying to remember what Spanish he knew. It was no use. He had taken the language in the ninth and tenth grades, but couldn’t remember much. He could only ask her where the bathroom was, or if there was a bus station nearby.

“I want to speak to your leader,” he demanded again, sticking with English.

Then he heard footsteps behind him.

“Is that your leader?” he asked, trying to turn his head to see.

It wasn’t. It was the young girl that he had first seen. She came over and sat in the chair that was now off to his left and smiled at him. He crossed his eyes at her, making her giggle. Then he made a serious face and tried again.

“Ingles? Leader. Do you have a leader?” he asked her.

“Yes,” she replied with an accent. “Carlos.”

Daniel let out a long sigh of relief, glad to be able to communicate, “I need to speak with Carlos.”

“You can not,” she frowned.

“I must speak with Carlos,” he stated more firmly.

“You can not. My father is dead,” the little girl whispered, with a small tear slipping from her left eye, then she jumped up and ran from the room.

The older Hispanic woman pursed her lips and stared at him with an angry look. She looked more attractive when she was mad. She pulled the chair back up to him and began to roughly remove his bandage. When Daniel let out a painful grunt, her face became soft and she worked more tenderly.

Once the bandage was off, she applied a salve to his burnt and cauterized wounds. Then she carefully re-wrapped it with a fresh pad. She gave him a slight smile and got up from her seat. Daniel needed to think fast if he wanted to get out of the chair. Then he remembered his Spanish.

Necesito usar el bano,” he said.

Eres un gringo guapo. Desearia poder confiar en ti,” she gave him another weak smile and left the room, closing the door behind her.

He really had to pee, but he could hold it for now. He was happy that his shoulder was feeling much better. He grinned to himself, but not because of his shoulder. He knew that he wasn’t in any immediate danger. You don’t feed and treat the wounds of someone that you plan to kill. He was starting to think that the two ladies were all alone, since they were the only ones that he had seen.

He rested up a bit, waiting until it was late in the night. Nobody had come back into the room, and it was very quiet inside of the house. Maybe they had gone? The one pressing thing on his mind was that now he really had to pee. He either got himself free or he pissed his pants.

Daniel leaned way forward, and thanks to his muscular legs, managed to struggle to a crouching position. The chair was still tied to his back and hands, with its four legs sticking straight into the air. ‘Here goes nothing’, he thought, and threw himself backwards as hard as he could. The wooden chair splintered with a large crash, breaking into several pieces.

He rapidly freed himself from the ropes and the last few pieces of wood, hearing a door open somewhere in the house, followed by hurried footsteps. Daniel moved fast to the corner of the room next to the door, remembering that it opened into the room. The doorknob turned and the old wooden door slowly swung open and away from him, The room was only lit by the moonlight coming through the window slats.

The floor creaked as someone started to enter the room. The first thing he saw was the nickel-plated Taurus .357 glinting in the moonlight. He sprange forward like a cat, grabbing it with his left hand wrapped around the cylinder, so that it could not fire. With his right hand he grabbed the person around the neck in a head lock. He twisted the gun up and back as he had been trained to do.

The movement ripped the weapon from the woman’s grasp. He knew that it was her, because although her body was firm against him, she was also curvy and soft. He shoved her away, farther into the room.

“You might as well come in her too, young lady,” he spoke out into the darkness.

The young girl came in, holding an oil lamp that she lit. Both women looked very frightened now, staring down the barrel of the Taurus. Daniel popped open the cylinder and dumped the six bullets onto the wooden floor. He flipped it shut and rotated it around in his hand so that he was now holding the barrel. He held the weapon out with the handle towards the confused Hispanic woman.

“Tell your ma that I’m not going to hurt you guys,” he said.

“She isn’t my mom. She is mi tia…my aunt,” the younger girl answered.

“Tell her what I said. Then I need you to tell me something very important,” he grimaced. “Where is the bathroom?”

The following day he learned much. The world was a mess. The fight with the overseers was over, pretty much before it had started. They had wiped out all of the electronics, electricity, and communication systems before they simultaneous crushed all of the major military installations of the world. It was almost as if they had a map of every key fighting unit on the planet.

All major national and military leaders were dead within the first hour. It left the human response disorganized and light. Still, resistance units rose and put up somewhat of a fight. It didn’t matter much. Our weapons were mostly ineffective against them, and they were in solid control of the planet within the first two days.

The older woman was Aunt Carmen and the child, who was actually eight-years-old, was named Rosalita. Carmen, and Rosie, as she called her, had been part of a large migrant camp that had been working on Cambell Farms in northern California. When the overseers came, most of the migrant workers stayed together and made their way north. They stayed away from all of the heavy fighting to the south in the big cities. 

When they entered Oregon, there had been over seventy of them. By the time that they reached Washington, they were down to twelve. Carmen’s husband and Rosie’s mom both died in the first year. Rosie’s father Carlos was the leader of the ever-shrinking band of migrants. They joined up with a group of locals in this area, which is where Rosie had learned English.

Carlos had died a year ago, after he stepped into an old rusty bear trap. It took the infection over a week to kill him, which had been hard for the group to take. The rest of their companions had gone out to collect food one day, while Carmen and Rosie had been caring for Carlos. None of them had ever returned. The two ladies had been alone ever since.

“We are leaving tonight,” Rosie told him over a bowl of Carmen’s delicious soup. It seemed that they only ate once a day. He caught Carmen staring at him several times during the meal. Every time he looked back at her, she would look down.

“Where?” he asked.

“We have several safe places set up. We survive by moving around every week or so. We are going a few days early, because you brought a lot of the spacemen with you. They are looking for you,” she answered. “Will you come with us?”

“Yes. For now.” He smiled at her and ran his hand through her curly black hair, causing Rosie to giggle and Carmen to break into a big smile. “Why do you travel at night?”

“We can see the flying machines better at night thanks to their lights. It’s important to see them first and avoid them. If they notice you, the spacemen come,” she verified what he had already learned.

“Do you know anything about the resistance based on Alcatraz? Are they still there?” he asked.

The little girl looked confused, and said, “There is no more resistance. Just the spacemen.”

That night they packed up their three backpacks and left the house. Daniel was happy to have the 12 gauge shotgun back in his hands. Carmen locked both of the doors on the house and made sure that several of the plastic buckets around the house were turned upright. They were used to collect water. Not only to flush the toilets, most of which still worked, but to drink. Then they made their way over to a cornfield that was growing wild in the field on the side of the road. 

The trio grabbed as many of the cobbs that they could fit in their packs, and they headed off, bearing northwest. They walked for most of the night, stumbling over things every once in a while, but tried to stay as close to the road as they could. Just when the sun began to creep into the pre-dawn sky, they made their way into a small, wooded grove next to the road.

Carmen went to the center of the trees, where a patch of sunlight was starting to fall through the branches and hit the ground. Where it did, was a circle of carrot stalks ringed by a two-foot wire mesh fence. Inside were maybe twenty plants. The Hispanic woman bent down and pulled eight or nine of the carrots that were ready.

They spent the day in the tree grove, resting, while Rosie climbed one of the trees every so often. She would watch something to the south for about a half hour, then she would come back down. They advised him that they were watching one of their “safe” houses. They always study their next destination for a day, making sure that it was empty.

“Are you looking for overseers?” Daniel asked.

“No. The spacemen only come if they are chasing somebody. We are looking for bad people,” she frowned. “There used to be a lot of them, but now we haven’t seen any for a long time. Maybe they are all dead now.”

Once it got dark again, they made their way to a one-story ranch house, that sat back off the road about fifty yards. Again, all of the windows were covered in wooden slats. Come to think of it, every building that Daniel had seen so far had covered windows. 

When they reached the back of the home, Carmen grabbed a key from under a nearby rock and opened it. She pointed at a full bucket of water that Daniel grabbed, and the three of them crept quietly into the house.

They spent the next week in the house without much incident. They ate a large bowl of carrot soup the first few days, and then ate the rest of their corn the last half of the week. The three of them got along well, and Rosie and Daniel laughed a lot. He really liked the little girl. He was also glad to see that he was no longer losing control of his emotions. He had feared that it might have been a permanent side effect of the overseers’ bitter drink.

Daniel and Carmen were also developing something, but he wasn’t quite sure what it was. They shared long looks at each other, with her often blushing and turning away. At one point, he caught her watching him dress. He too was feeling an attraction to her.

On the seventh day at the new home, a column of hover cars hummed down the road, heading back northeast. They decided that it was time to go. That night they packed up and made their way back to the carrot garden. Carmen took another six or eight of them, leaving new seeds in the ground, about six inches apart. Then they continued straight south, heading away from the road.

Once they were off the road, it was dark and hard to travel. He was holding Rosie’s hand and Carmen reached out and took his. He liked it. They stumbled through some brush for a few hours and entered a fruit grove. Daniel couldn’t make out what was growing here, but Carmen started picking some fruit and stuffing their packs.

“You’ll like this place,” Rosie whispered. “Apples.”

Daniel had to catch himself to keep from chuckling out loud. He would have been happy not to see, let alone eat another apple, for the next year. Still, beggars couldn’t be choosers. It seemed that the migrants had made a net of safe havens with various food plots available. They would move from place to place, eating the various foods that each location had to offer. Smart. Very smart, he thought.

Once again, they stayed in the trees all day, while Rosie occasionally climbed one and studied a nearby barn. When they were sure that it was unoccupied, they made their way to it after the sun fell from the sky. When they reached the sliding door, Carmen quickly drew her revolver and pointed at the broken lock. Daniel had unslung his shotgun from his pack the second that the woman had drawn her weapon. Clicking off the safety seemed extremely loud in the tense quiet.

He noticed Carmen study the frame of the door before starting to enter. He grabbed her shoulder, pulling the woman back, and entered first. The light from Rosie’s oil lamp threw light into the room from behind him. Daniel swept the barn and found it to be clear. It was a small modern aluminum style barn, about twenty-five yards across and fifty yards deep. There was a ladder leading up to a small loft in the back and an animal pen built under that.

The barn contained dusty tools and some old dusty cots. Carmen came in and kicked several empty bottles of Frosty Dog beer that were scattered around an old fire. Daniel touched the ashes and verified that they were cold. Whoever had been there was long gone. Carmen shrugged and they quickly got a small fire going.

Carmen mashed up some apples and made a tasty warm applesauce dish that was very filling, Then she stared into Daniels eye’s, and reaching into his pack, pulled out his bottle of rum. He smiled at her, and they pulled one of the cots over to the fire and sat on it, sharing the bottle. When it was about half empty, she moved closer to him and snuggled against him.

Rosie, who had fallen asleep on one of the other cots, stirred and then sat up, saying, “I have to pee.”

“Do you want me to go with you?” Daniel asked.

“No, I’ll stay close.” She yawned.

Once she had gone, Carmen stared deep into his eyes and said, “Que tan guapo.”

Then her lips were on his, full, pouty, and forceful. He kissed her back, hard, feeling her tongue flicking into his mouth. Their passion-filled embrace was interrupted by a shriek of pain from Rosie! Both of them jumped up, and grabbing their guns, ran out the door into the darkness.

Rosie was sitting on the ground, sobbing, with her foot in a hole. Leaves and sticks were strewn about her, showing that the hole had been covered. Carmen grabbed the lantern and brought it over. The hole that the young girl’s foot was in was full of sharpened sticks. One was protruding from the top of her blood covered foot.

Whoever had made the fire in the barn had left behind a trap. Daniel knew that they were called ‘punji sticks’ from his training, because these pit traps were often made during conflicts in third world countries. Daniel studied the stake in Rosie’s foot intently, noting that the pit smelled of urine.

He grabbed the young girl under both arm pits and said, “Okay, this going to hurt. I’m going to pull you up on a count of three. Ready?”

She continued sobbing and shook her head yes. “Okay, one…”, then he pulled her straight up, pulling the eight year old smoothly off the wooden spike, causing her to let out a loud whimper. Carmen and he helped Rosie back into the barn and laid her on the cot that they had just been sitting on.

“She is going to get infected,” he said to Carmen “They peed on the spikes, and maybe worse.”

Carmen looked at him with confusion while she started cleaning the girl's bloody foot.

“Infeccion,” Rosie whispered, her eyes running freely with painful tears. Carmen grabbed a bottle of pills and gave two to the girl, which she let her chase down with a sip of rum.

She motioned for Daniel to hold Rosie down, which he did. Carmen took the bottle of rum and poured the rest of it onto the wound, causing the girl to shriek out in pain, which only ended when she passed out. Carmen wrapped up the foot in a clean wrap.

They took turns watching the girl through the night, and into the morning. By midday, she was burning up with a fever. Carmen began speaking rapidly in Spanish while packing her backpack, which the fevered girl translated.

Mi tia says that there is a small town very near here, maybe two miles to the south. She is going to go there and see if she can get some penicillin or any medicine that might help me. She wants us to wait here until she returns,” Rosie explained.

“What about the stuff that she put on my shoulder?” he asked, not liking this plan at all. It was still daylight, and he didn’t want to separate.

After a brief conversation between the two females, Rosie translated, “She used the last of it on your wounds, besides, she needs something much stronger.” When Carmen started for the door, Daniel grabbed her hand.

“Wait.” He took Carmen by the shoulders, saying, “We should all go together.”

After the young girl translated, an argument ensued, because Rosie couldn’t walk. Daniel strapped his shotgun on his pack, and after putting the rucksack on his back, he picked up Rosie. She had her legs around his waist and her arms around his neck.

“Let’s go,” he said.

Carmen shrugged and led them straight south, at a slow pace. Once they hit State Route 4, they were able to make better time. They passed a couple of abandoned cars, and then a burnt-out fuel tanker truck. By the time they reached a sign that said ‘The Village of Stella. Settled 1844. Where Eagles Soar’, Daniel was sweating profusely.

Within minutes, they started seeing houses and outbuildings. They made their way towards town, looking for a pharmacy, when they found a family health center. The windows were broken, and the front double doors were missing. Daniel made for the front doors, but Carmen stopped him just before he entered. She pointed at a glowing green power circle around the frame. He had nearly stepped through with Rosie.

He turned to thank her, but she interrupted him by planting a kiss on his lips, then whispered, “Gringo guapo. Este noche eres mio.” They made their way to a side door, and after checking it, went inside.


Chapter 6
Dirty Down and Dead

By Douglas Goff

Daniel carefully laid Rosie on a dusty gurney and sat down in a nearby chair to rest, while Carmen started to search the clinic. The place looked pretty ransacked. Rosie hadn’t opened her eyes since they had entered the clinic, and he had thought that she was sleeping. That is until she spoke.

“Daniel, am I going to die like everyone else?”

“You are not going to die, Rosie.” He reached over and squeezed her hand. “Do you want me to share a little secret with you?”

“Yes,” she said.

“Many, many people are not dead. They are just living somewhere else,” he whispered.

“A bad place?” she questioned.

“No, not really.” He thought about it for a second, the added, “Just different. They have plenty of food and friends.”

“It sounds nice,” she murmured.

“They just don’t know any better. It’s like a dream place really.” He smiled, thinking about Victoria and Number Seven.

“I would really like to visit there someday,” she whispered.

Daniel didn’t have the heart to tell her that there were no children in the pods, but it didn’t matter because Rosie had fallen asleep.

A couple of minutes later, he heard Carmen shout for him. When he made his way to her, she was standing in an office, staring at a locked cabinet. He banged on the lock with the butt of his gun, but the lock didn’t pop off.

“Okay, this is going to be loud,” he said, then took aim and fired the Thunder Ranch, blowing the lock to pieces.

“Holy cow,” Carmen said after she opened the cabinet, making Daniel laugh at her use of English. There was every type of medicine that they could imagine and more. Sutures, band aids, wraps, and other items also lined the shelves. After grabbing a nearby empty medical bag, they stuffed it full of their newfound healing treasures.

Suddenly they heard some banging near the far side of the clinic. Daniel unstrapped his 12-gauge and pointed for Carmen to make her way back to Rosie. He very cautiously worked his way towards the banging noise, which suddenly stopped. When he entered a back room, he saw a shutter swinging in the breeze, causing it to bang into the side of the building.

Daniel lowered his shot gun and took a step forward to secure the loose shutter when he saw one of the three-foot-long iron tools with the two-pronged fork on one end and the hammer on the other. It was lying on the inside of the windowsill.

Daniel was struck from behind, a heavy body driving him to the floor, causing the Thunder Ranch to fire into the wall. A heavyset man was on his back, punching him in the head. Daniel threw a hard elbow back, catching the man in the throat.

It had little effect, although Daniel did manage to flip over while under the man. He immediately saw that his attacker had no hair on his head, including his eyebrows. He also wore one of the same silver metal bands that he had seen before, all the way around the top of his forehead.

Daniel reached up and grabbed the metal band, trying to pull it off, but it only stretched the man’s skin, appearing to be bolted into the man’s skull. His bald attacker responded by punching Daniel hard in the stomach several times. Daniel grabbed the man’s tan shirt and pulled him in close, to stop the painful blows.

The man fell chest to chest with Daniel, his creepy eyes that were covered in a milky white film just mere inches from his own eyes. Drool fell from the man’s grunting mouth and landed on Daniel’s cheek. He brought his knee up hard into the bald man’s groin, which did…..nothing.

The big man got his meaty hands around Daniel’s throat and began chocking him. Daniel clasped the attacker’s wrist, but was unable to dislodge the hands from his throat. He couldn’t breathe and started to pass out. Then the man’s head exploded, spraying blood and brains all over Daniel’s face. The dead man fell on top of him, but he didn’t have the strength or energy to push him off.

Somebody grabbed the body and rolled it off him. Carmen stood over Daniel, a worried look on her face, with the smoking .357 Taurus in her hand. She put her gun back in her shoulder holster, and helped him to his feet. Once Daniel caught his breath, they made their way back to Rosie, who had slept through all the gunshots.

Carmen woke her and gave her several pills. Then the older woman removed the old bandage and replaced it with a clean one. The eight-year-old held Daniel’s hand very tightly until it was over. He stared into the young girl’s big brown eyes and realized that he would never be able to leave her. He cared too much for the child.

Daniel located a jug of water in a long defunct refrigerator in an adjacent room. He used it to clean up. Rosie started to feel better rather quickly, but they were still an hour away from sunset, so they decided to rest up in the health center and make their trip back to the barn under the cover of darkness.

The trio settled in and played some cards with a deck that they had found in a desk drawer. It wasn’t long before they were all laughing. Carmen chattered on in Spanish, apparently not caring that Daniel couldn’t understand a word she said. He did catch the phrase handsome gringo several times.

“What’s she talking about,” he grinned at Rosie.

“She thinks that you are handsome and a hero, because you carried me all the way here,” she said thru giggles.

“Well, I am handsome,” he teased the little girl.

“She also said that once we get back to the barn, she is going to make a hot bath for the two of you in the old cow watering ttub that is there. I guess that I am going to bed early.” She giggled again.

“You know too much for your age,” he said.

“She can’t stop talking about how cute you are, and she really likes your blue eyes.” Rosie rolled her eyes, then smiling, added, “So do I.”

“Well, you can’t have them. They are mine.” Daniel tickled her, bringing about more laughter. It was a good moment for the three of them. Then it was over.

It was time to go. The sun had fallen over an hour ago. They packed up their backpacks, and Daniel put them on his back. He was still sore from his fight, so Carmen agreed to carry Rosie for as far as she could. Once she picked up the girl, they headed for the side door.

Carmen turned back and looked at him, blowing him a very seductive kiss which sent a shiver of anticipation down his spine. He wanted her very badly, and couldn’t wait to get back to the barn. Then the Hispanic woman stepped through the doorway, and was gone.

Carmen and Rosie had been hit by a green power circle and had disappeared. Daniel grabbed his shotgun from his pack and rushed through the door. He was suddenly blinded by several road flares being ignited. Once he could see again, he was startled. The first thing that he noticed was the nickel-plated .357 Taurus lying in the dirt. Metal must not transport in the green power circles.

The second thing that he noticed was that there were four men standing in a half circle facing him. They all held the two-foot batons of the overseers, but they weren’t overseers. They looked like a motorcycle gang. The leather outfits and chains weren’t the only thing that led him to this conclusion. There were five motorcycles lined up behind them.

A big-boned tough-looking white man stood in the center of the line grinning, and winked at him. Daniel raised the Thunder Ranch to blow the smirk off the man’s face.

“We thought you and your girlfriend were going to stay in there forever Princess,” he heard from the shadows to his immediate left.

Daniel felt stupid when he suddenly came to a realization. Five bikes meant five bikers. That was his last thought before a rifle butt struck him in the temple. “Goodnight Princess,” the same voice said.

The darkness came on quickly, sending Daniel to the ground. He caught one last sight before he went unconscious. One of the gang members, a very chubby black man, had turned towards their motorcycles. The back of his leather vest had their gang patch, showing a motorcycle running over a pile of skulls. Above the depiction were the words ‘Dirty Down and Dead.’

“You gonna sleep all day Princess?” He recognized the voice of the man who had butt-stroked him.  “I barely hit you.”

Daniel realized that he was lying in the dirt. When he reached for the lump on his head, he discovered that he was wearing handcuffs. He touched his temple and felt that it was swollen with dried blood around it. He managed to sit up.

“Well, I thought you were awake.” A slender, yet athletic black-haired man stood before him. He had a handle-bar moustache and a five o’clock shadow on his chin. “My name is Stan. Stan the Man. What do they call you?”

When Daniel didn’t answer, another biker spoke up.

“I guess he likes to be called Princess,” the stocky man that had been in the center of the line last night spouted off.

 “Are you a princess, pretty boy? I bet you are,” the big white man continued, licking his lips as he said the words with a slight southern drawl.

“Look here, dumbass. You want to answer my questions. I am the only friend that you have here, and I ain’t much of one,” Stan scoffed. “I am the leader of these jackasses, and I’m gonna tell ya, none of them like you much. They had wanted you to come out of that clinic first, so that we could have kept one of them females for some fun.”

“I’m all good with keeping this princess,” the southern white man said, winking at him. “I could have a lot of fun with him.”

“Shut up Horndog. I haven’t decided anything yet,” Stan said, then turned his attention back to Daniel. “Now let’s start off on the right foot. How’s about you tell me what they call you?”

“My friends used to call me Dat,” he answered.

“Your lady friends?” Stan the Man questioned.

“No. My Marine Corps buddies.”

“Oh, we got us a Devil Dog here, boys.” Stan laughed, rubbing his handlebar moustache between his fingers. “So, tell me this, were you one of those do-gooder honor and integrity marines, or were you one of those shoot people from a bell tower marines?”

“I like to think that I fall somewhere in the middle,” Daniel said. “Why do you care?”

“Now, I’m gonna need some genuine honesty from you Dat.” Stan the Man ignored Daniel’s question, continuing with his own, “This is extremely important, so answer truthfully. Was it just you and the women, or are there any others in your group?”

“It was just the three of us,” he answered, seeing no value in lying. “What are you planning to do to me?”

“Well. I have two choices here, Dat,” the biker leader answered. “My first option is to shoot you with my baton and finish you with the green light. Second, I could ask you to join my little crew here and have you ride with us. You should be full of tingly fuzzy excitement hoping and praying that I ask you to join up. It seems so much better than option number one.”

Daniel just shook his head, and said nothing.

“So, last question.” Stan the Man looked him hard in the eye. “If I do decide to patch you in, would you join us?”

When Daniel went to answer, Stan interrupted him, saying, “No, don’t answer me now. This is an incredibly big decision for you Dat. Not as big a decision as if you should settle for a finger bang on prom night, but still a pretty big decision. What say we go for a nice ride so that you have some time to mull things over.”

The fat black man, and a less fat, but older Hispanic male loaded Daniel into a sidecar on one of the bikes. The Hispanic man climbed onto the motorcycle and fired her up. The rest of the gang mounted their cycles and soon they were all roaring to life. The distinct, and loud sounds of Harley Davidsons rattled the doors on the nearby businesses.

The gang rolled slowly back east on State Highway 4, dodging potholes, tree branches, and the occasional abandoned car. In about fifteen minutes they hit the larger city of Longview, Washington. When Daniel saw a column of overseer hover cars parked at a roadside gas station, he tried to warn the Hispanic man driving their bike.

The chunky man looked down at him and grinned through broken yellow teeth while they drove past several overseers, who completely ignored them. The gang took the exit onto southbound Interstate 5. The highway was in relatively good shape, so the gang stepped on it, racing south at a good speed. There were several junked out cars in the slow lane, but the fast lane was clear.

A half hour later, Daniel saw exit signs for Portland, Oregon, but they continued south. Daniel enjoyed feeling the wind blow through his hair, not allowing himself to think about Carmen and Rosie. There was nothing that he could do for them now. He had to focus on how to survive this. Nearly an hour and a half later, they arrived at Eugene, Oregon.

They pulled into a gas station and parked, shutting off their bikes. The same two bikers that had put him in, lifted Daniel out of the side car and walked him over to the left side of an aluminum shed, where there was a twenty foot by ten-foot concrete pad. The pad had about twenty metal eyebolts sticking out of its surface along the shed side. The two men shoved Daniel to the ground, causing him to land roughly on the concrete pad.  

The one called Horndog took out a handcuff key and undid his left hand, securing the now empty loop on one of the metal eyebolts. Although his left hand was now free, Daniel was cuffed to the concrete pad by his right hand.

The stocky white man grabbed Daniel by his hair and said, “If Stan the Man doesn’t patch you in, I’m going to do things to you that you will never forget Princess.” He blew Daniel a kiss, and shoved his head hard, before walking away chuckling.

Daniel couldn’t move more than a few inches, but he could put his back against the shed to sit up. He noted that the pad had a slight slant away from the shed, where it ended in a grated drain. Probably for peeing he thought. He was screwed. He needed to escape, but the bikers had him locked up tight.

Stan went to the nearby storage shed, and pulling a chain from around his neck, picked out one of several keys.  Once he had it open, the bikers went in and came back out with gas cans that they used to fill up their bikes.

Daniel wasn’t paying much attention to the shed, because there was a much more interesting sight across from it. There was a large module sitting there. It was much bigger than the command module back at the apple orchard pod, but looked about the same. Also, there were no overseers standing guard outside.

The bikers got a fire going directly in front of his pad, and started cooking their dinner from unlabeled cans. Stan the Man made his way over to the overseer module and went inside. Daniel’s curiosity was piqued now. He really wanted to know what the hell was going on.

A green power circle opened up on the ground beside the fire. Inside of it appeared several wooden crates. Once the green power circle disappeared, the bikers went and collected the crates, taking them into the storage shed.

Later that night, after the others had eaten, Stan the Man came over and offered him a can of food. Daniel was very pleased to discover that it was fresh brown beans. He hungrily gobbled down the food, never taking his eyes off the lead biker who held out his hand for the empty can.

“Can’t have you bashing one of us in the head with this. Never know if you are still holding onto some bad feelings over us zapping your girlfriends,” he said smiling.

“What is going on?” Daniel asked. “I don’t understand why you attacked us.”

“Don’t understand?” Stan the Man frowned. “Where are you from, Dat?”

“From? I was born in Battle Creek, Michigan, but---"

“No dumbass , what clan? What clan are you from? Oakland? Frisco, Los Angeles? What clan?” he asked.

“Clan? I’m not from a clan. I escaped from an apple orchard pod run by the overseers,” Daniel explained.

“No shit? We got us a real-life celebrity here.” Stan’s comment caused the others around the fire to chuckle. “Well, I guess you would be confused then, so let me explain things for you real clear. We are bounty hunters. We work for the overseers.”

“You work for them?” Daniel interrupted.

Let me finish, Dat. You can’t learn much when you’re running your mouth,” Stan the Man admonished. “We collect bounties for the overseers. In the beginning there were a lot of crews like us, mostly outlaw bikers, and the bounties were plentiful. We would zap ten to fifteen people at a time. But, it didn’t take long for us to learn that no matter how many people we sent in, the reward from the overseers was always the same. Five crates of supplies. One person or fifteen, the reward was always five crates. Food, water, batteries, medicine, plus booze and smokes.”

This caused the five men around the fire to let out a cheer.

“Now times are different. People became scarce. That didn’t bode well for the crews because we are required every month to produce at least one bounty. Once we do, we get resupplied, and the thirty-day clock starts all over again. But like I said, people became scarce. Once the bounties disappeared, the crews started hunting each other. The hunters became the hunted. And now, we are the last men standing.”

Daniel remained quiet.

“Do you understand?” Stan inquired.

“Yes. You have turned on your own kind,” he said with obvious disgust.

“Look. It isn’t like that.” The large black man came over, continuing, “Times are different. We hate having to kill people, but we do what we have to do to survive. It’s us or them.”

“You aren’t killing them,” Daniel said, catching all of their attentions, his comment drawing the others over.

“What do you mean, bato,” the Hispanic man asked.

“When you shoot people with the green power circles, they do not die. Well, at least not the adults. They are sent to large holding cells, where they are forced to drink a liquid that brainwashes them. They end up in pods, as couples, controlled by the overseers. They expect you to mate and work. At least that is what happened to me. I worked in an apple orchard and was partnered up with a woman called Number Seven. I suspect that there are many other types of pods as well. When I escaped, I saw several of them all over the hillside.”

“Well, how about that. Not so bad after all. Here we thought we were killing them.” Stan the Man whistled.

“They feed you and give you all the poon that you want? Why would anyone escape that?” Horndog snickered.

“Because you live as a mindless drone slave. They label you with a number. And once a woman is impregnated, they take her away and god knows what they do to her,” Daniel spat out.

“God has nothing to do with this, Bato,” the Hispanic male hissed. “He has forsaken this planet long go.”

“I suppose that we could sit around and discuss politics and religion all night with our puds in our hands, or we can get to the meat and potatoes of the issue.” Stan the Man reclaimed the conversation. “I guess that I have to decide what to do with you. I am allowed to have six men. Since we failed to meet our bounty last month, I had to blast one of my own men, Pistolero. You see, the first time we failed to get our bounty, I didn’t understand how the game was played. The overseers came and blasted the first man that they saw, who happened to be my brother, Butch. Now, when we hit thirty days, I make the decision, not them.”

“So, now that you filled your bounty this month, you are going to hold me to fill next month’s bounty?” Daniel asked.

“Oh Dat, you weren’t paying attention when we had our little talk earlier. That is option number one. Option number two is that I patch you in and you become my sixth man. If we fail to meet our bounty in thirty days, then we will cross that bridge when we come to it. But I must admit, being the junior man, you would be on the chopping block, or short stick as we call it. Let’s consider that as your motivation to help us find a bounty.”

“So, I am in?” Daniel asked.

“Well, I know that you weren’t with those ladies for long. We had seen them a couple of times before, and you weren’t with them. Been tracking them for a while, but they kept switching locations on us. We almost had them at the corn house. So, the question that I must answer for myself is how attached did you grow to them, and are you feeling vengeful? I mean, I am sure that you were “knocking boots” with the older broad. She wasn’t half-bad for her age.”

Daniel felt himself getting angry, but he controlled himself and remained silent.

“I’ll tell you what. Let me sleep on it and I will give you my decision in the morning. You’ll be amazed what a long night on that hard concrete pad can do to alleviate your anger, break you of vengeful thoughts, and adjust your loyalties.” Stan grinned, then headed back to the fire.


Chapter 7
Soft Tail Hard Punch

By Douglas Goff

A series of lights flashed from along the top of the command module, followed by a whistle. Within a short time, the bald men with the bands around their heads started to arrive. When each one reached the back of the module, Daniel could hear a door slide open, then close. Curious, he thought.

The bikers drank and laughed deep into the night. At one point someone broke out a radio and they played some CDs. Led Zeppelin, Black Sabbath, ACDC and Kiss sent Daniel into a fitful sleep. His dreams were haunted by images of Carmen and Rosie in the overseer’s holding tanks, sucking from straws and becoming mindless drones.

“Good morning sunshine!” Stan the Man woke him with a kick to the boot. “Thought you might be hungry.”

Daniel saw a can of opened fresh peaches by his foot. After he slurped them down and drank every drop of the juice, he stared up at the crew’s leader.

The lights around the command module started flashing and then came another whistle. This was followed by the sound of the rear door sliding open. Twelve of the bald, banded men came out and headed in different directions.

“Don’t worry about them. They never bother us.” Stan the Man saw his gaze.

“I’m not,” Daniel replied.

“You’re in Dat.” Stan grinned at him, changing the subject. “You ready to join up?”

“What makes you think that I would betray my own race?” Daniel asked.

“Oh. I guess that either I didn’t make myself clear last night, or you are just a real backwater mid-western Michigan dumbass.” Stan the Man’s grin faded abruptly. “So let me lay this out even more clearly for you in the language of dumbass. They took our entire country, no the entire planet, in less than two days. The Army, Navy, Airforce, and yes, even your precious Marine Corps all annihilated on the first day. So, if you are holding out some romantic great hope for the human race, there is a 0.0% chance for a comeback. Game freaking over. Time to pull up your big-boy pants and make some man-sized decisions here. We are in this for us. That is it. The crew is all you have now. I am not going to make this offer again. I promise you Dat, I will leave you locked to that concrete pad for the next thirty days and then blast you back to your life as an apple picking love slave.”

“Okay. Okay, I get it.” Daniel frowned, thinking that he wasn’t left with too many options here. “I’m in.”

“Uncuff him Horndog,” Stan the Man ordered.

The sturdy man came over and freed Daniel, saying, “What a shame. Your loss.”

The five bikers lined up, waiting for Daniel to approach, causing him to say, “Let me guess, the typical gang beat in?”

“No Dat, nothing like that. We can’t afford any serious injuries or the overseers take you. Just walk up to each one of us and we get one punch to your face. If you stay on your feet, you get some deep respect, although nobody has made it to the last man without going down,” Stan explained.

“Sounds easy enough, getting hit by a bunch of pansies like you,” Daniel said, smirking sarcastically.

“Well, we could sex you in like Horndog requested.” Stan the Man laughed.

“I’d rather get punched in the nuts,” Daniel retorted.

“Let’s do this. I’ll give you the first ‘love tap’, followed by my big black friend Tiny. If you survive the two of us, then it’s all downhill. Hambone injured his wrist. Scooter is getting older and Horndog hits like a girl.” Stan the Man grinned and hauled off and slugged Daniel right square in the jaw, knocking him backwards. The man hit hard, but Daniel had been hit harder.

After rubbing his jaw, he walked up to Tiny, who pulled his massive black arm back and released. The blow was incredible, sending Daniel staggering backwards. He nearly lost consciousness, but managed to stop himself from falling by bending over and grabbing his knees.

“Damn,” Daniel said, spitting out blood.

“Damn right!” Stan the Man bellowed out. “That boy can hit! Now finish it Dat.”

Daniel rose unsteadily up and approached Hambone. The red-headed man punched him in the mouth with his uninjured left hand. Although it was hard, it was bearable. Daniel was glad that the man hadn’t been able to use his dominant right hand.

Next came Scooter. The chunky Mexican man spit through his bushy moustache onto his hands and rubbed them together. He punched Daniel hard in the nose, breaking it and sending blood spraying all over his face. It hurt, but it didn’t threaten to drop him like the slug that he had taken from Tiny.

Daniel walked up to Horndog, who scowled, “You asked for it.”

The stocky man balled up his right hand and lowered it down to his side. Without warning, he threw an uppercut straight into Daniel’s groin. The intense pain was immediate, knocking the marine to his knees in front of the laughing man. Daniel balled up his own fist and sent a rock-hard punch into Horndog’s nuts, dropping the surprised man beside him.

“That’s not allowed,” Horndog barely managed to whisper.

“Not quite how you expected that to go down,” Daniel groaned back.

“You got what you deserved Horndog.” Stan shook his head. “You know the rules. Punches only to the face. If Dat hadn’t properly responded to that shameful offense, well we would all have been questioning his manhood.”

The standing bikers helped both of the fallen men to their feet. Hambone had Daniel tilt his head back, and then with a sickening crack, popped his broken nose back into place. It took the two men a moment to recover from the assault on their groins, but once they did, Stan the Man handed out beers from one of the crates that the overseers had delivered.

A blue glow was coming from the box, causing a white frosty mist to rise from the opening under the raised lid. Daniel waved his hand over the top and felt an intense coolness coming from inside the box. Somehow, the blue light was keeping the beer cold.

“To Dat, the newest member of the Dirty Down and Dead!” Stan toasted, and after the six of them took a chug, Daniel froze.

“I guess we should have asked if you knew how to ride a chopper, before we patched you in,” Tiny laughed.

“I rode a custom FXDR 114 soft tail before the world ended,” Dat answered.

“Sweet.” Scooter sighed. “What color?”

“She was three different shades of orange. Man, I miss that bike,” he admitted.

“I miss her and I never even saw her.” Tiny chuckled.

For the next week, they basically partied. They ate, drank, and slept in hammocks and fold-up cots. They didn’t bother setting guards and weren’t bothered by anyone. The beer flowed freely, and most of the bikers smoked.

Whenever he asked when they were going to head out, the bikers simply replied that Stan was the man with the plan.  Daniel did learn a few new things from his new companions.  Tiny would eat anything, Horndog would bang anything, and Scooter didn’t seem to care much about anything. Hambone was just quiet.

Stan the Man was a tougher read. He was always watching everyone. Always thinking and studying. He came off as a wiseass, but Daniel sensed that he was hiding a darkness under the lighter persona. He seemed like he might be the most dangerous man in the group.

Stan the Man and Scooter were the only two pre-war members of the Dirt Down and Dead left. They had been involved in a lot of petty narcotics activity and ran some strippers in a club outside of LA.  Hambone, Horndog, and Tiny had all been patched in after the overseers had enlisted the group as bounty hunters.

Daniel also learned that the bald men with the metal headbands were their fellow citizens. Tiny told him that they were called seekers. The overseers had completely wiped their minds and reprogrammed them with the single task of gathering materials. According to Tiny, that is what the overseers were here for. Our resources.

They used the seekers to collect various things like metal, wood, and plastic. The seekers would send various materials through different colored power circles. Nobody knew where any of it went. The seekers were basically harmless unless you got in their personal space or impeded their single-minded mission. Then they would attack with an incredible ferocity.

The seekers slept in the modules located in various towns and cities.  The larger the city, the more seekers there were. Tiny had heard that most of San Diego was already gone. It was just a rumor though, because they had never gone that far south.

By the end of the week, Dat was getting along quite well with Tiny and Scooter. Hambone didn’t speak, unless it was absolutely necessary. Stan the Man continued to crack wise every so often. Horndog was another story. He seethed with hate every time that he looked at Dat. It seemed like the man could hold onto a grudge.

On the morning of the seventh day, Stan announced, “Lock it up. Time to roll.”

Scooter handed Daniel a leather Down Dirty and Dead vest with three bullet holes in the back, saying, “I’m sure that you will have better luck than the previous owner bato.”

“Where are we heading?” Daniel asked.

“We are slowly making our way back to California. Checking old hotspots and hangouts all along the way. If we are lucky, we will pick off a couple of bounties before we get there. If not, we will certainly find someone once we get to the bigger Californian cities. Some of the clans still survive.” Scooter grinned, his broken yellow teeth peeking out from behind his bushy moustache.

Tiny rolled out an Indian Scout motorcycle, well mostly. It had a few imported parts. It had been Indian red and white, although it was now colored mostly in brown rust. Beggars can’t be choosers, he thought.

Stan the Man eyed him for a second, then tossed him his pack and his Mossberg shotgun. His pouch with the remaining thirteen rounds were still attached to his pack. Daniel was glad to have her back, as he had grown quite fond of the weapon.

“If you are still harboring vengeful notions, remember that your street sweeper only holds two rounds. By the time you get it reloaded, whoever you leave standing will drop you quick.” Stan the Man grinned broadly at him.

They mounted their bikes, and although it took Daniel several tries, he finally got the Indian Scout to fire up. Then they were off. It felt good to be back on the open road with the wind blowing through his hair. He had entered Eugene, Oregon as a prisoner and he was leaving as a member of the Down Dirty and Dead motorcycle gang. It didn’t mean much to him.

While they sped south down Interstate 5, only one thought permeated his mind. The label on the beer that they had been drinking all week was Frosty Dog. These bikers had set the trap at the barn that had injured Rosie.

It had all been a set-up. They probably set several traps, and instead of monitoring them all, had simply waited at the health center to see who would show up. Daniel finished off his Frosty Dog and threw it against an abandoned car in the slow lane, thinking that he was going to kill every single one of these assholes.

They didn’t ride long before they stopped in a couple of nearby small towns, checking houses that had been known to be used by survivors in the past. Nothing looked disturbed in those locations, appearing as if they hadn’t been entered in months. 

They spent the night in one of the houses. The bikers tried to pick houses that still had usable mattresses that they could lay their bedrolls on. Also, they always stayed in two story places, so that they could take turns watching with binoculars from one of the upstairs windows. The group was always on the hunt for bounties.

Most nights, there was no supply shed, command module, or concrete pad. Daniel was fine with that, because the bikers seemed to hang out at the shed locations longer, slowing their progress south. The gang spent over a week, checking areas both east and west of Interstate 5.

The morning of the eighth day, Stan the Man said, “Slim pickins boys. These areas here used to be full of bounties. I think it’s time we head for Medford.” This caused the others to grin at Daniel and chuckle amongst themselves. Obviously, Medford meant that something was in store for him.

They rode for just over two hours, when Stan led them down an offramp into Medford, Oregon. They rode passed several outbuildings along the edge of town, finally coming to a stop next to another storage shed. Much like the last site, there was a command module nearby and an eye bolted concrete pad here. Daniel was glad that he wouldn’t be sleeping chained to that tonight.

The bikers got off their motorcycles and stretched. Stan went over to the storage shed and taking another key from his neck chain, opened it. Several of the men grabbed gas cans and they began filling their bikes.

“We always feed the bikes first, before we feed ourselves.” Stan grinned at Daniel, then explained, “Just in case we have to roll out in a hurry.”

Next, they got a fire going and after warming up some cans of soup, ate. After the food was gone, a crate of the Frosty Dogs came out. They were very cold, and Daniel once again saw that a blue light inside of the box was chilling the contents. The overseers were years ahead of them on technology.

“Why didn’t you go into the overseers’ module once we got here?” he asked Stan later that evening

“I only have to check in after we have captured a bounty. That way they know where to send our reward.” He smiled then half-jokingly, said, “You shouldn’t be concerned with such things. Curiosity killed the Dat. Besides, you have more pressing concerns.”

“Like?” he asked.

“We stopped here in Medford for a reason.” Stan the Man grinned even bigger. “So, what do you know about explosives?”

“Plenty,” Daniel answered.

“Good, cause that is going to come in real handy,” Stan said, pointing at a two story house down the road and atop a hill, then added, “See that place up there?”

Daniel saw the decrepit white house with its peeling paint and boarded up windows. There appeared to be barbed wire fencing around it and iron gates even closer in. “Yes. I see it,” he simply stated.

“Well, there is a crazy old combat vet living up there. Has the place wired from front to back with all kinds of nasty stuff that goes boom. We have tried to get in several times. He took out my buddy Roadkill with his sniper rifle the first time we tried. Another time, Porky got his legs blown off by a boobytrap. Every other time we’ve tried, we have nearly lost people. So, don’t think that this is going to be a cake walk. Now that I got my own marine corps veteran, I want another crack at that old fart up there,” Stan explained.

“So, you want me to go in?” he asked, knowing the answer.

“We are on the clock. We are coming up on three weeks without a bounty, so maybe we can capture this old coot and hold him for a bit.” Stan gave him a hard stare. “It’s like I told you Dat. You have the short end of the stick. It’s in your best interest to reset the bounty clock every thirty days.”

“Understood,” he nodded.

“Now that I have my own soldier boy, I thought that we might have a real shot to take down the old man. Do you think you can do it?” Stan asked.

“Let me spend a couple of days checking it out,” Daniel requested. “Once I have done a good reconnaissance, I’ll have a better idea of what I’m up against.”

“That’s my boy!” Stan the Man was grinning again.

The crew spent the next three days eating and drinking, while Daniel made several trips to the nearby house on the hill. He always went on foot, and used a set of binoculars that he borrowed from Stan. One of the other bikers always accompanied him.

During his reconnaissance, he never saw any movement in or around the run-down house. He did notice two dead seekers on the compound. One looked to have been shot, while the second was caught up in some barbed wire with its legs blown off. He also noted a front and back door.

 That night at camp he called Stan over and said, “I can get in.”

“Well, all right then. We will go in tomorrow morning.” He slapped Daniel on the back.

“No, if we do this, we do it my way,” Daniel answered.

“Meaning?” Stan was now suspicious.

“Meaning that I have a plan,” Daniel said.

Stan the Man gathered the others around and said, “Dat here thinks that he can get into the house on the hill. Let’s have a listen to what he’s got.”

“Okay, this place is a virtual fortress. The outer barbed wire fence is rigged with high HE while the inner iron barred fence has hand grenade traps all over it.” Daniel started.

“What’s HE?” Tiny interrupted.

“High explosives, dumbass,” Stan answered for Daniel.

“Yes. Some set-off by trip wires, others by movement, and I would guess even some pressure devices. Who knows what other nasty surprises he has up there on that hill. That is why I am going in there alone,” he stated.

“Alone? I don’t think so,” Horndog interjected.

“Dat doesn’t need one of us knuckleheads fumbling around in there, bumping into things, or him, and kaploowie! Mission over. Unless you’re volunteering to lead him in Horndog?” Stan laughed at the man. “I seem to remember you running and screaming from a grenade the last time that we tried this place.”

“I see your point. I’m fond of my arms and legs right where they are.” The big hillbilly grinned sheepishly.

“Exactly. So, I go it alone,” Daniel said, then added, “I will sleep during the day tomorrow and go in tomorrow night.”

“Old coot has a rifle,” Scooter advised. “Darkness might keep you from getting shot.”

“Maybe. But, I am going to need some stuff,” he advised.

“What kinda stuff?” Stan the Man questioned.

“A small flashlight, preferably with a red light. Any kind of transparent red plastic to cover the lens will do. A flat head screwdriver. Some small metal pins about an inch or two long. Ladies bobby pins would work. A knife with at least a six-inch blade. Also, something round and heavy that I can toss, but I need to be able to tie a rope around it. And, finally, and most important, a pair of bolt cutters. The big ones like they used to use on lockers in school. That way I can use them on the barbed wire also.”

“That’s quite the shopping list Dat.” Stan grinned at him. “Would you like anything else? Maybe a number three at McDonalds?”

“If you want me to get in there and get the old man out, then that is what I am going to need.” Daniel met his steely gaze, adding, “Besides, I was always a Taco Bell man myself.”

“Dang…now I want a Nacho Bell Grande,” Tiny groaned. “You guys suck.”

“Taco Bell isn’t Mexican food. Back in the day, I could take you to some places that would make your taste buds do the lambada.” Scooter licked his lips, wetting his moustache, and rubbed his large belly with both hands. “The next day you would fart until sundown, batos.”

“Can we focus here?” Stan the Man ended the food fantasy. “Alright Dat, we are gonna do this your way. Tomorrow we will go out and find your tinker toys while you sleep. Then when it gets dark, you will earn your keep and go in and get that bounty.”


Chapter 8
Hank

By Douglas Goff

That night the small group ate cans of green beans. Most of the bikers turned in early because they were now out of Frosty Dogs. Daniel sat staring at the flames of the fire, deep into the night. Tomorrow night he would have his hands full. Tomorrow night he would be going into that compound to face an armed veteran.

The next day, Daniel got up early and watched the sun rise. He had intentionally slept very little so that he could get a midday nap. After they ate more canned fruit, the bikers spent some time cleaning and tuning up their bikes. By noon, Daniel was back in a hammock, with his eyes closed. The gang members headed off to find the items that he needed.

Hambone stayed behind to watch Daniel, but after poking at the fire embers for a bit, he climbed into a nearby hammock. Withing five minutes he was snoring loudly. Daniel’s eyes popped open, and he silently slid out of his own hammock. He left his boots off so that he could walk quietly. He thought about killing Hambone and leaving, but killing a man in his sleep just wasn’t his style. He wasn’t ready to go that dark.

Instead, Daniel made his way over to the command module. Once he reached the door, it automatically slid open. He rapidly made his way in, shivering at the memory of the last time that he was in one of these and had seen the frozen woman.

It was identical to the one in the apple pod, only larger. Same five monitor screens, pads, and buttons, although there was no secondary examination room with glass sliding doors. In fact, there was no secondary door at all. The back half was reserved for the seekers quarters which must be accessed only thru their rear door.

Daniel studied the console in front of him. There was a black pad, probably for fingerprint access just to his immediate left. He wasn’t about to try that. No telling what kind of bells and whistles the fingerprints of a pod escapee would set off.  

He studied both operating monitors, seeing that they each held a different view of Medford. It took him a moment to realize that the scenes were slightly moving. The monitors were being fed by the drones. The three black screens were probably for when more drones were needed in the area. 

“I did the same thing.” The voice came from behind Daniel, startling him.

When he turned around, he saw Hambone leaning against the frame of the sliding door. Daniel tensed up, expecting a fight now that he had been discovered.

“Relax man. I hate those dirty SOB’s as much as I am sure that you do right now.” Hambone shifted his weight to the other side of the door frame. “When they ‘liberated’ me, they blasted my wife Sarah. We had been together over twenty years, and she was pregnant. That was just about a year ago. I’ve hated them ever since.”

“And you’ve stayed with them this whole time?” Daniel didn’t trust the red-haired man or his story.

“Look around you man, do you see any other options? Sure, I snuck into one of these pods, and often thought about trying to kill them all. What then? Be taken out by the overseers?” he scoffed. “In case you haven’t been keeping score, we lost this game big time. Like a peewee football league taking on an NFL team. And this is the only game in town. The remaining clans in the cities are fighting each other and have resorted to terrible things to survive. At least here, we eat and drink.”

“Eat and drink? Is that worth your soul? Worth your humanity?” Daniel said and went to push past him.

Hambone grabbed his arm and advised, “Look Dat, I just wanted you to know that if you make a play against them, I won’t intervene. I have no dog in this fight.”

“Fair enough, but if you do get in my way, I will drop you too,” Daniel warned.

“Come on, tough guy, we gotta go. They are just up the street,” Hambone said, pointing at a screen that showed Stan the Man and Scooter walking past a nearby hair salon.

Eight hours later, after the sun disappeared from the sky, Scooter shook Daniel awake, saying, “It’s time to earn your keep, bato.”

The group gathered around a fire and handed over the requested items to Daniel. They had found everything that he had asked for. He removed one of the small pouches from his pack and after attaching it to his belt, put most of the items inside of it.

“I’m going to need you guys to build a fire outside of the old man’s fences in front of the back door. It will distract him.”

“Why not outside the front door so that you can sneak through the backdoor?” Horndog questioned.

“He is expecting that. He put twice as many devices around that backdoor. So, I need you guys to keep him distracted and focused on that back door while I work my way into the front,” Daniel explained.

“I like it.” Stan grinned from ear to ear. “All of our previous attempts were on that backdoor. Crazy old fart will be expecting us to try there again. Since you are taking all the risk, this is your show Dat. We will make your fire.”

The six men made their way to the decrepit house on top of the hill. They used a road flare, which the bikers always did, to start their fire. Once they threw in some old wooden chairs, the flames were licking the sky. After waiting around a bit, to see if there was a reaction, Stan the Man said that it was time.

“Dat, let’s talk for a second,” Stan said.

“Yes,” he answered.

“How long are ya thinking that this is going to take you?” the gang leader started.

“Depends on what I run into. Could be most of the night if it gets tricky,” he guessed.

“Give me your boom stick,” the biker leader ordered.

“Still don’t trust me?” Daniel asked, handing over the Thunder Ranch.

“I can’t have you getting an itchy trigger finger and blowing that old man away. He is a thirty-day ticket to more living. Also, try to take him alive. We could still hold him for another week, giving ourselves the maximum extension. Comprende?” the slender black-haired man questioned, handing him one of the overseers’ batons.

“I’ll do my best,” Daniel said.

“And to answer your question, fuck no I still don’t trust you. That is how I have survived so long in this f’d up world. So, if you get any smart ideas, I am going to have all sides of this house covered. I know that it is going to take you a bit longer to learn that this in the only option that you have left, and that we are your new family. Don’t be a dumbass. I won’t hesitate to gut you if I have to, bounty or no bounty. So, get in there, get this guy, and get out. Are you understanding what I am laying down?” Stan stared into his eyes, unflinching.

“One hundred percent,” Daniel answered, staring back at Stan.

“Good boy.” Stan ended the conversation and patted him on the back.

Daniel went out about fifty yards from the fire, before slowly making his way around to the front of the house, where he began to slowly craw straight towards the front door. He noted that there were no lights visible in the house at all. It also hadn’t escaped his thoughts that a smart old veteran might have mounted his sniper rifle with a night optics scope. If that were the case, at least it would be over quickly.

When he reached the barbed wire fence, it took Daniel about thirty minutes to cut a path through, because he had to move very slowly. The old man had put bells and cans with rocks throughout the length, to alert him to any would be intruders.

Once Daniel was through, he removed his knife and began slowly sifting through the dirt as he advanced. Twice he struck solid objects. Could have been rocks, or could have been mines. Regardless he didn’t risk it. He marked both placed with X’s in the dirt and went around them.

Once he reached the iron gate, he felt around until he found a thin fishing line. He followed along with his hand, until he came to a fragmentation grenade. Daniel hated to do it, but he had to risk using the red light. He held his shirt up over the flashlight and grenade to cover up as much as he could before switching it on.

The hand grenade had its pin removed, with the handle wrapped twice with the fishing line. If the line was broken, then the handle would release. Daniel took one of the bobby pins that the bikers had found and slipped it into the handle release hole, securing the grenade. He then followed the fishing line in the other direction and secured a second grenade in the same fashion.

While he was working on this, he saw a body behind him. It was one of the dead seekers farther to his left. The bald man with the band around his neck had obviously stepped on a mine. His legs were missing at the knees and his body was badly burnt. It was a terrible ending for any human, even one that had been mind washed by the overseers.

Daniel pulled out the five-pound hand weight that the bikers had found earlier. He tied the rope to the weight and tossed it over the nine-foot iron fence. It landed with a loud thump on the other side. Daniel waited for several minutes, listening to see if anyone had heard the sound.

Daniel pulled on the rope, causing the weight to raise off the ground and swing towards the iron fence, where he caught it in his hand. He untied the rope from the barbell, and retied it to the bottom rail of the fence. Daniel grabbed the rope and climbed to the top of the fence, slipping over. He dropped into the yard behind it.

He slowly crawled across the last ten feet of ground to the front door. He didn’t bother to sift this time. It didn’t make sense that this section next to the house would be mined since it was somewhat maintained, and would not have been accessible to the old man.

When he began crawling up the three wooden steps, a motion activated light came on, flooding the area with bright yellow light. Daniel reached up and smashed out the light with the bolt cutters. He quickly crawled off the steps and sat against the house, listening for any sound.

Damn, that was stupid, he thought. Even though the motion light had not been visible, mounted behind a beam on the porch roof, he should have suspected that the man would have such a thing. If the old vet was worth his salt, he would now be aware that Daniel was attempting an entry. He debated aborting for tonight, but after waiting for an hour and hearing nothing, he decided to risk it. Daniel cautiously crawled back onto the porch steps.

He reached the front door, without even so much as a creak. He searched all around the door finding no wires and nothing out of the ordinary. The door was locked, but with the help of the bobby pin, he was past the knob lock in minutes. Next, he used the screwdriver to dig at the wood as quietly as he could, and managed to release the bolt lock. Finally, he cut a chain lock with the bolt cutters and was in.

  No alarm sounded, but he didn’t expect it. There was no electricity, and he hadn’t heard or seen a generator during his reconnaissance. It was pitch black inside of the house. Daniel switched on the small red screened flashlight, revealing that he was in a parlor, with a hallway running back deeper into the house.

He slowly and cautiously cleared the bottom floor, noting that it was very dusty and didn’t appear to be lived in. He made his way to a staircase that ran up from the living room. He could see a closed door at the top of the stairs.

Daniel stepped on the first step which creaked rather loudly. He froze in place for several seconds, yet he still didn’t hear a sound. This old guy should have been all over him by now. He crept up the rest of the stairs to the door. He felt around it, finding no wires of obstructions.

Daniel grasped the knob offsetting himself to the side in case someone shot through the wooden door. He slowly tuned the knob, pushing the door open. It moved an inch before hitting something. He gave it a slight push, causing a loud noise as a tower of beer cans crashed to the wooden floor.

“Shit!” he said while he pushed his way into the room.

Now he could see that he was in a hallway with three more doors. The two on the side were open and after shining his red light into them, he knew that they were empty, save for some boxes. He did note that the windows had gun slats for firing out at encroachers.

The far door was way more intriguing, as there was a dim light coming from underneath the door. Daniel wondered what was going on. Something felt wrong. He had set off the sensor light, creaked a step, and toppled a primitive aluminum can tower alarm, yet no reaction. Where was this guy and what was he up to?

Daniel made his way to the last door in the house, knowing that his questions were about to be answered. After checking the door, he slowly pushed it open. Several things in the room caught his attention.

The fairly large room was lit by an oil lamp sitting on a table next to a bed. Also on the table were some rifle cartridges and six or eight empty pill bottles. There was a half empty glass of water and a booze flask next to that.

In the bed was an old white-haired man with a stubbled face who wasn’t moving, and appeared to be dead. He had very thin hair on the top of his head and looked to have been tall. Three sides of the room had windows that were covered in boards and then with mattresses.

Sitting on the bed next to the old man was a Vietnam era M40 bolt action sniper rifle. On the floor was a crate with the words US Army on it. In the crate were several fragmentation grenades.

On the walls were some old pictures. One was of the man, maybe ten years ago, with a woman his age. Probably his wife. Another was of the US Navy aircraft carrier Bon Homme Richard.

The picture that really caught Daniel’s eye was one of the old man in a dress white US Navy uniform with several ribbons and medals on it, including the Navy Seal pin. He also had a Vietnam Ribbon and a Combat Action Ribbon. The name under the picture identified him as Chief Henry Hudson.

Daniel was pondering about what to do next, thinking that maybe he could make his stand against the bikers here, although it looked like most of the food was gone. Then he heard a low moan come from the man. He wasn’t dead!

Daniel approached the old man as his eyes fluttered open, followed by a low gruff voice. “Stan send ya? Guess he is finally going to get his bounty after all these years.”

“Chief Henry Hudson, I presume?” Daniel asked.

“My friends call me ‘Hank’, but I guess you can too,” he answered in a raspy voice, while trying to grab the M40, but was unable to use his hands.

“You don’t need that chief,” Daniel said, taking the rifle off the bed and setting it against the wall. “I’m not going to blast a fellow serviceman.”

“You were in the navy?” Hank asked.

“No chief, but you guys were our uber. I served in the US Marine Corps. I was a corporal when the wheels came off the bus.” Daniel chuckled at his own comment, because the navy used to transport marines all over the world.

“Ah, a jarhead.” Hank laughed. “Should’ve known it would take one of you grunts to get into my complex.”

“Wasn’t easy,” Daniel admitted.

“When I was younger, well hell, five days ago and I would have got you. You sounded like a heard of cattle stomping up here,” the old man groaned out in pain.

“What ails you chief?” Daniel asked.

“It’s the damn cancer. Been fighting it since before the invasion. Stupid cigarettes. Funny how I had all the information on how deadly they are, and I just couldn’t quit smoking ‘em. Anyways, once the overseers came, it got harder to get my meds. Used to be a lot of people around here to help me. Eighty-five thousand people lived in this town when the war started. Even after everyone fled Medford, there were still over a thousand survivors holding out here,” he replied.

“What happened?” Daniel asked.

“Groups like the Dirty Down and Dead happened. We fought a lot of them off. Killed a couple of entire crews here. We just kept driving them off. All except Stan’s group. They just kept coming back, bountying people each time. Eventually it was just me,” Hank explained.

“So, no more people meant no more meds?” Daniel deduced.

“Exactly. Ran out about six months ago. Stan’s crew took hundreds from here. Hey, does that jackass still call himself Stan the Man?”

“Sure does. Did you know him before the war?” Daniel questioned.

Hank became quiet and didn’t speak for a moment. Then he let out a rattly cough and said, “Yeah. You listen here. He is a stone-cold killer. Watch your self with that one. He will slit your throat without having a second thought.”

“We have all done things since the overseers have arrived that we aren’t proud of. We do what we have to do to survive,” Daniel admitted, pulling over a wooden chair. He sat down next to the dying man’s bed.  

“No, I mean before this mess happened. He and his crew used to party here. They would store their illegal contraband here sometimes. I turned a blind eye.” Hank shook his head, then continued, “One night he brought a couple of hookers over here. Stan was drunk and treating one of them rough, so she refused him. He strangled her to death right beside the fire pit. Killed her with his bare hands. She is still buried out there in the backyard. The Dirty Down and Dead members all pissed on her before they buried her. Make no mistake, marine, he is an animal. A heartless killer. I watched the whole thing from that window right over there.”

“You never reported it?”

“Two detectives showed up a couple of weeks later, wanting to dig around for the body. I guess one of the other prostitutes told what had happened. Cops had chased the gang all the way up to Washington state. Ended in a shootout at some bar. A cop was killed and two of Stan’s crew also died. Sparky and a guy they called Migs. Couple of real losers.”

“Oh man,” Daniel said.

“Yeah, some bad shit. Stan and his brother Butch got away with Scooter and a few others. Butchie was a good kid until he started hanging out with his older brother and his biker crew. Polluted him quickly. Anyways, overseers attacked the same night that the detectives were here. Stan has hated me ever since. Thinks that I was the one who put the police on him. Should have. I will always regret that, but I guess it really doesn’t matter now.”

“Doesn’t. Seems like you beat him in the end. He never got you.” Daniel chuckled.

“Isn’t that what you are here for?” Hank let out a long wheezing cough.

“I told you that I’m not going to bounty you chief,” Daniel assured him.

“What do they call you, jarhead,” Hank asked.

“Dat. Picked it up in bootcamp. Name just stuck,” he answered the dying man.

“Well, Dat, you listen good. I am a goner. I have a day, maybe two left. You bounty me. I want you to. It’s the least I can do for a fellow service man.”

“I can’t do that chief. I don’t want that mark on my soul . . . ,” Daniel started, but Hank interrupted him.

“That’s an order marine. Last I checked, a chief outranked a corporal,” the old man said and grabbed the end of the overseers’ baton.

The two men struggled for a second, with Daniel surprised at the old sick man’s burst of strength when he pulled the head of the baton into his chest. It must have been adrenaline because the muscular Daniel was having trouble controlling the elderly man. He still had some Navy Seal strength in him. Then Hank got his thumb on the square black button . . . and pushed it!

Green light flooded the room as a green power circle surrounded the dying man. Daniel stared into the chief’s eyes, who gave his arm a little pat, and with a flash, he was gone. Daniel sat in the chair for a long moment, collecting himself. He wiped a tear from his eye, saddened by the demise of the old man, then got up and searched the room. The box of grenades, the sniper rifle, a few cans of food, and a couple of jugs of water. That was about it.

He contemplated trying to stay here and fight off the bikers. He had the weapons and the defenses. They would never get in. Problem was, there was not enough food and he wouldn’t be able to go out to find some. No, it was better to use the bikers to get him to California. After thinking for a moment, Daniel picked up the sniper rifle and fired it into the ceiling.

When the sun started to rise in the eastern sky, Daniel made his way to the window facing the backyard. He moved the mattress and pulled down the boards that covered it. Once it was clear, the warm morning sunlight flooded in. After his eyes adjusted to the bright light, he could see all of the bikers staring up at him. He gave them a thumbs up and they all broke out into a cheer. The only one who didn’t carry on was Stan the Man, who just stood there staring up at him.

Yes, he still had need of the Dirty Down and Dead. He would use their protection from the overseers to get him south. Daniel still had Alcatraz in the back of his mind. He was praying that he could find something there. Something that he was losing. Hope.

Author Notes This is one of my top three favorite chapters out of the twenty-four in the book. I like the way it all seemed to come together here and writing the character of Stan the Man was actually a lot of fun. He is one of my favorites in this book.


Chapter 9
You Killed Carl!

By Douglas Goff

Warning: The author has noted that this contains the highest level of language.

Once back at the storage shed, Stan the Man disappeared into the command module. A few moments later, a green power circle appeared, followed by new crates of food, medicine , batteries, smokes, and Frosty Dogs.

Although the supplies had arrived. Stan stayed in the command module for a long time. So long, in fact, that the other bikers had eaten, drank, and were now sleeping. Daniel had told them his story of what had happened at least three times. Now only Daniel remained up, staring at the fire.

“So, how’s about you regale me with your story once more. I’m sure that you had to tell it several times to the others.” The voice of Stan came from behind him.

Daniel grabbed a cold Frosty Dog from the cool crate sitting behind him and handed it to Stan, asking, “Where do you want me to start?”

“Well, at the beginning of course. That is how all good stories start.” He wore his signature ear-to-ear grin.

Daniel finished off his beer and said, “After I left the fire, I made my way to the barbed wire. I cut my way through, then surpassed a few mines that I found with my knife. At the rail, I dispatched of a few grenade traps, then went over. At the front door, I accidently set off a hidden sensor light.”

“Yes, Tiny saw that.” Stan the Man chuckled. “We thought that the old man had you for sure.”

“Me too. I waited for a long while, then broke into the house. There were a few tricks inside, but I eventually made it upstairs. That’s where I found him. In the back room.”

“Did you talk to him?” the biker leader questioned, watching him intensely.

“No time,” Daniel lied. “He came at me with the rifle. He got off a shot before I blasted him.”

“Seems too easy,” Stan said.

“I think he was sick. I saw a lot of empty medicine bottles. He seemed slow and not very alert. His illness must have dulled him these past days, or he would have had me after the sensor light went off. As it was, his shot missed and I got him,” Daniel half-lied.

“Shame we weren’t able to hold him for a few days.” Stan smirked.

“Couldn’t be helped. It was him or me,” Daniel lied again.

“Very good, Dat.” Stan the Man was grinning again. “Did he suffer?”

“I don’t think so.” Daniel found the question odd.

“I saw that you brought out his rifle and a box of grenades. A few seemed to be missing.” He got serious again.

“Yes. They are on the fences,” Daniel answered.

“Oh, I am sure some are. But a smart fellow like you could have snuck one into your gear somewhere. A souvenir of sorts.” Stan the Man was once again staring at him with his steely gaze, the grin long gone.

“I---”, Daniel started, but was interrupted.

“Don’t lie to me dumbass. Not now that we are becoming such good friends.” Stan continued to stare at him.

Daniel reached into his small pouch and pulled a fragmentation grenade from it, holding it out to Stan, while saying, “It wasn’t to use on you guys. I just wanted one.”

“If it was for us, I suspect that tiny pieces of me would be sprayed all over that command module right now. Or all of these sleeping knuckleheads would now be pin cushions. No, I get it. Marines like their toys. Still, I am going to keep ahold of these.” Stan the Man laughed, taking the grenade from Daniel’s hand. “Good job today Dat. Keep it up, and I’ll short stick someone else when the time comes.”

“What are you gonna do with the M40 rifle?” Daniel asked.

“It’s junk. Besides, there are only seven cartridges for it. I was going to leave it in the shed, but you can keep it if you like.” Stan was feeling generous.

The bikers stayed in Medford for another three days, resting and relaxing during the daytime, and listening to music and drinking throughout the nights. There was some discussion about going and searching the house, but when Daniel advised about the buried mines, Stan decided that it wasn’t worth the risk.

On the final day, he had Daniel retrieve the grenades strung to the iron fence. He ended up with six more total. It took him all day to cautiously move about the compound, but Stan the Man was quite pleased that he now had a nearly full box.

“You continue to impress me, Dat,” the gang leader said after counting his newly received prizes.

The following morning, they headed back out onto Interstate 5. Daniel loved being back on the road. He enjoyed the feeling of the powerful motorcycle under him and the wind whipping through his hair. In the moment, he could almost imagine that he was back in the days before the overseer invasion had occurred.

They spent a full week checking in and around the towns of Phoenix and Talent, Oregon.  They not only failed to find any people, but there was no evidence that people had been around for some time.

The bikers explained to Daniel that in the beginning, it was normal for the houses to be empty because after the initial mass fleeing, most people that remained in the small towns would group up in locations like churches, malls, city buildings, and such. After time passed and those places became targeted by thieves and bounty hunters, people began hiding back in the houses.

Stan the Man led his crew back south on the highway to Ashland. It took only ten minutes to get to the larger city. While the Dirty Down and Dead had no storage shed in the last two towns, they had one here. It was pretty much the same setup, with the prisoner pad and a nearby command module. Once they arrived, the group followed their routine and filled up their bikes.

They spent the rest of the day checking nearby buildings. Dat was searching with Stan the man when they arrived at a pharmacy. They skipped the front door, as there was a green power ring around the frame, and made their way to an alleyway side door that was ajar. Dan the man broke into a big grin.

When Daniel went to speak, Dan the Man put his fingers to his lips and leaned in close, whispering, “We close every door.”

Stan the Man pulled a Baretta 9MM from his waistband and Daniel followed suit by taking his shotgun from his pack. They quietly and slowly entered the pharmacy, with Stan heading to the right and Daniel taking the left. They met up on the far side, near the medicine counter. There were no people here, but there certainly had been. There were two unrolled sleeping bags, some eaten apple cores, and other trash lying about. It looked like someone had taken off in a hurry.

“Probably heard our bikes,” Stan the Man said.

The gang leader pulled a walkie-talkie from his pocket and called the others over. Within minutes they had grouped up outside the pharmacy. They knew that something was up and looked eager for action.

“No fire tonight ladies,” Stan the Man started.

“We got something, boss?” Horndog asked.

“Seems we got some runners hiding out. Hambone, get up on top of the Springs Hotel and get eyes on the city,” Stan said, tossing him his binoculars. “Scooter and Dat set up on the south end of town and watch the roads out. Horndog and Tiny will cover the north end. I will be on the cameras in the command module. Stay quiet and no lights or fires. Let’s see if we can smoke these bounties out. Remember that we are only ten days in, so we want to capture them, even if we have to shoot them in the legs.”

The bikers nodded that they understood and headed off to their assignments. Daniel and Scooter set up in a small cabin on the outskirts of Ashland that overlooked Interstate 5 and a good portion of the south end of town from the hill that it sat on. It was an older log-style cabin, but had a large plate-glass window in the front room that gave them a great view.

Scooter pulled two cans of applesauce from his pack and tossed one to Daniel. After opening it with his knife, Daniel sucked down the succulent sauce, not able to remember the last time that he had such a treat.

“Slow down bato, or you are gonna get some gas,” Scooter said, then raised his leg and ripped a loud one. “Like me.”

After Scooter stopped laughing, Daniel asked him, “So what’s up with Stan the Man? He hasn’t been the same since we left Medford. Seems quieter and moody.”

“Don’t you know who you took out up in that house on the hill, bato?” Scooter stopped grinning.

“Yeah, I saw his name on a picture. Henry Hudson,” Daniel answered.

“Yeah, well our boss’ full name is Stanley Erik Hudson. Hank was Stan’s old man. You blasted his father, bato. Ol’ Stan never forgave his old man for turning us in for killing some street walking puta. His old man chose some dead bitch over his own sons. Stan and Butchie never forgave him. Not cool.”

“Sounds like the whole thing was a bad deal,” Daniel answered.

“Well, it’s all good cause we are the only family that he has now.” Scooter stared him in the eyes. “We are all family now, aren’t we Dat?”

“Of course,” Dat answered, staring back at him. “This is the only game in town.”

“Good answer Dat. I don’t want to have to put a bullet in your head, bato,” he said and raised his leg, ripping another loud fart.

Daniel shook his head and smiled. He spent three days with the hairy Mexican biker, who had no qualms about belching and farting at a steady rate. Communications on the walkie-talkies revealed that no one had seen a thing. When the sun set on the third day, they were preparing to meet up at the storage shed when Hambone reported that he saw a light. It was coming from the west side of town, but only lasted for ten seconds or so. He said that it had looked like a flashlight.

This caused Stan to rethink his pull out, and the group spent another three days watching. Nothing further was seen, causing the bikers to finally regroup at the shed on the fourth morning. Stan had hoped that whoever they were would have made an attempt to leave, but it seemed like they hadn’t. Stan felt that the gang was wasting too much time here and decided that it was time to roll out.

After searching several places on the west side of town, they mounted their bikes and prepared to head south. They rode south towards the interstate ramps at a fast pace, with Horndog and Daniel in the rear. Daniel noticed Horndog’s head jerk to the left. When he followed his gaze, he saw a young pretty woman standing in a large storefront window, frozen in fear!

Horndog immediately slowed his bike and turned back, with Daniel following. The other bikes were moving so fast that they didn’t see the two of them pull off. Both men jumped off their bikes and jogged back to the storefront window where they had just seen the girl. Now she was gone.

Horndog signaled for Dat to make his way around back, while he stayed up front. Right as Daniel turned the corner to go around back, someone kicked the front door open and he heard a single gunshot. When he came back around the corner, he saw a man with a small two shot derringer aiming at Horndog who was holding his stomach and fumbling with his baton.

The man looked to be in his mid-twenties, with disheveled brown hair and stubble on his face. He was wearing blue jeans and a black t-shirt. The young man was fumbling with the derringer, trying to get it to fire the second shot. Then a green power circle struck him, and with a fizzle he was gone. Just his clothes and the derringer remained. Daniel started to make his way over to Horndog.

The southern biker held his hand up for Daniel to wait, saying, “Now come on out here honey. Your boyfriend was shooting at me, and I had to defend myself. I promise you that I won’t blast you if you come out, but if I have to come in there and get you, well I can promise that you ain’t gonna like it.”

Daniel heard the porch creak and then saw her. She was young, maybe eighteen or nineteen, had curly red hair, and was wearing tight jeans and a black blouse. She was whimpering with a panicked look on her face, and was trembling. She hadn’t noticed Daniel off to her left.

“Good girl. Now get on down here. You gonna party with some real men tonight,” Horndog said, licking his lips all over, in a very excited way.

Daniel could see that the young woman she was holding a sharp butcher knife behind her back.  He didn’t think that she could do much with that against Horndog, but knew that he had to do something or this was going to turn into a real bad scene. He set his Thunder Ranch against the shop wall and slowly removed the baton from his belt. Horndog didn’t notice, he was completely focused on his prize.

When the girl got to within five feet of Horndog, she whispered, “You killed Carl.”

“Oh baby, you don’t need Carl, now that you got ol’ Horny to take care of you,” he said in his slow southern drawl, swiping his big tongue across his moustache.

Daniel could hear the other bikers approaching in the distance. They must have realized that they were two bikers short. It was now or never he thought, shouting, “Knife!” Daniel pushed the button on his overseers’ baton and with a fizzle, the green power circle took the young woman away.

“No! No ! No!!! You freaking idiot!” Horndog screamed and charged at Daniel, punching him square in the jaw. The hit knocked Daniel back, but was surprisingly weak for such a big man.

He came with a left this time, but Daniel wrapped it up in the crux of his right underarm and blasted Horndog in the side of his head with a left elbow. When the other bikers rode up, they found the two men wrestling around in the dust with Daniel holding Horndog in a headlock.

“Break it the fuck up, or I swear that I am gonna blast both of you idiots!” Stan the Man yelled after jumping off his motorcycle.

Scooter and Tiny ran over and pulled the two men apart.

“Now calmly tell me what happened. You first Horndog,” Stan ordered.

“This jackass…blasted her. She was mine! She had…red hair…tight pants…so cute…dang! I, um . . . found her . . . and he blasted her . . . and now she is gone . . . ,” Horndog stammered out in a jumble of agitated words.

“Dat, you think that you could explain things a bit clearer? Maybe start at the beginning.” Stan shook his head at the rambling Horndog.

“We were following you boys out of town when we saw this woman standing in the shop window here. We both turned around and jumped off our bikes. I was going around the back when this young fellow charged out the front door and shot Horndog in the stomach,” Dat explained. “I came back around the corner and saw that the woman was approaching Horndog with a big knife behind her back. I thought that she was going to kill him because he was already wounded. So, to protect him, I blasted her. That’s what happened.”

“Horndog are you wounded?” Stan asked.

“No, look,” he hissed, holding open his leather vest, showing where the bullet had passed through it, an inch from his side. “Besides, he is lying. I didn’t see no knife. That son of a bitch was jealous and didn’t want me to get laid.”

“Calm down Horndog, I’m going to get to the bottom of this,” their leader said. “So Dat, why didn’t you follow orders and shoot her in the leg? Then we could have all had a nice party tonight.”

“When I went around the corner, I had sat my shot gun against the wall, planning to grab the woman with both hands when she came out the back door. Once I came back around to the front, I did what I had to do to save Horndog and I blasted her. Look, I am the short stick. I screwed myself, losing another thirty-day reprieve to save his stupid ass and he thanked me by punching me in the face,” Daniel exclaimed, feigning anger.

Stan the Man walked over to the woman’s clothes and kicked them around. Then he picked up the sharp butcher’s knife and whistled. “Well now Horndog, I think that you owe Dat here a genuine apology. That broad was going to stick you like a roasted pig.”

“Apologize? To him?” Horndog looked like he was going to cry. “I don’t owe that assh---"

“I said apologize to him now!” Stan’s interrupting voice rose, the man becoming angry for the first time since Daniel had met him.

The big southern biker looked about at the others, and finding no support, said, “I’m sorry for punching you in the face Dat.”

“Now thank him for saving your life.” Stan the Man exerted total dominance over Horndog.

He simply looked down at his boots and quietly said, “Thanks for saving my life.”

“It’s okay. You hit like a girl anyways,” Daniel answered, causing the others to laugh. He shouldn’t have goaded the shamed man, but he couldn’t help himself.

“You can keep that cool little derringer. Consider it a consolation prize,” Stan said to Horndog, who continued to stare at his boots.

“Just over two weeks in and we blasted two more bounties. We had better tighten this shit up ladies, or we are going to be blasting each other, sooner than later.” Stan the Man grinned from ear to ear.


Chapter 10
Deacon

By Douglas Goff

Warning: The author has noted that this contains the highest level of language.

The bikers rode back to their shed and after Stan disappeared into the command module, their crates arrived. The group replaced the batteries in their walkie-talkies and radio. They partied with loud music and Frosty Dogs until the wee hours of the morning.

Everybody seemed pleased with Dat, now that he had blasted two separate bounties, and kept slapping him on the back. Everyone except Horndog, who just sat brooding and glaring at Daniel from across the fire.

The crew stayed in Ashland for another two days resting, eating, and partying. Then they jumped back on Interstate 5 and continued southbound. They were only on the interstate for a couple of minutes before Stan the Man led them onto Route 66, where they continued riding south. They drove slow, dodging abandoned burnt out cars and campers. Apparently, the overlords didn’t need to keep a lane open on 66.

Five minutes later they passed by a campground with about fifteen motor homes parked in it, that looked like they had been empty for years. The other bikers looked at each other and laughed. Obviously, something had occurred there.

Another five minutes and a beautiful lake opened up to their east. A slanted sign identified it as Emigrant Lake Reservoir. Stan drove them into the parking lot of a beach area, where they parked their bikes.

“Some of you ladies are starting to smell real foul. Thought maybe it was bath time.” Stan grinned at the others while stripping down to his underwear. “Dat, you take first watch since we can’t take our weapons in.  I’ll send someone up to relieve you in a bit.”

It didn’t escape Daniels mind that he could take them all out here and now. He knew that his luck was going to run out eventually, and he would be forced into a bad situation. Still, he needed the protection that the bounty hunters offered from the overseers, at least until they got closer to Alcatraz. Then he could make a play against them.  

The other gang members all stripped down to their underwear and got into the lake. They swam about and splashed each other, but Daniel wasn’t paying attention to that. He had gone up onto a small sand berm to watch them when he saw a tiny wisp of smoke.

The smoke was rising from a small fire pit with ashes in it, just on the opposite side of the berm. Daniel causally walked over to it and began slowly kicking sand over it. He needed to get to California before they raped any women or blasted any innocent survivors like Carmen or Rosie. He wasn’t down for that.

After about a half hour, Stan sent Horndog over to relieve him, who said, “You know, Stan ain’t always going to be around to protect you, Princess. One day it’s going to be just you and me, then I am going to make you pay for taking away my sweet piece. One day.”

“I’d be lying to you if I told you that I wasn’t looking forward to that day.” Daniel winked at him, before he walked down the beach to the shoreline. The water was cold and refreshing, but he didn’t really enjoy his swim because he could feel the creepy perverted eyes of Horndog on him.

Tiny was still in the water, floating like a giant whale, while Daniel asked, “What was up with that campground that we passed through? Seemed to excite you guys.”

“It happened in the early days before I got patched in,” Tiny advised, then continued, “Seems that a few years ago, Stan, Scooter, Horndog, and some others raided a group of thirty plus survivors camping there. They blasted six or seven of them and rode off. Someone in the camp fired a rifle at them as they left and hit a fella called Snoopy in the back.”

“Killed him?” Dat asked.

“Not at first. I guess they took him to this very beach where he spent the night in agony. He was dead by morning,” the obese black man said.

“Oh man. What happened next?” Daniel asked.

“A shit show. Stan led the group back that very morning. They left their batons behind and went in and killed every single one of the campers. The last ten of them tried to surrender. Stan put them on their knees, and he walked down the line and shot each one of them in the back of the head. Used that Baretta 9mm that he always carries,” Tiny revealed, standing up.

“I’m glad I wasn’t part of that,” Daniel stated truthfully.

“Me too. The bodies are still over there in those campers. Just goes to show you what happens when you screw with Stan the Man.” Tiny shrugged and began making his way back up to the beach.

The bikers spent the next couple of nights on the beach, enjoying roaring fires. They did a lot of swimming. By noon the third day, they were back on the road, making their way back to Interstate 5. Thirty minutes later, they passed a sign that read ‘Welcome to California’, with three faded yellow flowers on it. Daniel was elated. He was getting closer to home.

A short time later, Stan led them off the highway and onto some dirt roads. They pulled into an odd-looking town. A sign identified it as Hilt, California, a historical ghost town. Daniel figured that it must have been some type of tourist trap in the past.

“We gonna try this again, bato?  We just had a bounty,” Scooter asked Stan.

“Let’s just try to get a look. If it appears to have softened up any, then we will camp nearby and try to bag a bounty in a few weeks,” Stan answered, climbing off his hog. “Dat, come with me.”

Daniel followed the biker leader through the woods for about an hour, then across a waist high ditch. Once they reached the other side, they began to crawl through some thick brush, until they reached a chain link fence. Stan pulled out his binoculars and took a long hard look. Then he handed them to Daniel.

Daniel found himself looking into a fortified compound. There was eight-foot fencing all around, lined with barbed wire rolls at the top. Four ten-foot towers stood on each corner, with an armed man in each one. There was another man on foot patrol with a German sheppard attack dog.

There were three wooden cabin-like structures and an equal number of tents. Under one of the tents, Daniel could see about twenty people eating at a long picnic table. It appeared that they had a roasted pig. Then Daniel noticed the barn at the opposite side of them. There were pens along it with cows, chickens, and pigs.

“Survivalists,” Stan said, while they crawled back across the ditch. “We have never scored a bounty here. I have been checking this place, on and off, for the past two years. I’ve been hoping that someone else would soften them up, or maybe they would have some internal issues. Anything that would allow me to pick one off.”

“They don’t look soft to me,” Daniel answered.

“No. Not this time.” he laughed while they walked back to the ghost town of Hilt.

The bikers spent the night in one of the wooden structures, foregoing a fire, so as not to alert the survivalists. If they had heard the motorcycles coming in, the preppers never came to investigate the noise. Early the next morning, they headed back out to Interstate 5. In fifteen minutes, they reached a town called Hornbrook.

It had been a city of less than a thousand people, but due to some wild fruit groves that were doing extremely well, it was known to be a hub for survivors. Daniel climbed off his Indian motorcycle and saw some clothes on the ground, as well as packs. He pulled off his overseers’ baton and snatched up a brassier with the end, holding it up for the guys to see.

“If we are the last men standing, then who bountied this lady?” he asked.

“There is another one over here.” Hambone pointed at another pile of personal items.

“Look! Bikes,” Horndog exclaimed, walking over to two Schwinn mountain bikes hidden in a bush.

“Overseers?” Tiny guessed.

“Maybe. But they aren’t usually in small towns like this. They hang out in the bigger cities. Let’s keep our eyes open and stay together,” Stan the Man ordered.

The group went through the packs, but found nothing of use, so began checking the town. The buildings were empty, but the bikers did find fairly fresh dirt bike tracks on a well-worn dirt path that led into a large pear grove.

The gang hid their bikes inside a nearby gas station and followed the tracks down the trail for the rest of the day. Once it started getting dark, they moved just far enough off the dirt path so that they could hear any dirt bikes using the path.

They spent two more days in the pear grove camp, listening for the bikes and eating pears, but they never came back. When it started to rain, the bikers walked back to town and retrieved their motorcycles. They rode fifteen miles further south, arriving in Yreka, California.

Stan the Man led them straight into the Yreka Junction shopping mall, where they parked and checked out what used to be a grocery store. Once they cleared it, they walked their bikes inside, and parked them in an aisle. Stan sent Hambone and Horndog into the other stores to make sure that they were empty. Daniel found the grocery store to be quite interesting.

It was obvious that the mall had been used as a hideout for survivors. Somebody had brought an old metal fire ring into the store and several fires had been made in one of the aisles. There were old pop up tents and sleeping bags, as well as suitcases and clothes strewn about in various locations.

“This was another good one in the beginning,” Scooter said. “Several different groups were set up in this place. We used to bounty a lot from here in the first year or two.”

“Problem was that too many bounty hunters knew about this place,” Horndog added.

After the mall was deemed clear, the bikers built a fire in the ring. They were sitting around it, eating canned corn, when they heard a familiar sound. Harleys. From the sounds of it, there were several. And they were approaching fast!

“Bounty Hunters! To the roof boys,” Stan the Man said, leading them towards a roof accessible ladder in a backroom.

“How do we know that they are bounty hunters?” Daniel asked.

“Nobody rides hogs but hunters,” Tiny said, huffing at their pace.

“People learned quickly in the beginning to stay out of motorized vehicles. The overseers can track them. They collected the bodies up like cordwood in the numerous traffic jams. Was easy pickin’s for them,” Scooter added.

“So, only hunters can get around on bikes or in cars. Everyone else gets blasted.” Stan the Man finished the explanation as they reached the roof.

Once they made their way to the edge where the front parking lot was, they could see five bikers standing next to their bikes. Their jacket patches identified them as the Jackals. There was a skinny short black dude, two Mexicans that looked of medium build with bushy moustaches, and a rough looking white woman with half her head shaved and the other half in corn rows. She had to be around forty and had a muscular frame.  

The obvious leader was an athletic, tall, bald white man with no facial hair. He wore black mirrored sunglasses and held a shotgun with one hand, casually resting against the top of his shoulder. He just stood there, staring up at them.

Daniel sharply noted that besides the leader’s shotgun, the woman carried an AR-15, one of the Mexicans had some type of hunting rifle with a scope. The other Mexican carried another shotgun. The skinny black man had a M-16. If any of them twitched, it would be a blood bath, on both sides.

“Holy crap, that’s Deacon and his crew,” Horndog exclaimed, but Stan the Man held up his hand to silence him.

“If any one of them so much as moves for a gun, you all start shooting and don’t stop until they are all dead,” Stan ordered, then turned his attention to the Jackals and yelled, “I heard that you all bought the farm up in Seattle.”

“The rumors of our demise have been greatly exaggerated. Those cannibals thought that they had an easy meal, but we proved them wrong,” the one called Deacon looked up and said.

“I knew that you were too ugly to die, Deacon,” Stan fired back.

“I have unfinished business on this planet,” Deacon advised, pulling his sunglasses off and intensely staring straight at Stan the Man.

“Don’t we all,” Stan answered.

“What day are you on?” Deacon said.

“We have almost three weeks before we need to bounty again, you?” the Dirty Down and Dead leader said.

“We are on day twenty-eight. Got a couple of cyclists last time. We’re getting a bit desperate. I had to blast one of my own a couple months ago. Kid that went by the name Marlboro. Dumbass didn’t even smoke.” Deacon frowned. “We were even considering attacking those heavily armed preppers west of Hilt. That is until we watched you boys roll into town from the cameras in the command module.

“Yeah, I can see that you are one man down. Don’t suppose that you are willing to trade short sticks, like back in the old days?” Stan offered, causing Scooter to slap Daniel on the back and laugh.

“Nah. I think that we both know that this isn’t going to go down like that. Besides, I don’t think Paco would go willingly,” Deacon said, causing the Mexican with the hunting rifle to smile, revealing that his three top teeth were gold.

“Yeah, I bet his brother Marcos ain’t gonna be down with that either,” Stan said, causing the Mexican with the shotgun to shake his head no.

“We would take the female.” Stan shot off one of his big grins, but when the Jackals remained silent, he continued, “It’s been a while for me and the boys since we enjoyed the pleasures of a woman’s company. I’m sure that she would fit right in.”

“Wouldn’t work. If it was your entire crew against her, I would bet that she would be the last man standing,” he answered with a smirk.

“So, you have no one to barter with,” Stan said, his smile fading away.

“Afraid not. I guess you now understand my unfortunate predicament. I see that you have a couple of newbies of your own,” Deacon acknowledged.

“Yes, the red head is called Hambone. That tall pretty-boy is Dat,” Stan advised, then added, “I see that you still have Cappy there, but who is the female?”

“She calls herself Saber, although you don’t want to rattle her. She is one tough cookie. We picked her up near Medford,” the bald man answered.

“The past is the past,” Stan said. “Why don’t you let things lay.”

“I’ll give that some thought, Stan the Man. Some real deep thought,” he replied, then turned to his crew and said, “Mount up!”

The Dirty Down and Dead members stared at the Jackals until they rode out of sight.

“Horndog, take that sniper rifle from Daniel and take first watch up here. I’ll send Tiny up to relieve you in two hours. Stay awake. They will be back,” Stan ordered.

“Dat is short stick. He should have first watch,” Horndog complained.

“You have first watch, asshole. I have a different job for Dat,” their leader answered moodily.

They went down below, where Stan ordered the others to set barrel fires throughout the parking lots. Then he pulled out several hand grenades from his saddle bags and began handing them to Daniel.

“Geez Stan, how many of them do you have in there?” Daniel asked

“Well, there were twenty-seven in the crate and now there is none in the crate, so if my math is correct, that means that I have . . . twenty-seven.”

“What do you want me to do with these?” Daniel asked.

“I want you to take eight of these and set boobytraps on all of the entrances. Can you do that for me Dat?” Stan asked. Daniel saw a hint of fear on the man’s face for the first time since they had met.

“Sure, I’m certain that I can find some wire around here,” he answered.  

“Good. Get to it. Leave these front doors into the market for last, that way we can get all of our people inside,” Stan the Man advised.

“On it, boss,” Daniel answered and headed off.

It took him just over two hours to set them all. When he returned to the fire, Horndog was curled up and lightly snoring in one of the sleeping bags. Hambone was taking his turn on the roof. Stan, Tiny, and Scooter were by the fire.

Tiny began to sing, only his voice didn’t match his body. It was high and sweet.

“Oh man, you are really good.” Daniel smiled.

“I was a communications major, could handle any of the electronics shit, really. But music was my thing. I wrote and sang a song called Girl Got That Love under the name Big Man Tiny. It had just charted on the Billboard Top 100. I was on my way. Fast cars, big houses, and bigger women. Then these alien bastards came two days after I charted and took it all away.”

“Sing it for us, bato,” Scooter requested.

“Nah, you guys don’t want to hear it again.” The big man looked embarrassed.

“I haven’t heard it Tiny, but I would like to,” Dat asked.

Tiny cleared his throat and sang through his R&B love ballad. It was hauntingly beautiful. The big guy did have talent. They all sat quiet for a few moments, thinking about the man’s poor luck.

“What is the deal between the Jackals and the Dirty Down and Dead? Seems like there is some bad blood here.” Daniel broke the silence by changing the topic.  

“We have history,” Stan the Man said. “You can be sure that they are coming back tonight, or at the very least tomorrow.”

“To bounty us?” Daniel questioned.

“No, this isn’t about that. They are coming for blood,” Stan answered, letting out a long sigh.

“They hate Stan. They want to kill him,” Scooter stated.  

“Make no mistake, they will go through you guys to get to me. Even bounty one of you if they get the chance,” Stan warned from the shadows, then walked off, mumbling that he was going to check the perimeter.

“Anybody want to fill me in?” Daniel questioned.

Scooter took on the task of filling in the missing pieces. “We used to ride with those batos, back in the day. First, we would hunt together, then we would party together. Things got darker when bounties became scarce. We started eyeballing each other with paranoia and fighting over any solo bounty that we came across.”

“I came a short time after all of this happened.” Tiny broke into the conversation.

“So, one particularly bad month we reached day twenty-eight. Stan the Man was going to have to blast one of us very soon. Everybody is nervous. Jittery and on edge. Then he does it. Stan the Man snuck into the lead Jackal’s tent and blasts him.

“But Deacon is still here,” Daniel pointed out.

“Deacon’s brother, Snake, was running the crew back then. You would have thought they were twins if you stood ‘em side by side. I think that there was just a year between them. Anyways, Stan took out Snake, and our gang raced away into the night. They have hated us ever since. They chased us from town to town, state to state. We had a couple of shoot-outs. People died on both sides.”

“What a waste of people,” Daniel said.

“You bet. We weren’t killing for bounties. This was a feud.” Scooter chuckled. “The first engagement, we took out another one of them.  The second time we met up, they got one of us. Finally, we set a trap for them and killed half of Deacon’s crew. They fled north to the Seattle area. Next thing that we heard was that they were taken out by the Seattle Clan. Chopped up into little Jackal burgers and eaten.”

“I guess the Jackals can’t let the death of their leader lay,” Daniel said.

“No. Deacon is going to come for Stan the Man,” Tiny said.

“Yes, one way or another, this feud is going to end tonight, batos.” Scooter laughed, making Daniel wonder how nothing rattled the Hispanic male.

Author Notes I know that there is blue words in there. They won't go away.


Chapter 11
Last Men Standing

By Douglas Goff

Warning: The author has noted that this contains the highest level of violence.
Warning: The author has noted that this contains the highest level of language.

Daniel had trouble falling asleep, but once he did, he went into a deep dream filled slumber. He was having his same repetitive dream about the first night of the overseers’ invasion. Lights, people screaming, then an explosion. Daniel sat up, the remnants of the sleep world releasing his brain, before he realized that the explosion had been real. It was quickly followed by a second off in the distance.

Daniel grabbed his 12-gauge and his overseers’ baton and stood up with the others. The explosions had come from the opposite ends of the mall. Then he saw her standing there. Saber was outside the grocery store’s glass front doors when she opened up with the AR-15. The bullets tore through the glass, bouncing all around Tiny, Hambone, and Scooter who were closer to the doors.

Daniel fired two shotgun blasts through the door as he dove for cover, followed by Hambone and Scooter. They saw that Tiny was laying on the floor, holding his upper thigh, which was bleeding. Finally, the M40 cracked off a round from the roof, which ricocheted of the concrete between Saber’s feet. The woman took off running.

“Help me!” Daniel yelled and ran to Tiny. Only Hambone followed. Scooter stayed behind cover, refusing to help.

Hambone and Daniel managed to drag the heavy man, with great effort, behind another shelf. Daniel heard the M40 sound off again while he removed his belt and strapped it around Tiny’s upper thigh. It barely fit around the overweight man. Next, he grabbed a foot long metal shelving pole from the ground and slid it into the belt and began twisting. The field tourniquet stopped the bleeding, although Tiny had passed out.

They heard a loud bang towards the back of the grocery store. They looked over to where Scooter had been, but he had disappeared. Hambone nodded at Daniel, and grabbing his nickel plated .38 revolver, went to check it out. Daniel decided to go to the front doors and make sure that his hand grenade was still in place.

Another shot cracked off from the sniper rifle. He had better be hitting somebody if he is gonna waste all of my rounds, Daniel thought. Once he reached the door, he could see that his grenade trap was still in place. Crack, another shot from the M40.

Daniel’s eyes caught sight of Saber rushing back towards the front of the store. She had been standing against the wall off to the side of the doors. The dirty blond woman threw a concrete construction block through the double doors, then dove for cover back against the wall. Daniel saw the fragmentation grenade handle pop into the air directly in front of his eyes, just outside of the smashed doors. He dove away from the impending explosion, launching himself as far as he could away from the doors.

The blast caught Daniel midair, thumbling him like a rag doll. For several seconds he didn’t move, his ears were ringing and his head filled with a hazy fog. Smoke was filling the room. He felt a trickle of blood running down his forehead, and several places on his body stung. The he heard another shot from the sniper rifle.

Daniel sat up and looked towards the front doors, which were now wide open. A boot came out of the smoke and kicked him square in the jaw, knocking him onto his back. Saber launched herself into the air, landing on top of him, with a long ten-inch bladed combat knife in her left hand.  Daniel grabbed her wrist with both hands while she brought the knife down.

“I’m going to scalp you pretty boy!” she gritted through clenched teeth.

The tough woman punched Daniel in the face with her right fist, rocking him. Damn she was strong. The punch hurt, but he didn’t let go of her knife hand. Daniel bucked his hips hard to dislodge her, while he twisted her wrist hard with both hands.

The jagged blade went clattering across the supermarket floor, but the scrappy dirty-blond managed to hang onto him tightly with her knees. She landed another right fist onto his face, re-breaking his nose and sending blood droplets flying. Daniel bucked his hips again, but she still hung on

“Are we fucking, or fighting?” she spat out, swinging at his face again. This time, Daniel caught her right hand with his left. Now he had both of her hands.

Saber fell on top of him and bit him hard in the right shoulder, ripping flesh free and causing great pain. When she pulled her head back, he could see that her teeth were stained with his blood. Dat took the opportunity to head butt her as hard as he could, which sent the woman sprawling, finally dislodging her. Crack, the M40 fired again.

Saber rose unsteadily to her feet, while Daniel fought off the dizziness coming from his several wounds. The woman recovered her wicked looking knife from the floor and took a step towards him smiling, while licking his blood from her lips.

“Let’s have a go at that scalping one more time, handsome.” The fierce woman rushed towards him while letting out an animalistic growl.

Daniel caught sight of Tiny crawling towards him with an overseers’ baton in his hand. He must have come to. The big black man slid it across the tile floor the last ten yards. Daniel reached out and grabbed it, and turning to face Saber, he pushed the button.

The green power circle hit the ferocious woman just as she had leapt into the air with the handle of the combat knife clutched in both hands. The knife sank deep into Daniel’s right shoulder, but the woman was gone. She had disappeared with a sizzle. Daniel laid his head back on the floor and finally did pass out.

“Lucky you were asleep while we got that blade out of your shoulder bato, not to mention all of the grenade shrapnel that we had to dig out,” Scooter said when Daniel’s eyes finally fluttered open.

“What happened?” he replied. “Did we win, ‘cause it sure doesn’t feel like it.”

“Well, you broke your nose again, took a knife in one shoulder and have a nasty bite wound in your other shoulder. Plus, you had about ten pieces of shrapnel in your head and ass,” Stan said, from over by the fire, where he was sitting with his shirt off. Hambone was wrapping their leader’s chest and stomach with a gauze roll. A lot of blood was soaking through, yet he had his signature grin on his face. “If you call that winning, then I guess we won.”

“I had to take care of you and Tiny first,” Hambone explained. “You two were the worst. I had to sew up the artery in Tiny’s leg. Not sure if he is going to make it because he lost a lot of blood. When I went back to the rear of the store to check out that noise, Cappy busted me over the head with his M-16. Luckily he had no rounds in it, but he knocked me out cold. Scooter came up behind him and slit his throat.”

“What happened to those Mexican brothers?” Daniel asked.

“They tried to come in through both ends of the mall. Your grenades took them out. Nothing left but bloody pieces.” Stan the Man laughed.

“And Stan got into a knife fight out in the parking lot with Deacon. It was incredible! They were slashing and stabbing back and forth, for several minutes. Finally, Stan the Man gutted him good, and it was over,” Horndog said excitedly.

“I don’t know what your dumbass is so excited about, you didn’t help me at all. You must have used up all of the rounds and never hit Deacon once,” their leader scowled out as Hambone finished wrapping him up. You are worthless with that sniper rifle.”

“Shit boss, I didn’t want to hit you. Besides, there is still one cartridge left,” Horndog whined out his excuse. “Besides, Dat got his ass kicked real good by a woman. She probably had her way with him and diddled him while we were all fighting.”

“What did happen to the woman Dat? I found her AR outside against the wall. She had used up all of the rounds,” Stan the Man asked.

“Yeah, we all know where she left her knife.” Horndog laughed at his own comment, but immediately stopped when Stan gave him a stern look.

“Hambone and Tiny were out cold, so nobody knows what happened in here. Did she escape Daniel? What a f’ing waste of bounties.” Stan shook his head.

“Fucker let her get away!” Horndog pointed at Daniel accusatorily.

Daniel picked up her shirt and pants that were still on the floor beside him and tossed them at Horndog, saying, “I blasted her. We are back on a thirty-day free ride.”

Horndog stared at the clothes, then looked at Daniel saying, “Good thing for you short stick.”

“Listen here you piece of shit idiot.” Daniel was angry now, rising to his feet, ignoring the many aches in his body. “You wasted nearly all of the sniper rifle rounds and hit nobody! And how in the fuck did that broad get up to the front door and unload on us with her AR-15? You fell asleep didn’t you, you little turd? You are the reason Tiny is laying there fighting for his life. He was bleeding out, yet he still managed to save my ass. Yet you sit there running your fat mouth without a wound on your body, while the rest of us are bleeding and busted up. You open that trap again and I swear to fuck that I’m going to shut it with my boot.”

“Dang, bato. I always knew that marines could cuss,” Scooter grinned, proudly displaying his yellow teeth.

“Did you fall asleep up there?” Stan asked, ignoring Scooter, his mild manner slipping away like a morning mist in the rising sun.

“Well, I…um…he...you know?”

“No, I don’t know. You lie to me right now Horndog and I swear that I am going to let Dat gut you here and now,” Stan the Man said, rising to his feet. He was no longer his grinning self. The darker, more dangerous persona had arrived.

“Stan, you know how it is. It was hot, and late, plus I had already sat the first watch and Dat didn’t even sit one,” he whined out more excuses.

“Dat set the grenade traps. You think that might be a bit more stressful than sitting on a rooftop, snoozing? He took out three of them. You are the reason Tiny, Dat, and even I, are so messed up. You can now consider yourself the short stick Horndog. And right now, I am hoping that we don’t find anybody in the next thirty days.” Stan the Man stared at him with his steely dark gaze, almost begging for him to protest.

Horndog wisely refrained from meeting the gang leader’s hard stare, and got to his feet and headed for the doors, mumbling, “So freaking unfair…”

“That idiot is going to get us all killed,” Daniel scowled, sitting back down by the fire with much pain. He was quite glad that he didn’t have to gut Horndog at the moment, because he was pretty sure that he couldn’t even gut a fish in his current condition. He was very pleased when sleep came, taking away his many aches, washing over him like a sweet wave of wonderful unfeeling darkness.

Stan the Man’s crew stayed in the mall grocery store for nearly two weeks, recovering from their wounds. Hambone went on supply runs, bringing back meds and bandages, but still they were getting low on food. Tiny had come around after sleeping for two days. He was walking on a crutch, but it looked like he was going to survive the battle after all.

Hambone revealed to Daniel that he had been an army combat medic in the Gulf War. He had wisely kept it from the others because he had assumed that Stan the Man would have sent him into old man Hudson’s house alone if he knew. Daniel gave the man credit for playing it smarter than he had. He also swore to keep Hambone’s military background a secret, although it was obvious to the others that he had some kind of medical experience.

Horndog kept to himself, and even came back with some canned goods a few times to try and patch up his relationship with Stan.  He seemed anxious to get going, now that he was the short stick. Daniel suspected that Horndog was spending his time hunting for bounties, and just brought the canned goods back as a bonus. Besides, Daniel wasn’t about to eat anything that old. He would stick with the fresh cans that the overseers provided from their bounties.

“When are we gonna roll out?” the southerner finally asked Stan.

“As soon as Tiny and Dat say that they can ride. The rest of us seem good,” Stan the Man answered.

Horndog looked at Daniel with a worried expression, causing the marine to say, “I can ride. It’s up to Tiny now.” He didn’t say this to help out Horndog.

No, he couldn’t stand the man, he just wanted to get farther south into California. He kept telling himself that it was his unrealistic hope that there was still some type of a resistance, operating out of Alcatraz, but he knew that it was something more. He knew why he really wanted to get south, but he couldn’t bring himself to think about it. Not yet.

Tiny looked at Stan and shrugged, “If you guys can help me get on my hog, I can give it a try.”

“Well, then. It looks like we are going to head south tomorrow morning. Hambone managed to find us enough fuel to fill up our bikes. Let’s all pack up our things and get a good sleep tonight.”

Daniel was happy to be leaving Yreka Junction, the place where the Dirty Down and Dead had finished off the Jackals. This time, the enemy biker gang’s demise was not exaggerated. They were gone for good.

Once again, Daniel felt the soothing healing that the open road had to offer. He was glad that Stan the Man was pushing it while they roared at over eighty miles-an-hour down Interstate 5. He looked over at Tiny, who had a big smile on his chubby face, seeming to be enjoying the ride as much as he was. Good. It had taken three of them to help get the huge man on his bike.

They drove through several small towns, once again stopping to search known survivor locations, spending roughly a day in each place. Towns like Montague, Weed, Mount Shasta, Mt. Cloud, Shasta Springs, Dunsmuir, Castle Crag, Castella, Sweetbriar, Pollard Flat, Vollmers, and Delta. They spent two days in the Shasta area, searching campgrounds and cabins, while spending only a half day in some of the smaller towns. Although they were seeing more signs of people, they encountered no one.

The group collected their Saber bounty reward at the first command module that they came to. They packed up most of the supplies, leaving just one crate of food in a Dirty Down and Dead shed in Pollard Flat. Now they were on day twenty-seven and Horndog was showing signs of stress.

The man was acting odd. He was agitated and nervous, wanting to search buildings every waking moment. The morning of day twenty-eight, they gave Delta a quick check and then moved on to Lakehead. They spent the rest of the day searching some structures, boats, and marinas. Still no luck.

That night they set up camp near a lone dock. Twice they thought that they heard boats oaring, causing Horndog to want to go after them, but both times Stan said no. After it was quiet for an hour, they lit a fire.

“Come on man. Dat should be short stick Stan,” Horndog started pleading. “I have been here longer than three of these guys. Make Dat the short stick boss. Everybody knows that is right.”

“You certain about that? Everybody knows?” Stan feigned shock.

“Yes. What is right is right,” Horndog said.

“Well then, gather around ladies. Horny here has made a request. This is serious club business,” Stan hollered.

Once the others gathered around the fire, he continued, “Horndog here has a request. Please repeat your request Horndog.”

“Look, all’s I am saying is that I have been in the gang longer than three of you guys. There is no way that I should be short stick. In the fight against the Jackals, all’s Tiny and Hambone did was get wounded. So, I say that there is no freaking way that I should be short stick. You all know that it should be Dat. He is the newest guy. Fair is fair,” the southerner said in his slow drawl, arguing his point emphatically.

“Well, that is quite the motivated appeal coming from a man who is two days from getting blasted. Do you have any counter point that you would like to make Dat?” Stan was once agin grinning from ear to ear, enjoying the conversation.

“I don’t think so. The crew knows where I stand and what I have done. Why don’t we put it up to a vote. I will trust whatever you fellas decide. I do think that somebody should tell Horndog that ‘all’s’ isn’t a real word.” Daniel smirked. 

“F’ you Princess,” the big southerner shot back.

“Okay then. Any of you other fellas have anything that you feel the need to add?” Stan questioned.

“Yeah, I agree with Daniel,” Hambone spoke up for once. “I don’t think that ‘all’s’ is a real word.”

“People think that ‘ain’t’ isn’t a real word, but I saw it in a dictionary on my phone once, so it actually is a real word.” Tiny smiled, happy to add his two cents.

“You bato’s are dumbasses. ‘All’s’ is a real word as in ‘all’s I am saying’ while ‘ain’t’ ain’t no real word. And you idiots say English is your first language.” Scooter joined in the grammar lesson.

“Well knuckleheads, we can stand around here all night smacking ourselves in the face with our peckers, or we can focus on the issue at hand. As the boss, I agree to put this up to a vote, since this is a very serious request. Whatever the vote is, the loser will abide by it for the next two days. Agreed?” Stan the Man said.

“Agreed.” Horndog smirked, sure that he had this in the bag.

“Sure,” Daniel agreed.

“Well, I just love it when we are sympatico. So, let’s get this thing started, ‘cause my last Frosty Dog is getting warm. The choice for short stick is between Horndog and Dat. I will abstain from voting to make sure that we don’t end up with a tie. So, put your hand up if you think Horndog should be the short stick,” Stan the Man said.

Hambone’s hand immediately shot into the air. Tiny looked at both men, then raised his flabby arm, followed by Scooter. It was unanimous. Horndog would remain the short stick. The big man looked absolutely shocked with his mouth hanging wide open.

“Fuck all you all’s!” he spat out, and stomped away from the fire.

“Just wasn’t cool what he did back at Yreka Junction,” Tiny said what the others were thinking.

Author Notes One of my three favorite chapters in this book!


Chapter 12
Southbound And Down

By Douglas Goff

Warning: The author has noted that this contains the highest level of language.

The following day, the Dirty Down and Dead motorcycle gang mounted up and headed out of Lakehead. While they were crossing the I-5 bridge over Salt Creek, they saw four people in camouflage-colored kayaks, rowing as fast as they could. All four had packs and rifles strapped to the back of their vessels.

Horndog nearly laid his bike down, trying to swing about, which sent the others sliding off the road onto gravel. Horndog shot off the road, racing his hog through the brush towards the kayaks that were now disappearing up a smaller offshoot creek. Once he hit mud and did drop the bike, he jumped up and took off at a sprint, leaving the cycle running.

It took some time for the rest of them to catch up to the southerner, while Tiny stayed behind to watch the bikes, because of his wound. They ran through the trees and reached what a sign identified as Gregory Creek. Horndog stood there with his hands on the back of his head, exasperated because the kayakers were now nowhere to be seen, and there would be no way for them to keep up on foot.

The gang mounted up, a bit sullen, while they rode down to the larger city of Redding. Once here, the group took a break at one of their storage sheds, complete with prisoner pad and command module. A couple hours later, Stan sent them out to search the town.

It didn’t take long for Scooter’s voice to crackle across the walkie-talkies. He was requesting assistance by the water park. Redding had been popular with both tourists and locals, known for its huge water park back in the days before the invasion.  

Once everybody arrived, they saw Scooter aiming his new shotgun, that he had acquired from the Jackals, at a manhole cover. When he saw his compadres, he yelled, “They were in the park. At least ten to twelve people, including some children. The adults were armed. They fled down this drain hole.”

“What the hell are we waiting for,” Horndog scowled. “Let’s get down there.”

“Agreed. Get it open short stick,” Stan the Man ordered.

“I’m not scared,” the big southern man said, and grabbing the metal ring on top of the cover, pulled with all his strength and slid it off.

Immediately four shots rang out from the darkness below, barely missing Horndog who had rapidly thrown himself on the ground. Scooter angled his shotgun over the hole and fired down, sending buckshot below.

“Shit,” Horndog said, looking at the others, realizing that nobody was going to risk jumping into the dark hole.

When he himself moved for the hole, Stan said, “Wait. Go right after.”

The gang leader pulled a fragmentation grenade from his fanny pack and prepared to pull the pin. Daniel couldn’t believe that the son-of-a-bitch was going to drop a grenade down on children. He had to think quickly.

“Stop,” he said, stepping in front of Stan, then explained, “If it’s one room, then that will kill everyone, and Horndog will still be on the hook.  I’ll go down and check it out. Give me a flashlight.”

Scooter handed him a flashlight and Daniel held it over the hole. When nobody shot at him, he took a quick look, or ‘turkey peek’ as they called it in the marines. He didn’t see anybody. It was about ten feet down. After dropping the rubber flashlight in, Daniel slid down the ladder with his hands and feet on the outside edge, a trick that the military used for quick entries.  

Daniel hit hard, feeling the impact in his ankles and knees. He quickly observed that his light shone on a blood trail, which led down the tunnel. Scooter must have hit someone. From the looks of all the blood, it was a bad wound.

“What do you see?” Stan called down.

“It appears to be some type of drainage tunnel from the water park. There is a blood trail. I’m going to follow it a bit. If you don’t hear from me in five minutes, you a-holes better come down after me,” he shouted back up, wishing that he had thought to bring a walkie-talkie.

The tunnel was about seven feet tall and maybe five feet wide. It smelled musty and looked very gloomy in the dull light emitting from his flashlight. There was something more, a smell. The smell of people. The type given off from several people residing in cramped quarters for long periods of time. He found himself doubting his rash decision to rush down here.

Daniel followed the blood further into the tunnel system, and after only a few yards, he came across an elderly man lying in a pool of blood. The man had several buck shot holes all over the left side of his body, with one of the wounds in his leg spurting bright red blood. Daniel would have to move quickly, if he was going to stop the bleeding. He removed his belt and quickly applied one of his field tourniquets.

This caused the old man to groan, but stopped the arterial bleed. Still, the man had lost so much blood that he was going to die. Daniel heard a click to his right. He rapidly turned and shined his flashlight that way, lighting up a group of over twenty people.

A male and a female stood in front of the others aiming pistols at him. The click had been the woman pulling the hammer back on a .38 Special. The man had a Colt .45. The pair looked very afraid, yet determined.

 Some of the people behind them looked sickly, while others were elderly, and a few were young. They were in what appeared to be a large room that the tunnel opened into. Daniel could see mattresses and sleeping bags on the floor behind the people. It appeared to be their living quarters.

“I’m not going to hurt you,” Daniel promised. “But I have to send him away.

“Don’t do it bounty hunter,” the woman, a heavyset-brown-haired lady that looked like she should be teaching a history class, warned him.

Daniel pulled out his overseers’ baton and explained quietly, “He is going to die. When you are blasted with one of these batons, you go to the overseers’ ship, where they make you a slave. It isn’t a great life, but it is way better than death.”

“We will unload these pistols on you,” the brown-haired lady’s voice trembled as she said the words.

“Listen. I am assuming that there is no exit back there or you people would already be gone. I am guessing that you have been living done here for a long time. So, regardless of what goes down now, my companions up there are going to come down here, and I can assure that it is going to turn into a shit show real fast. Also, I can see that your .38 is empty from the front side of the cylinder. I am assuming that his .45 is also out of bullets, or as we both know, I would already be dead. So, let’s make a deal.”

“What kind of deal?” she asked hesitantly.

“I’m going to send this dying man to the overseers, where he will at least have a chance of surviving. Then I am going to walk out of here. You will not leave this tunnel until you hear our motorcycles ride away. You understand?” he finished.

“Why are you doing this?” she inquired.

“Because I am not one of them,” he whispered. “Now what’s it going to be? We are running out of time.”

The school-marmish-looking woman thought for a moment, then said, “Just do it. Save James if you can.”

Daniel aimed his baton at James and pushed the button. With a bright green flash and a fizzle, the older man was gone. Daniel held his finger to his lips to silence the gasps of the onlookers when he heard his crew cheering above.

“Toss me your empty .38,” he demanded, pulling out a handful of rounds that he had taken from one of the dead Jackals. Once he caught the empty gun, he loaded the revolver with six rounds, frightening the people in front of him. He aimed the gun at the ceiling and fired off all six rounds. He wanted his partners to fear coming down there.  

“Quiet,” he shushed the frightened people after their ears stopped ringing. “Remember, stay down here until you hear our bikes leave. Once we are gone, move your home.”

“Who are you?” the woman asked.

“They call me Dat.”

“I’m Barbara. Thank you Dat,” she whispered.

Daniel laid Barbara’s .38 on the ground and placed his remaining eight bullets next to it. He would have handed it to her, but he half-expected that she would still have unloaded it into his back. Then he made his way back to the metal ladder.
            “Dat? Dat? You okay? Alright bro, it’s been five minutes. I’m coming down,” he heard Hambone say.

“Let me throw one of them grenades down there first,” Horndog requested.

“You throw one of those hand grenades in here and I’m going to shove it up your butt,” Daniel answered, then added, “I’m coming up.” When he reached the top of the hole, the bikers helped pull him out.

Once he was up, Scooter said, “We thought you were dead, bato. We heard all those gun shots.”

“And saw the green blast,” Tiny added.

“Yeah, tell me that you got one for me, Dat.” Horndog was hopping from foot to foot with excitement, looking like he was about to piss his pants.

“Pipe down ladies and let the man talk. Just what the hell did happen down there, Dat?” Stan the Man silenced the others.

Dat ran his hand through his hair and thought for a moment, running over his story in his head one more time, before he said, “I followed the blood trail and found a dead man that Scooter had hit with his shotgun. I continued on for a bit farther, and saw the rear of the group as they made their way down the tunnel. They were moving slowly because it was dark, and they had kids. I blasted a man in the rear of their group. Suddenly shots rang out from some side tunnels.”

“Are they heavily armed?” Stan asked.

“I told you they had guns,” Scooter reminded them.

“Yes, several of them were shooting at me. At least three, maybe four. I still can’t believe that those idiots missed me. I guess I got damn lucky. Still, going back down there would be a risky business,” he answered the biker leader.

“Holy crap Dat, you never fail to amaze me. You just bought Horndog, a man who hates your guts, thirty more days. You are becoming the best investment that I have ever made,” Stan the Man praised him with a huge grin on his face. “If the Marine Corps had a few more like you, we could have stood a chance against the overseers.”

 “Stan, let me take somebody down there to capture a few of them for later bounties,” Horndog interrupted.

“I have a better idea. Why don’t we mark this spot, and we will come back the next time that we are in the area. You know, when they are not expecting us and lying in wait to ambush us with all of those weapons in that dark tunnel. Let’s just ask the boss what he thinks. Oh, wait. That’s me. Guess that means that we are going with my plan.” Stan the Man laughed.

The gang leader took out a small bottle of paint and put a white dot on top of the manhole cover, then had them close it. They went back to the shed. After Stan visited the command module, they received their reward. The bikers loaded up as much of the supplies as they could carry, and left a crate behind, locked in their shed.

Stan the Man ordered them to mount up. He didn’t want to risk a counterattack on his drunk crew in the middle of the night. A few minutes later, the gang was back on Interstage 5, rolling south. Daniel let out a long sigh of relief. There was no way that his luck would continue to hold out. If he didn’t handle this biker situation soon, he was going to end up doing something that he would regret.

The gang reached Red Bluff, where they holed up in a gas station store and spent the night, drinking and listening to music. The others had Dat retell his story, congratulating him on his survival. Even Horndog seemed to be going a little easier on him.

They stayed in Red Bluff for a couple of days, searching buildings and houses, not seeing anything of interest. That is until they found a dead elderly woman in one room. It seemed like she had just passed. Horndog became very angry when they couldn’t bounty her and after toppling the bed, began kicking the corpse. Daniel swore quietly to himself that he was going to kill the southerner with his own hands.

Before they rode out, they had a discussion, with Stan saying, “We are at a crossroads. We can either continue down I-5 and pass through several small towns or take Highway 98 to Chico which has always been good hunting for us.”

The gang members began to argue as they were evenly split on which way to go, causing Stan to say, “This ain’t no democracy. Chico it is.”

The ride down 98 was slow going due to road blockages and damage. After moving several burnt out cars and trucks, they continued on. Once they got close to the large Californian city, they started seeing columns of smoke rising into the sky in the distance. To Daniel, the grey and black plums looked like giant tentacles trying to choke out the sun.

Soon they could see that the town had been transformed. Hundreds . . . no thousands of seekers had descended upon the city and were devouring the vast resources that it provided.

There were three overseer units, with about six hover cars each, spread around Chico. It seemed that the overseers were protecting the seekers from any possible threats. It looked like any remnants of a population were now long gone, either captured, killed, or fled.

There was an alien airship, the first that Daniel had seen, firing red power beams at the larger buildings, which caused explosions and brought them down. The alien craft was just a little larger than the enemy hover crafts and oval in shape. It was made of a reflective material and Daniel found it hard to tell which end was the front and which was the back.

“They really are consuming the planet,” Tiny bemoaned.

“What happens when there is nothing left?” Hambone wondered aloud.

“Not under our control, so not our problem. Our only concern is this gang and getting our next thirty days of freedom,” Stan the Man repeated his selfish mantra.

The motorcycle gang stayed on the outskirts of the devastated town for three days, watching the consumption of Chico. The destruction made Daniel sick to his stomach. They had to take a stand against these aliens before everything was gone. Stan kept them there, hoping that some final survivors would try and make a last-minute dash for freedom. When it didn’t happen, the gang continued south.

After racing along for an hour and a half, they passed another column of hover cars heading north. Then they arrived at the former Californian capital. Once again, it struck Daniel that the cities of men were oddly quiet, with the absence mankind.

The bikers rode through the now empty area known as West Sacramento, and crossed over the Sacramento River via the I Street Bridge. Next, the motorcycle gang turned back south on I-5, then cut through some neighborhoods, arriving at the Sacramento Executive Airport, or SAC as it used to be called.

Although there were no longer any airplanes flying in and out, the place was still very active. It was now an armed compound. The compound had three rows of fencing and at least eight visible towers that were at about twenty feet tall. Daniel could see armed men in each tower. Stan led the gang right up to the front gate, where three men were standing. The gang shut down their bikes. 

“State your business,” a man with a badly scarred face demanded. He wore a black hooded sweatshirt and black cargo pants. All three of the gate guards carried swords in sheaths at their waists.

“Shit, Creeper. You know who I am,” Stan said.

“State your business,” the man named Creeper repeated. He had stringy black hair under his hoodie and looked dirty.

“Creeper, if you don’t tell Jilly that Stan the Man is here to discuss business, then I am going to put my boot up your ass.” Stan’s patience grew thin.

“The Dirty down and Dead are always welcome within the fences of the Sacramento Clan. You may enter. Sacramento Clan Leader Jilly is in her private quarters,” Creeper advised.

The gang fired up their bikes and rode past several hangers and out onto the runway area. There were over a dozen corporate-style jets, to include Boeings, Gulfstreams, and Airbuses sitting on the tarmac. About half of them were burnt out shells, while the intact ones appeared to be used for housing. The gang drove right up to a white and grey Airbus ACJ350. Two men with submachine guns stood at the bottom of the stairs.

Once they shut down their rides, the door at the top of the stair ramp popped open. A black-haired beauty with tanned skin stepped out onto the top platform. She wore a silk black nighty and matching robe.

“To what do I owe the honor of this unexpected visit, Stanley,” the sexy woman said.

“Business as usual Jilly,” the biker leader answered.

“Come on up . . . and oh . . . bring that tall cute one with you,” the woman known as Jilly ordered, staring hard at Daniel with her smoky dark eyes.      

“Oh, she likes you Dat. Be careful, boy. This tiger has claws and bites.” Stan grinned his biggest grin.

ride down 98 was slow going due to road blockages and damage. After moving several burnt out cars and trucks, they continued on.

Once they got close to the large Californian city, they started seeing columns of smoke rising into the sky in the distance. To Daniel, the grey and black plums looked like giant tentacles trying to choke out the sun. Soon they could see that the town had been transformed.


Chapter 13
The Sacramento Clan

By Douglas Goff

                         
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
                              Chapter 13 
The Improprieties of the Sacramento Clan
 
Jilly, Stan, and Daniel entered the plane, followed by both of the stairway guards, who positioned themselves in the entryway by the cockpit. This let Daniel know that Jilly knew exactly who Stan the Man was and what he was capable of.

Jilly led them to the passenger compartment, and sat with the two gang members at a table with four chairs. It appeared to be a lounge room, with rich leather seats, a plush couch, and even a small, stocked bar. There was a red curtain covering a doorway that led to the tail end of the plane.

“You know why we are here,” the gang leader began.

“You know my rules bounty hunter. Pleasure before business, and after.” The sexy woman smiled as she stared deep into Daniel’s light blue eyes with her dark smokey gaze. It would be a lie to say that she wasn’t super attractive, but the woman made Daniel uneasy.

Jilly poured them each a glass of dark liquid from an expensive looking glass decanter. Daniel cautiously took a sip, and realized that it was brandy. Expensive brandy at that. He couldn’t help but notice that Jillian was quite curvy in her nearly transparent night clothes.

“It’s been a while since the Dirty Down and Dead have graced me with your presence. Stanley, I couldn’t help but notice that you’ve had to pick up some new members again,” she said, looking Daniel up and down. He was starting to feel like a piece of meat sitting on a plate in front of a starving cat.

“What can I say, it’s a rough business. Did you see what is happening up in Chico?” he asked.

“Same as what they did in San Diego,” she answered, biting her lower lip.

“Yes, but I thought that they had a deal with the overseers,” Stan the Man inquired.

“I wouldn’t call it a deal. Much like my clan, the folks in Chico had a parley. As long as they provided the monthly bounty, they were left alone. Unlike us, they didn’t have clearly defined boundaries and were sloppy. A few months ago, they took out a whole group of seekers. Probably just a misunderstanding, but as we all know, you don’t want to be on the losing end of a misunderstanding with the overseers. Bad for business. The aliens came in force and smashed the people holed up there. Not that there were many left anyways,” the pretty woman explained.

Daniel was understanding the situation better now. The Sacramento Clan was the same as the bounty hunters, only they weren’t mobile. They were collecting bounties as well; except they were paid by not being attacked. He wondered if all of the clans had similar deals. Everyone seemed to be playing very sinister angles to keep their small empires going.

“Speaking of business, do you have a trade?” he asked.

The black-haired beauty took a long pull at her brandy with her full red lips. Daniel also couldn’t help but notice that her nails were meticulously done, as well as her makeup. She set the glass down and slid it on the table between her hands while contemplating.

“Luckily for you, our tribunal just convicted three criminals yesterday. Two thieves and a murderer. He killed one of our working girls. I can’t politically get away with giving you a thief, but I can trade the murderer. What do you have for me Stanley?”

The gang leader reached into his pack and pulled out four of the fragmentation grenades. Daniel noticed that her eyes lit up, although she remained composed. Apparently, grenades were a rare commodity. That made sense since most people seemed to be running out of bullets. Grenades had to be rare, Daniel thought.

“The grenades are of great interest to me, as we haven’t seen these in a bit. Still, bounties are becoming more and more rare. Do you have any more than four?” she questioned.

“No, but I wish we did. It’s hard to find anything of value out there with all of those damn seekers sucking everything away,” Stan the Man lied to her without flinching.

Well then, I guess you are just going to have to sweeten the deal,” Jilly negotiated. “How about you throw in a night with this tall glass of water?”

It hadn’t escaped Daniel’s attention that although the woman was talking to Stan, she hadn’t taken her eyes off him, for more than a second. He found himself wondering how old she was. He guessed about his age, somewhere between thirty and thirty-five.

“That sounds fair,” Stan the Man said, smiling his signature grin.

“Deal, Stanley?” she questioned, holding out her hand.

“Deal,” Stan agreed and shook her hand.

“Do I have a say in this?” Daniel asked.

“No,” they both answered.

Stan stood up, leaving the grenades on the table, and headed for the door. Before he exited, he said, “And Jillian, this time no permanent damage.”

“Oh Stanley, you used to be much more fun. Set your boys up in the usual quarters. I will send over some presents. Oh, and as a bonus, I will warn you that the Jackals were here about a month ago, asking about you,” she said.

“They won’t be back. Your new boy toy here took out most of them himself.” With that comment, he was gone.

“What’s your name?” she asked, pouring them both another drink.

“Dat,” he answered, taking a long sip while watching the woman.

“Not your street name. What’s your real name,” she prodded.

“I’ll tell you mine if you tell me yours,” he smiled.

“Jilly is short for Jillian. Jillian Johnson. My stage name was Jewel. I was a stripper before the invasion. Now I am a clan leader, living on an executive Airbus that would’ve cost nearly four hundred million dollars in the old days. Life is funny that way. Your turn.” She bit her lower lip again. He wasn’t sure if it was a nervous habit, or if she just did it while contemplating, but he liked it.

“I was born Daniel Allen Taylor. Dat for short,” he revealed.

“That’s cute. A Danny huh?” She smiled.

“Only my wife calls me that.” He frowned.

“You are married?” she asked, although he was certain that she wouldn’t care.

“Yes. Was. I am sure that she’s long gone now, along with my two children,” he sighed.

“Okay, this turned dark and gloomy,” she said with a grimace. “Let’s get this train back on track.”

The black-haired beauty stood up and grabbed his hand, pulling Daniel to his feet. She pulled him back towards the red curtain. Once they went through, he no longer had to wonder what was back there. It was her private quarters.

The walls were made of rich mahogany and had several cabinets in them. There was a small bathroom and closet towards the rear. The most noticeable feature was the queen-sized bed in the middle of the room with the mirrors on the ceiling. He also saw a loaded AK-47 resting against a cabinet.

When she pulled him towards the bed he resisted, causing her to release his hand. Jillian turned, imitating a ‘pouty’ face and voice, saying, “Why the pouty sad face. Do you not like what you see, Daniel?”

“Who wouldn’t?” he answered truthfully. “But I like to be asked.”

Jilly dropped all of her clothes onto the floor in a move that only a former stripper could master, revealing that she hadn’t lost her dancer’s body, saying in a very seductive voice, “This is me asking.”

"Damn,” Daniel whispered, thinking that this might be a mistake, but knowing full well that he was going to make it.

Daniel spent the night with her, although they didn’t sleep. She started out very aggressive, biting and scratching him, exerting control. He allowed it for a while, but soon turned the tables on her and dominated the evening. They exited the living quarters exhausted, but equally satisfied. After a breakfast of fruit, nuts, and bread, Stan came to collect him.

“I don’t know if I should apologize or congratulate you Dat.” Stan whistled, admiring the scratches and bite marks on his arms and neck after they had left the plane.

While they walked to the hangar that housed the gang, the lanky black-haired leader continued, “Geez Dat, I can’t thank you enough for making that incredible sacrifice for the team. You are such a giving person. Once again, your selfless act has provided the crew with another bounty,” the biker leader teased him.

“Knock it off, Stanley,” Daniel fired back at his boss.

When they entered the hangar, the other gang members began clapping and whistling. Obviously, Stan the Man had shared the nature of his deal with the rest of the bikers. The loud noise woke up five women that Jilly must have provided for the gang. They looked worn out and used up, having the tired eyes that women in their profession often did. The prostitutes grabbed their clothes and left.

The Dirty Down and Dead spent nine days with the Sacramento Clan, enjoying all of the improprieties that they had to offer. Women, drinks, food, bathhouses, and gambling. Daniel spent almost every night with the clan leader, on her airbus. The food and drinks were the best that the clan had to offer, and he certainly couldn’t complain about the company. He also learned some things.

First, he found out that Jillian was his age, thirty-two. She had been born in Iowa City, Iowa, but like thousands of other starstruck teenagers, she had made her way out to LA with the dream of becoming an actress. Reality set in, and she had ended up working in one of the many strip clubs.

He also found out that she was well aware that their days were numbered. She believed that it was only a matter of time before the overseers moved on her compound. She had escape routes through the sewers and aqueducts set up for her thousand plus residents, once the enemy did come.

“They have devoured San Diego and everything south of there. I have heard that many of the bigger cities east of Denver are also gone. Now Chico. They are closing in from all sides. It is only a matter of time before they want Sacramento, Oakland, and San Francisco,” she had revealed to him in a moment of weakness, letting her calm, controlled, tough exterior wall down for a moment.

Her clan had supplies and weapons stored underground for an extended siege once the attack came. Daniel was surprised when she readily agreed to join him if he somehow managed to get a resistance going. But for now, the Sacramento Clan didn’t rock the boat.

For the last few days, she had started to try and convince Daniel to stay with her and her clan. She said that she would make Stan an offer that he couldn’t refuse for him. It would be dishonest if he didn’t admit that it was a tempting offer. But he was still driven by his desire to get south. Again, it wasn’t Alcatraz that drove him. He wanted, no needed to go to Oceanside. To his old apartment. He needed to know how it had ended for his family.

On the ninth day, Horndog got into an altercation with a man in one of the local dives. The man turned out to be a member of the Sacramento Clan Tribunal. Now he was a member with two black eyes and a missing tooth.

Daniel was actually surprised that it had taken this long for the gang to find trouble. Stan decided that it was time to get out of Sacramento before the tribunal had time to act on the situation. The Dirty Down and Dead were heading out in the morning.

Daniel’s last night with Jilly, she took his hand and warned him, “Don’t trust Stan the Man. He will betray you in a second if it meant saving his own skin.” The words were wasted, because he was already well aware of what the gang leader was capable of. The last night was passionate, and Daniel was honestly sad to leave.

True to her word, a bound and gagged man was delivered to the bikers at the main gate. He had a “friar tuck” hair style, and looked to be in his mid-fifties. Daniel and Horndog loaded him into Scooter’s side car and off they rode on their loud rumbling hogs.

The crew made their way back to Interstate 80 and headed west. A short time later they passed through Davis and continued on to the city of Fairfield. They stopped there because they had a storage shed, command module, and prisoner pad, which they cuffed the murderer to.

Later that night, Daniel asked the group,” What do you all know about Travis Airforce Base?”

“The old air station on the other side of town?” Hambone asked.

“That’s the one,” Daniel answered.

“You thinking about the weapons?” Tiny asked.

“I am sure that there are some good weapons there.” Stan the man joined in the conversation, adding, “We are staying clear of military bases. A bounty crew called ‘Devils Don’t Die’ all got radiation sickness and died, proving their moniker wrong. Their main camp had been on Edwards Airforce Base, and word on the street had been that it was a military weapon leak that killed them. Crews steered way clear of those places after that. There’s no reason to take a risk like that since we have overseers’ batons.”

Daniel never let on that he had been on Travis before. Later that night, they removed the murderer’s gag so that he could eat. After he finished off a can of pairs, he cussed the bikers up and down until they replaced his gag. The bikers pulled an old crate from the shed, that still contained several Frosty Dogs.

They enjoyed an evening of loud music, heavy drinking, and a huge bonfire. Horndog got so drunk that he started burning down houses and then kept trying to climb on top of the murderer and dry hump him, while screaming, “You my boy!”

 Finally, Stan had Hambone and Dat cuff Horndog to the pad, away from the now terrified murderer. After falling asleep, Horndog cut several loud farts and pissed himself. Daniel doubted that the prisoner slept much that night.

They spent several days in Fairfield, spending the daytime checking the nearby towns of Mankas Corner, Rockville, Suisun City, and Vacaville. Again, they found a lot of evidence of recent habitation, but found no actual people. Daniel was now certain that their loud motorcycles gave the hunted survivors time to flee. Now it was the thirtieth day.

First thing in the morning, they ungagged the murderer and asked him if he had any last words, to which he responded, “I’m going to kill you all. Mark my words, I’m going to come back and rip out your filthy hearts and stomp on them with my boot. You all are gonna die, gonna pay for this with---"

Stan the Man blasted him in the middle of his rant, saying, “He is going to a food and sex buffet. I don’t see the need to listen to his raving lunacy.” With that, they earned themselves a resupply and had thirty more days of freedom.

The gang rode to the large town of Vallejo, where they set up in a church. They spent the next week in that town, chasing around a pair of young men that they had spotted on the second day. The men rabbited several times, but after a couple of foot pursuits, they outran the older overweight gang members.

Daniel ran them down the final time, huffing and puffing as he finally cornered them in an alleyway. They stared at him like frightened mice. Daniel merely made a gun with his hand and cocked it with his thumb. He pointed it at them and said, “Bang! Bang!”

The men stared incredulously at him and his simulated finger gun, yet stayed frozen in fear, causing him to say, “This is the part where you run away, before my partners show up and shoot you for real.”

The shocked men fled after that, and weren’t seen again. The motorcycle gang left the town, with a very disappointed Horndog, and took Interstate 80 to the Carquinez Bridge. The northbound side was blown up and laid peeking out of the water like some kind of concrete sea monster, but the southbound side was still passable.

Once they crossed, they spent two days in Crockett. The town creeped Daniel out. Somebody, for unknown reasons, had spent their time setting up manikins all over the town--in buildings, parks, and on the streets, posed in different positions. They found no real people, and he was glad when they left the weird place. Besides, Horndog had kept walking up to the faux people and pretended to hump them.

The biker crew followed I-80 southbound into the city of Hercules. While they were looking for a place to hole up, several shots rang out. Somebody was shooting at them with a sniper rifle. One of the bullets tore through Horndogs engine. His Harley immediately began to spark and smoke, but took him out of the sniper’s range, before it stopped running. They pulled off to discuss the situation.

“What do you think Dat?” Stan the Man asked. “Do you think you could take that sniper out if we went back?”

“Hmmm. He is an experienced sharpshooter. We were moving at a good clip, and still he managed to put a round in one of our bikes. I might have a decent chance if I had more than one round for the M40 rifle.” He shook his head, looking at Horndog.

“Oh, come on man, we are all past that,” the southerner moaned.

“Okay, so you think we should pass him by?” Stan inquired.

“Guess it all depends on what we have coming up,” Daniel answered.

“Well, we are heading for Oakland. Last time we were there, their clan was fat, running at least a thousand people. It was easy pickins’, until a large black fellow named Big Jim took over. He is as big as Tiny, but his weight is all muscle. Might not be so easy to score, but I have a plan,” Stan the Man said.

“Not my fault that my six-pack abs turned into a keg,” Tiny quipped.

“Well, if you have a plan, I say that we skip this sniper. No sense losing anyone this close to so many other bounties,” Daniel suggested. The others had realized, and accepted that Dat had slipped into Stan’s second-in-command position.

“Okay, we will continue on and hole up in Richmond,” Stan agreed.

The gang continued steadily south, with Horndog riding in Scooter’s side car. Once they reached Richmond, they set up camp in the main library. After a dinner of canned plums, they spent the evening burning books in a fire barrel in the main room. When Daniel stepped out to relieve himself, he saw a shadowy figure watching them from the roof of a nearby building.

When he went back inside to tell them, Stan told him that the Oakland Clan sent scouts out this far, and guessed that the man was probably one of those. Still, they set up a rotating watch throughout the night. The rest of the evening was uneventful, and by morning, everyone was well rested.

The gang noticed a dozen or so seekers working down the street. Some were tearing off aluminum siding from a building and throwing it into a brown power circle while others were prying pieces off cars and were tossing their collected objects into gray power circles.

Another was taking the rubber tires and was rolling them into a black power circle. Then Daniel saw one standing at a gas pump, running a gas nozzle. He was pouring a steady stream of fuel into an orange power circle.

When they left the library to check buildings, Daniel saw yet another two seekers collecting clothing and plastics. The cloth items went into a purple power circle, while the plastic items went into a yellow one. The damn things were slowly, but steadily, picking the planet clean. He knew that if the human race were going to survive, then the seekers needed to be taken out.

They spent three more days holed up in the Richmond library, while Stan and Scooter made trips into Oakland, looking for the clan that resided there. It seemed that the Oakland Clan lived in the sewers and underground areas, moving about frequently. When Stan and Scooter failed to find the targeted group, the bikers moved further south into Berkeley, setting up camp at Edwards Stadium.

It looked like it had once been a refugee center, with cots, suitcases, and even a medical center at the far end. The whole scene brought back bad memories for Daniel, reminding him of the night that he had been taken by the overseers. He tried not to think about it too much. Now the place was eerily quiet and empty of people. Once again, they spent three nights at this location.

On the evening of the third day, Stan the Man called them all together, saying, “Okay, we found them. They are in the viaduct tunnels by Mills College, near the old El Campanil tower. Further south than we expected.”

Daniel learned that Stan knew this area well, because he had been born and raised in Oakland. The gang spent another week in the stadium, searching for any possible stragglers, hoping to score an easy bounty.

At day twenty-three, Stan the Man announced that they were going to move to the El Campanil Tower. They parked their bikes a couple of miles away, hiding them in another gas station. Then they walked to the historical site.

Daniel hadn’t been familiar with the old stone clock tower. Once they were there, he saw that it was rectangular and had five stories. It was over seventy feet tall and had ten bells on the top floor, where Stan placed a rotating watch to keep an eye on the nearby manhole covers and a large viaduct tunnel entrance farther away. The next day, Stan the Man laid out his plan.

“I am gonna place Dat on the top floor of this tower with his sniper rifle. It has been some time, but we have traded with this clan in the past, taking troublemakers off their hands. I say that we fly the white flag and maybe send Scooter over to chat with Big Jim. I would go, but during our last encounter, I cut off part of Big Jim’s ear,” Stan explained.

“You sure do know how to make friends,” Dat shook his head, causing Stan the Man to grin.

“Anyways, we will send Scooter over with one of those frag grenades. I have faith that Dat here can drop Big Jim with his one bullet. That’ll be Scooter’s signal to toss his grenade into the biggest group of them. The rest of us will run in and try to blast a couple with our batons. With the grenade explosion and the death of their leader, the rest will most likely flee in panic. We should be able to grab at least a couple of them, and possibly get some wounded ones from the grenade. That should hold us over for quite a while. What do you all think?”

“If you can get Big Jim within a hundred yards, I will drop him,” Daniel assured them.

“I like it, batos. I have been itching to get my hands on one of those firecrackers.” Scooter laughed. “But once I toss it, the rest of you better come in fast.”

“We got you brother,” Tiny reassured him,

“Yes. Tiny, Hambone and I will be hiding nearby in that little shed out front. We will come out right after the explosion. I will keep Horndog back here with Dat, in case things go badly. Then he can cover us while we fall back into the tower,” Stan the Man strategized.

Nobody argued with the plan.

“So, let’s do this. Tomorrow at noon.” Stan the Man seemed pleased.

Daniel had no intention of letting the bikers drop a grenade onto a bunch of survivors. Later that night he pulled Hambone aside. He told the man that if things didn’t go according to plan, he should make his way back to the tower and stay there until they could regroup, intimating that things were not going to go according to plan.


Chapter 14
The Horrors of the Oakland Clan

By Douglas Goff

Warning: The author has noted that this contains the highest level of violence.
Warning: The author has noted that this contains the highest level of language.
Warning: The author has noted that this contains the highest level of sexual content.

Daniel had a rough time sleeping that night. He went over his plan several times in his head. It was risky, but hopefully by the end of the day, he would have the trust of the Oakland Clan.

Then maybe he could unite them with the Sacramento Clan and get something going. Daniel was sure that he could get Jilly onboard if he provided a solid plan. The woman knew that she was on a short clock.

At some point he must have fallen asleep because somebody was shaking him awake. It was Tiny, who said excitedly, “Grab your rifle and get up to the top floor. Big Jim and several members of his clan are walking this way with a white flag. Stan thinks they wanna talk.”

Daniel jumped up, and grabbed his M40, along with a few other items. He climbed up to the fifth floor, just in time to see Scooter approaching a group of armed people, numbering about twelve. They were surrounding a very tall black man with bulging muscles who was missing the top half of his right ear.

The Oakland Clan leader wore a tight dirty white t-shirt and grey dungarees. He was all of three hundred and fifty pounds, bald, and tough looking. Through the scope on the rifle, Daniel noticed that the big man had a wandering left eye.

Once they came together, Daniel couldn’t hear what the two men were saying, but he could see that Scooter and Big Jim were having an animated conversation. Scooter was tightly gripping the fragmentation grenade behind his back, while holding the handle in place. Daniel zeroed in on the man’s head.

The M40 cracked, sending a round deep into his skull, causing Daniel to whisper, “Sorry bato.”

Scooter fell to the ground, dead. The fragmentation grenade rolled from his hand, popping the handle loose, and sending the clan members diving for cover in a panic. The explosion came five seconds later, causing the three bikers in the shed to rush out. Daniel was no longer able to focus on them.

“I knew that you were a turn-coat shithead. Now I have you, ya little traitor bitch!” Horndog scowled out, standing at the top of the stairs. He was pointing the two-shot derringer at Daniel, who rose from the prone position to his knees.

“You stay right there, Dat. Ol’ horny is gonna have his way with you pretty boy. Time you learn what it means to be a princess. This has been a long time coming,” the southerner grinned with anticipation.

Dat looked around for his weapon. His 12-gauge was leaning against the tower wall near Horndog. He had come up here so fast, woken from a dead sleep, that he had forgotten to grab his knife. Then Daniel remembered that he had brought his small detachable pack because the single rifle bullet had been in there.

Daniel unzipped the pouch and reached into it. Horndog was unzipping his trousers at the same time with his left hand, while licking his lips as he often did when he got excited, and was pointing the derringer at Daniel. The perverted southerner moved towards Daniel, nearly stumbling in his excitement, and accidently fired the derringer into the wall beside the kneeling man’s head.

“Don’t worry pretty boy, this thing holds two rounds. I still got another one for you if you decide to get squirrely and don’t give me what I want.” Horndog reached Daniel, who was still down on his knees.

“Is this what you want?” Daniel exclaimed, shoving his hand down the front of Horndog’s pants. When he pulled his hand out, Daniel was holding a grenade pin, and said, “Probably not the happy ending that you were dreaming about!”

The perverted man took two steps backwards, pulling the trigger on the Derringer. The second chamber again failed to fire, just like it had for Carl back in Ashland. Horndog dropped the tiny gun and put both of his hands down his trousers to retrieve the grenade.

It was one of three that Daniel had stolen from Hank’s house. Not the one that he had planted, to give to Stan the Man if he questioned him as Daniel had expected him to. No, these were the three that he had planned to keep. The three that would have completed the grenade case.

Daniel came to his feet and landed a solid kick into the fumbling southerner’s chest. Horndog staggered backwards, hitting the rim of the windowsill. The old stone windows had no glass, and a follow up kick sent Horndog toppling out of the window. About halfway down, the grenade went off, blowing the screaming man into several pieces.

Daniel sighed with relief, and looked down at the bikers. Hambone was running towards the tower, while Tiny just stood there staring up at him. The look on Stan the Man’s face was pure evil. If looks could kill, Dat would have fallen over dead right there. The leader of the Dirty Down and Dead glared at him one last moment, and then disappeared around the backside of the shed.

A couple of gunshots cracked off from down below. Daniel wasn’t sure who was shooting. He grabbed his Thunder Ranch and made his way to the bottom floor. Big Jim and several of the Oakland Clan were cautiously approaching the tower.

Daniel came towards the huge black man, noticing a young cute Hispanic girl on the clan leader’s left and an older haggish looking white woman on his right. Another older black female with cornrow hair was right behind the large man After scanning around for the missing bikers, Daniel walked straight up to the Oakland Clan leader.

“I’m Dat. I was up in the tower. I just saved you from that ambush attack,” he smiled, noting that Big Jim was carrying a .22 rifle. He thought that it was a small caliber weapon for such a large man. It was his last thought.

“Much appreciated,” the big black man said in a deep throaty accented voice, then cracked Daniel on the forehead with the butt of his .22, dropping him to the ground in an unconscious heap.

Daniel struggled to open his eyes, not sure how much time had passed. The intense throbbing in his head felt like a locomotive was running in circles between his ears. He managed to get one eye open, seeing the cute Hispanic woman from earlier peering at him. Then he welcomed the darkness as it returned, knowing that it would devour the pain.

Several hours later, Daniel awoke with a start. He realized that he was sitting and tried to get up. It took him another moment to realize that his hands were chained to something behind him.

He tried to turn and see what he was secured to, but any movement of his head brought on the intense throbbing pain. He knew that he was in a dimly lit room, lighted by a small oil lamp that hung from the ceiling, but couldn’t see much more.

“Here,” a very feminine voice said, pushing a spoon forward with some warm liquid on it. It tasted like pea soup.

“There is some Tylenol dissolved into it. Should help with that headache.” The voice was that of the cute Hispanic woman who continued to spoon feed him.

Necesito usar el bano,” he said in Spanish, hoping that the ruse would work.

“I’m a third generation American. Been here all my life. I don’t speak much Spanish,” she informed him.

“I need to use the bathroom,” he said.

“Yeah, no,” she answered. “You will have to piss yourself or hold it.”

“What are you going to do with me?” he asked.

“We are going to do to you what we do to all bounty hunters. We are going to eat you,” she answered, and after patting him on the head, walked away. Nobody checked on Daniel for the rest of the night, although he could hear some serious arguing coming from down one of the nearby tunnels. The oil lamp in his room burnt out, leaving him in darkness. Soon he fell asleep.

Daniel dreamt that he was lying in bed with Andrea, Adrian, and Alesia. They were all laughing. His wife had the last haircut that he had seen her with. She had cut her long beautiful blond hair, leaving it at shoulder length. He had been upset at first, but now in his dream she looked so cute.

He was holding her and staring into her face, but she started to change. His wife was no longer smiling. Her face slowly froze right in front of him. He looked over at his two kids, who’s faces also slowly froze. Then he was looking down at them, all three lying frozen inside of the overseers’ cylindrical tubes. Daniel awoke screaming.

Standing directly in front of him was Big Jim. With him were the middle-aged black woman with the cornrow styled hair, and the older haggish looking white woman. The hag had frizzy white hair and when she smiled at Daniel, he could see that she had only two teeth left in her entire mouth. He was sure that she would have made a great witch at Halloween back in the day.

“Dreaming about all of the horrible things that you’ve done, bounty hunter?” the huge black man asked, a strong African accent coming through.

“No, I was dreaming about my wife and kids. I think that the overseers have them,” Daniel answered truthfully.

“Yet surprisingly, you have no issue sending other people’s families to them?’ the muscular man inquired.

“It’s not like that,” Dat replied.

“Why did you save us from your friend’s hand grenade?” Big Jim asked.

“They sent my real friends to the overseers, and threatened to do the same to me. I was waiting for a chance to get revenge, and I thought that this was it,” Daniel answered.

“What do they call you?” the clan leader asked.

“Dat,” he relayed.

“And your boss, the one who took half of my ear last year?” The big man continued his interrogation.

“Stan the Man.” Daniel continued with his honesty.  

A skinny light-skinned black man, maybe in his late thirties, came into the room and approached Big Jim, saying with a scared look, “We can’t find the other three.”

A flash of anger crossed Big Jim’s face as he hit the black man with a mighty uppercut that sent him sprawling against the side wall.

“So, you want to be friends?” the black man asked, turning back to Daniel, his anger gone as quickly as it had come.

“Friends don’t usually tie each other up, but yes, that would be a good start,” the captured man answered, looking at the unconscious fellow that Big Jim had laid out.

You killed two of your own group and now we have you, so there should be three more.” Jim thought for a minute, as if making sure that his math was correct, then continued, “We searched the old tower and the campus, but did not locate your friends. Where did you hide your bikes. That will be where they’re heading.”

“We put them in a small school, maybe three miles from here,” Daniel lied, not wanting to get Hambone or Tiny killed.

“We don’t like bounty hunters here,” Big Jim said, staring at Daniel. “Do whatever Olivia tells you to do and things will go better for you.”

With that, the large man turned and left. The two older women dragged the unconscious man from the room. A few minutes later, the young Hispanic woman returned carrying another bowl of soup. She sat the soup down and busied herself re-filling the oil in the ceiling lamp. Dat took the time to study her closer.

He was sure that she couldn’t be much more than twenty-seven or twenty-eight at the most. She had shiny black hair, which she wore in a bun. The petite woman had big brown eyes and had an athletic, almost boyish body. She was wearing military style camouflage cargo pants and a black t-shirt, topping off her outfit with black combat boots.

Daniel couldn’t help but notice that she had an extremely cute face, but knew this wasn’t the time or place to be thinking about such things. Besides, she wasn’t his type. The woman finished with the lamp and came over to him.

“Olivia, I presume?”

“Olivia Reyes.” She smiled. “And I heard that you are called Dat.”

“Yes. It is my initials. Daniel Allen Taylor.” He smiled back, trying to show her that he meant her no harm.

Olivia spoon fed him the soup again, saying, “Sorry. It is still split pea soup. We are running out of food.”

“I’ve had worse,” he advised, but noticed that it did have small chunks of meat in it this time.

“Haven’t we all?” She laughed.

“Look, yesterday I was trying to get loose, but now I really need to pee, and I don’t think that you want me smelling like piss. Can you let me pee? I swear that I won’t try anything. You can bring others in here to guard me,” he pleaded, his bladder now hurting.

“Can’t. The others are all out searching the city for your pals. Besides, Big Jim left strict orders that you are not to be freed. Nobody goes against Big Jim here,” she said, then thinking for a minute, added, “I can help you.”

She got in close to him and with some effort, helped him stand. When he was up, she grabbed a nearby pot and unzipped his pants, reaching inside. She pulled him out and sat it on the pot.

“What the hell are you doing?” he gasped, genuinely embarrassed.

“Are you blushing, Daniel?” She laughed. “No way that a girl’s never handled that thing before. Besides, you got nothing to be ashamed of.”

“Well, can you please stop looking at it? I can’t pee with you watching.” He wasn’t enjoying this at all.

Once Olivia turned away, he nearly filled the pot, causing her to exclaim, “Boy, you really did have to pee! Then she put him back in his pants, and after letting Daniel stretch his legs, helped him back into a sitting position.

“Where exactly am I?’ he asked. “This thing that I am chained to looks like a stripper pole.

“It is. This used to be an underground techno-club back before the war. I must go now. I’ll see you later,” Olivia said, and taking the empty soup bowl and pee-filled pot, left the room.

Later that night, he was awoken by the weight of someone straddling him. He felt hands fumbling with his pants, and realized that it was Olivia wearing a long flannel shirt and nothing else. She smelled like strawberries.          

“Don’t worry, it’s me,” she whispered in his ear, nibbling on it.

“What are you doing?” he asked, thinking that he was supposed to be a prisoner.

“Whatever I want,” she murmured, having freed him.

“You want this?” he asked skeptically.

“If I were to be completely honest, this is Big Jim’s idea,” she mumbled, bouncing up and down on him. “I am actually into girls.”

“Then why are we having sex?” he managed to get out, although now he didn’t want her to stop.

“The clan has had several babies born in the past few years. The last two have had . . . issues. Big Jim thinks that we need fresh DNA. Less inbreeding. Most of us think that is nonsense, that inbreeding would be a generational issue, but nobody goes against Big Jim,” she answered, then added, “Now shut-up and let me concentrate.”

 A few minutes later, it was over and she rested her forehead against his, with a slight smile on her face.

“Do you even want a child?” he inquired.

“To be quite honest with you, having a child during this cluster-fuck actually terrifies me,” she admitted. The word caught Daniel by surprise, as it was one used by marines.

“Not bad for a blushing fellow.” She laughed again, the sound soft and feminine.

“You seem to know your way around a man,” he responded.

“I said that I liked girls Daniel, not that I couldn’t handle a man. Besides. you are one handsome fellow. What the girls back home used to call ‘man-pretty’.”

Daniel chuckled, then said, “Well, I’m glad that you guys aren’t going to eat me after all. You scared the hell out of me yesterday when you said that.”

“Oh, we are still going to eat you,” she informed him. “After you have knocked a few of us up, then they are planning to cook you and serve you for dinner.”

“Wait . . . what? You are cannibals? On no, what was in that soup you feed me? There were chunks of meat in there . . . on no!” he groaned out in a bit of a panic.

“Relax Daniel, we aren’t technically cannibals yet. That was rat meat in the soup,” she revealed.

“Oh, thank goodness!” He had never expected to be so happy about eating rat.

“You’re going to be the clan’s first human, because we’re nearly out of food. Big Jim had heard that the Seattle and Frisco Clans have been surviving that way, so he’s ordered that we are going to try it,” she explained.

“That’s disgusting.” Daniel was revolted.

“Look, most of us aren’t happy about it, but we have children here. We aren’t about to watch them starve. It’s become a matter of survival,” she explained.

“So why the nice routine? Why be so friendly to your future dinner?” he asked, still stunned by her words.

“I was told to have sex with you. If I do have your child, I was hoping to have something nice to tell it. That we got along. Maybe something about you. I know, it’s stupid.” She looked away as if embarrassed.

“Your plan is to say ‘Hey kid, your dad was awesome. We got along real swell, right before I ate him’. Then what?” Daniel mocked, not liking this situation at all.

“Why don’t you stop worrying about it, and just enjoy yourself for now,” she asked, putting her arms around his head and grabbing the pole behind him, kissing him hard on the lips.

The kiss was nice, but he didn’t close his eyes. He was staring at the tattoo that had been revealed when her shirt sleeve slid to her shoulder. It was the ‘eagle, globe and anchor’. The seal of the United States Marine Corps. He broke away from her tight lip lock.

“You were a marine?” he questioned.

Olivia climbed off him and shot back, “No, I wasn’t a marine. I am a marine. I was in Intel, with the 5th Battalion out of Pendleton. I had three years in when the overseers hit us. Me and six other devil dogs held them off for three hours at the battalion armory. We had been at the range that day. Gave those bastards a hell of a fight. Just kept hitting them, but they wouldn’t go down.”

“Did you beat them?” Daniel asked.

“Like I told you, they wouldn’t go down. I unloaded an entire magazine from my M-16, right into the face shield of one of those things. He just kept coming. They finally managed to overrun us. A corporal and I were the only ones to escape. The others got blasted,” she finished.

“So, you eventually ended up here,” he concluded.

“Yeah, my mom and pops lived in Oakland. They were gone by the time I was able to work my way this far north.” Olivia grimaced at the memory. “So, I joined up with the Oakland Clan. Initially there were big plans to resist and fight back, but they all fell apart when the drones came. They can blast you too, so the overseers basically forced us underground and into hiding. We used to shoot the drones down all the time, but now we hardly ever see them anymore. Guess the overseers realize that it is over as well. No sense wasting resources on us.”

“Sounds like you are still loyal to the corps?” he asked, watching her closely.

“I had three years in Daniel. Meritoriously promoted to Private First Class in bootcamp and then again to Lance Corporal a year later. I was going to re-enlist. I would have been a lifer if it weren’t for those stupid aliens. Am I still loyal to the corps? Damn right I am,” she spat out.

“Do---”, he began.

“Shhhh . . . you ask too many questions,” she interrupted him, climbing back on his lap. “Time for round two.”

Author Notes I took a short hiatus to rework the last dozen chapters, and also to revisit a few of the earlier ones. Hopefully, this is a bit cleaner than it was. Back into the saddle!


Chapter 15
Big Jim

By Douglas Goff

Warning: The author has noted that this contains the highest level of violence.
Warning: The author has noted that this contains the highest level of sexual content.

Daniel awoke in a lot of pain. He had over two full days chained to the pole, and all of his muscles were aching. Thankfully, two armed men came in a short while later and unchained him. They let him stretch and walk around the old underground club for a bit.

Daniel was surprised to see that the room was quite a bit larger than he had initially thought. There was one large main exit tunnel, but there were actually four stripper poles, one of which had an old skeleton chained to it. There was a bar along the far wall with a big, cracked mirror behind it. All the booze was long gone. Too bad, he could really use a drink about now.  

On the far-left side of the room were two black curtains hanging over doorways. More exits? He thought about jumping these two men and trying to make a break for it. He decided against the impractical plan, because he was very stiff and sore, and he had no idea where he was. He could be quite deep in the tunnels for all he knew.

While Daniel stood there, Big Jim came in with the same two females in tow. With a scowl, the muscular man said, “We couldn’t find your three friends. You know what we did find?”

“No idea,” Dat answered.

“Two of my people hanging from light posts with their throats slit. There was a note stuck in one’s chest with a butcher knife,” the black man revealed in his heavily accented voice, waving the note in Daniel’s face before handing it to the haggish white woman. “Here, read this to him.”

“Give us the pretty boy and we will leave. If not, I’m not going to leave here until I have decorated the entire city with your clan members’ bodies. It’s signed Stan the Man,” the white-haired woman said in a raspy tone that sounded like it had been dancing with cigarettes for decades.

“Seems like Stan wants to repay you for your betrayal. Lucky for you, I do not take orders from bounty hunter scumbags,” Big Jim stated, then punched Daniel in the stomach.

The blow was so hard that it dropped the smaller man to his knees.

“That was for Harvey,” Jim said, then kicked Daniel in the face, which sent him sprawling and nearly knocked him out. “That one was for Carrie. Each time your friends kill one of mine, I’m going to take it out on you. So, I think that it’s in your best interest to tell me everywhere that you camped since you came into my area.”

The big black man might not know how to read, but damn if he didn’t hit like a bull. Daniel hoped that he would never have to fight Big Jim. He told the man what he wanted to know, certain that his crew wouldn’t stay in the same places now that he had been captured.

Later that night, after being rechained to the pole, Olivia returned. She fed him a bowl of the pea soup and laughed when she told him that there was no meat in it. Once he had finished eating, she began to mess with him, getting him worked up. Daniel hadn’t planned on taking her advice to just enjoy the moment, but suddenly it didn’t seem like a bad plan at all. That was until his eyes caught some movement behind Olivia.

It was the old hag, wearing a nightgown, her white hair catching the lantern light. She smiled down at him, showing her two front teeth.

“No Olivia. What are you doing? She is too old to have children,” Daniel groaned.

“Junett is only forty-five, or so,” Olivia whispered in his ear, then the hag sat on his lap, cackling like an old witch.

Olivia faded into the background while the haggish looking lady had her way with him. Daniel was sure that she was at least sixty. He kept his eyes closed the entire time, but could still smell her. She smelled old, kinda like a mix of bologna and cigarettes. Once it was over, the women left Daniel alone.

He put his head back against the pole and let out a heavy sigh. He couldn’t believe the path that his life had taken since the invasion. First, he was a slave to the overseers. That was followed up by being a prisoner of the bikers, and now he was a sex slave to a bunch of wanna be cannibals. What the hell had happened to his world in such a short time?

For the next two days the clan members left him alone, minus the two hour stretch and restroom breaks. The second night, Olivia came to feed him, wearing her long flannel shirt. The soup was steaming hot, as hot as she could make it, just like he had requested of her earlier that morning.

“It’s too hot to eat now,” she said, and tried to lean in to kiss him.

“Not now. We need to talk,” he said, then requested, “Bring me the soup.”

“It’s going to burn your tongue,” she warned.

“I’m not eating it. Bring it over here and lift my shirt up,” he ordered.

“Damn, I thought that I was kinky, but you take the cake,” Olivia looked at him inquisitively.

“Just lift up my shirt and put the bowl under my arm,” he asked.

Olivia did as she was told, even lowering the bowl when he asked, until the hot steam licked his skin. He saw her curious look turn to surprise when the words and numbers began to appear. She pulled a small penlight from her shirt pocket and used it to read the information, only now the proximity of the hot soup had revealed more words. Daniel could now see USMC and CPL.

“You have a meat tag! Why didn’t you tell me that you are a marine? What the hell Daniel?” the woman looked surprised.

“A marine who outranks you,” he replied.

“So what?” Olivia said. “The corps is gone. There is no command structure left.”

“So, I guess what I am asking you is how loyal you really are to the corps, or was that just tough talk the other night?” He stared hard at her.

“That’s hardly fair Daniel. That world is gone.” She frowned.

“I have the Sacramento Clan on board already. I plan to unite the clans and make a stand,” he revealed.

“Big Jim will never go for that. You would have to challenge him for leadership. It didn’t go too well for the only three men who have tried it,” she said, backing away from him. “Nobody goes against Big Jim anymore.”

“I guess that it’s time for you to decide where your loyalties lie, Devil Dog.” He continued staring her in the eyes, unflinching.

“Nobody goes against Big Jim and lives,” she whispered, shaking her head. The distraught young woman turned and disappeared down the entry tunnel.

Another two days passed, without much activity, and with no Olivia. It seemed that she had abandoned him. The middle-aged black lady, with the cornrows, had started to feed him at night. He found out that her name was Rae and that she was Big Jim’s woman. She spoke very little and seemed to have a displeasing disposition. She smelled of cheap whiskey.

“I hope that you taste as delicious as you look, whiteboy.” He could hear her laughter all the way down the hallway when she left.

The rattling of chains woke him. His chains. Then they were off, falling to the floor around him.

“Lance Corporal Olivia Reyes, reporting for duty,” the young woman said, coming out from behind him. He noticed that she had a dark purple bruise around her left eye.

“Is that my fault?” Daniel questioned.

“A gift from Big Jim, for arguing for your life.” She shrugged.

“Is that what led to your change of heart?” he asked her.

She stared into his eyes for several heartbeats, before answering, “No, he hits everyone. Let’s just say that you have given me something to believe in and I haven’t believed in anything for a very long time. Besides, men aren’t my thing, so how am I supposed to eat one?”

They both burst out laughing, having to quickly control themselves so as not to draw unwanted attention.

“Big Jim is coming in here to kill you tomorrow. Since they failed to find the other bounty hunters, he thinks that it’s time to move the clan. He wants to turn you into food before that happens, so it’s now or never. You’ll need to challenge him the moment that you see him, in front of others. Don’t give him time to kill you.”

“Alright. Wrap the chains back around me. He is less likely to kill me immediately if he thinks that I am chained up,” Daniel said.

“Big Jim is tough. Do you really think that you can take him?” she asked.

“I’m not sure, but I’m going to give it everything that I got.” He shrugged.

“You better. I’m taking a big chance here Corporal Taylor. Don’t let me down,” Olivia whispered and then leaned down and kissed him on the forehead. With that, she was gone.

The following morning, Big Jim wasted no time in making his intentions known. He came to the strip club first thing, carrying two very wicked looking butcher knives, that he kept banging together. As usual, he was followed into the room by Rae and Junett.

“We’re going to be eating good tonight!” Big Jim smiled, seeming excited about his decision to dine on human flesh. “If you stay still, I promise to make it quick. If not, then I will cut as slowly as possible.”

“I have a much better idea,” Dat replied.

“And what idea is that bounty hunter?” Big Jim smirked.

“I challenge you for leadership of the clan,” Daniel stated, tossing off the chains while rising to his feet.

Big Jim let out a long, loud belly laugh, saying, “So you’ve chosen to die much more slowly!”    

“The challenge is made,” Daniel said.

Big Jim stopped laughing and growled out, “Same results. I’m going to beat you to death. Then my people will still eat you. It’s a matter of survival. At noon we will settle this. Two of my people will be just down the hall, armed in case you try to escape.”

“I’m not going anywhere,” Daniel told him. “I came here for your clan.”

“At noon you die,” Big Jim assured him, and left the room with his two female companions.

Olivia came in a short time later and began rubbing Daniel’s shoulders and back, loosening him up for the upcoming fight. They even sparred around a bit, shadow boxing to warm him up. Daniel realized that he really liked the spunky Hispanic woman.

When four armed men showed up to escort him to the place where they would be fighting, Olivia pulled out a small flask and offered it to him. She told him that it would take the edge off and calm him down. After taking a deep swallow, he was surprised to discover that it was fairly decent whiskey. Yeah, if he survived this, the two of them were going to be good friends.

While they walked down a long underground tunnel, one of his escorts whispered to Daniel, “Any chance that you’ll beat Big Jim?”

Dat just looked at the man and shrugged, while a second guard leaned in and said, “I hope you kill that big bastard.”

They came into a large room, lit by several barrel fires and wall lamps. The smoke was creeping up to the ceiling and exiting through several dark grates. In the center of the room was a large boxing ring, complete with corner bumpers and ropes. Daniel couldn’t help but notice that the ring’s mat was covered in old blood stains.

“This used to be an underground fight club,” Olivia told him, then said, “Listen. There are no rules. He’ll fight dirty and will try to kill you fast. He’s very strong, so don’t get wrapped up. There will be no breaks in the fighting unless you both agree.”

“Do you have any real advice?” Daniel gave her a fake smile.

“Yeah, don’t get killed.” She fake smiled back.

There were at least a couple of hundred people sitting around on wooden benches, all of whom launched into a serious of loud boos and hisses when Daniel entered the room. He was led to the boxing ring, where he made his way over the ropes and into the center.

Next came Big Jim. He entered the room from a side tunnel to much cheering and whistling. The huge black man looked bigger wearing just his khaki shorts. He looked like one giant rippling muscle of death. Big Jim climbed into the ring and worked the crowd, flexing his large biceps.

After the display, Rae climbed over the ropes and shouted, “This’ll be a bare-knuckled, everything goes, fight until only one man is still breathing. That man will rule the Oakland Clan!”

This brought the crowd into a frenzy. Big Jim walked over and held his closed left fist out for a fist bump from Daniel, in what appeared to be a good sportsmanship gesture. When Daniel reached in to bump fists, the big man slugged the smaller man in the side of the face with his right fist with a speed that a man that size shouldn’t have. The blow sent Daniel to the mat.

Big Jim followed up with a kick to Daniel’s ribs that sent him rolling to the roped edge. Daniel managed to rise to his feet while the huge man strutted around facing the crowd to enjoy his accolades. Daniel took the opportunity to rush in and punch the huge man in the ribs a couple of times.

Big Jim let out a belly laugh, and grabbing a fist full of his attacker’s hair, delivered a devastating blow to Daniel’s face. Once again, he was sent to the mat, this time with blood running from his freshly broken nose.

“Now you die foolish bounty hunter,” Big Jim laughed out, coming in fast.

Daniel threw an uppercut straight into the black man’s groin, as hard as he could. That must have got Jim’s attention, because he staggered backwards. Daniel jumped up quickly, delivering a hard snap kick to the same region.

Big Jim let out a groan and backed away, requesting, “Brief rest?”

“Yes. Yes,” Dat answered thru bloody lips, his eyes watering badly.

Both men went to opposite corners. Daniel looked over and saw that Big Jim was leaning over with his hands on his knees, trying to recuperate from the repeated ball blasts that Daniel had just delivered. Rae and Junett were tending to the clan leader.

Olivia came over to Daniel’s corner and offered him some water, saying, “Stop using your face to block his punches. You are not going to win that way.”

“Oh, now you think that I am going to win?” Daniel tried to joke through the pain.

“I’ve seen Big Jim fight and kill three men in this ring. None of them got him to request a break, so I think that you’re doing just fine,” she lied, trying to clean the blood from around his nose.

A short time later, the two men met back in the center of the ring. Big Jim threw a haymaker, which Daniel side stepped to his right. The blow missed, followed by another miss when Daniel again stepped to the right. A flood of realization flowed over Daniel when he realized that Big Jim was blind in his wandering left eye. He could use that against the big man.

A blow to Daniel’s chin and another to his stomach shook him from the strategy session that was going on inside of his head. Daniel fell back against the ropes from the punches, and barely dodged the huge man trying to grab him.

The pair exchanged a couple of mid-section punches, with Big Jim’s blows nearly putting Daniel down, while his own strikes barely fazed the black man. Then Big Jim had ahold of him. He had come in fast and grabbed Daniel. The monstrous man let out a loud roar and picked the lighter man up over his head, spinning him about, then he slammed Daniel onto the floor, hard. Daniel was sure that he had heard some of his bones crack.

Once again, the smaller man was able to get back onto his feet while Big Jim played to the crowd. Daniel rushed forward, feeling pain from some possibly broken ribs, and jumped on Big Jim’s back. He punched the hard-to-hold, sweaty man in the back of the head twice, then bit him deep on the shoulder.

“Oh, we aren’t the only ones who are hungry around here!” Big Jim merely let out another mighty belly laugh, and grabbing Daniel by the hair with both hands, ripped him off his back and threw him across the ring like a rag doll.

Daniel knew that he was getting up slower each time. The big guy hadn’t lied when he said that he was going to beat him to death. Daniel slowly approached the man and waited for him to swing.

This time Daniel managed to grab the big left fist as he stepped to the right, and wrenched the large meaty paw open. Daniel grasped Big Jim’s pinky and ring finger and twisted back, breaking both. This brought about cheers from the crowd, only this time they were for Daniel. These people really had a strong hatred for their leader.

Big Jim roared out in pain and anger, counter-punching Daniel in the face three times, dropping the smaller man back to the mat.

Big Jim stood staring at Daniel, breathing heavily and sweating, holding his damaged left hand in his right. “Break?” Daniel asked.

“If you need it,” Big Jim answered, turning to his corner. Daniel crawled over to his own corner and slumped against the ropes.

“How bad are you hurt?” Olivia questioned with a worried look in her eyes, while Daniel watched Rae taping Big Jim’s fingers together on his left hand.  

“Broken nose. Broken ribs. Think I lost a tooth and bit my tongue. Other than that, it’s been a good day,” he said sarcastically.

 “Listen up. You remember hand-to-hand training in bootcamp? The death punch?” she asked.

“You talking about the palm strike? It’s not like we were allowed to practice that on real targets,” he said, shaking his head. “They just showed it to us. I’m not even sure that it would work.”

“It works.” She dismissed him, explaining, “Remember that corporal that I told you about? The one that I had escaped Camp Lejeune with? A few weeks after we escaped, I had to use it on him when tried to rape me. He was much bigger than me, so I tried the palm strike, and I killed him where he stood. Just make sure that you’re in a solid stance before you take your shot. You have to hit straight up, or you’ll just flatten his nose.”

“I don’t know.” Daniel hesitated.

“What other choice do you have?” She shrugged, adding, “He’s killing you. You aren’t going to last much longer.”

“Thanks coach. That’s one motivating speech to get me back into this thing,” Daniel said sarcastically, wincing in pain while he rose to his feet because Big Jim was coming.

Daniel side stepped the first two swings, into Big Jim’s blind side, but the second two sent him bouncing off the ropes. He tried to kick the big man, who only caught his leg and threw him to the ground. Daniel was running out of time and options. Ah, screw it, he thought.

Daniel stood facing the huge man, his feet spread shoulder length apart. He balled up his left hand and placed his right palm against it, flat handed. If this didn’t work, he was going to die right now.

Big Jim stared at Daniel’s stance and cocked his head, saying, “You must be getting desperate if you’re going to try that Bruce Lee crap on me.”

Then Big Jim was coming in fast. Daniel launched his right hand straight forward and up, as hard as he could. His open hand hit right where he was aiming for, striking Big Jim on the underside of his nose with the heel of his palm.

Daniel immediately felt the giant man’s nose break, and something more. The nose cartilage slid straight back, assisted by Daniel’s palm, into the man’s head. Big Jim just stared at Daniel with a blank look on his face. At first, Daniel didn’t think that it had worked, but then the Oakland Clan leader fell straight backwards, dead. His huge body shook the ring when it hit the mat.

Daniel couldn’t believe that the technique actually worked. In theory, the palm strike was supposed to shove the target’s broken nose cartilage into his brain and kill him. In reality, Daniel had never even seen it done before, so hadn’t been sure how feasible it was. Then he heard a scream!

It was Olivia, who had jumped from the ropes onto the back of Rae, sending a six-inch blade into her neck. The black woman had been approaching Daniel from behind with a .38 revolver to finish him off for killing her man. Next came Junett from in front of him, screaming like a lunatic as she charged at him with a butcher’s knife. Daniel dropped her with one punch to the face.

“I am Dat!” he shouted to the crowd, who responded with loud cheers. “As your new clan leader, you need to understand one thing. We are no longer hiding. We are no longer running. We are fighting! The resistance begins now!”

Olivia helped Daniel out of the ring and through the cheering people, while he whispered in her ear, “By ’now’, I meant after I rest up and heal a bit.”

“I thought so, tough guy.” Olivia laughed, happy to be free of Big Jim the tyrant. This man Daniel was making her feel things that she hadn’t felt in a very long time. Hope.

Author Notes This is the third of my favorite three chapters in this book. Lots of action!


Chapter 16
The Resistance Begins

By Douglas Goff

It took a few days for Daniel to get back on his feet again. His nose had been set for the umpteenth time and his ribs still hurt, but it was bearable. Daniel had spent the down time learning about his new clan.

The Oakland Clan numbered 1,822 people, over a hundred of which were children. Another fifty or so were elderly. That meant that he had roughly just under 1,700 who could fight. That is if they had weapons.

The Oakland Clan armory consisted of 312 guns of various types, of which they only had ammunition for half. He recovered his Maverick Thunder Ranch and was happy to discover that they weren’t short on shotgun shells. That was because the armorer, a man named Mason, reloaded empty shotgun casings.

Daniel also commandeered a box of rounds for his M40 sniper rifle because the clan had no M40 of their own, but had a box of the bullets in the armory. In fact, the clan had collected a lot of rounds for guns that they didn’t even own.

Daniel also sought out and found Carmen’s 357 Taurus. One of the clan members had taken it off Scooter after he went down. He wanted the gun for a very specific purpose and he hoped that one day he would get the opportunity to fulfill his goal.

Daniel rounded out his armament by recovering his two remaining fragmentation grenades from Big Jim’s personal stuff. The lack of weapons left most of the clan carrying knives, swords, and a few crossbows.

Food was another shortfall. They were out. Maybe a week left of goods if they rationed. After convincing his people not to cook up a Big Jim stew, the new clan leader let them know that he would feed them all, and well. They just needed to fight. Water was no issue. They had a couple of decent charcoal water filters, so that was no extra worry for him.

Finally, the biker situation. Stan the Man had disappeared, like dust in the wind. One reason that Dat forced himself back on his feet so quickly was because, by his calculations, the Dirty Down and Dead had maybe a day left before the bounty came due.

If his theory was correct and nobody sent a bounty, then the gang probably lost all command module access, and their batons would stop functioning. So, for his idea to work, he had to move now. Olivia advised him that there was a command module located a couple of miles from where they were.

Once Daniel and Olivia arrived, they spent the morning studying the cameras. By noon, he saw Tiny relieving himself outside of an old tattoo parlor off Carson Street. Daniel went with Olivia, and after discovering that Hambone was also there, they convinced both bikers to come out.

Daniel learned that neither Hambone nor Tiny had seen Stan the Man since the shooting had started. Initially, Hambone and Tiny had made their way back to the El Campanil Tower and collected their things. After that they went to the gas station where the bikes were stashed.

Apparently, the pair had beat Stan there because they handed over his side bag to Dat, which contained at least twenty frag grenades. After the gas station, Hambone and Tiny went back to the campus. The two holed up in the Mills College library, but soon they started seeing Oakland Clan members searching for them, so they headed north.

After a few days, the two bikers believed that the rest of the gang were dead, so they decided to move on, and found the tattoo parlor on Carson Street, where they planned to stay until they came up with a survival plan. When asked why they chose the parlor, both grinned and showed new, albeit sloppy, prison level tattoos on their arms. It looked like they had cut and inked themselves.

With the motorcycle gang now defunct, Hambone and Tiny were well aware that they would no longer have the protection and supplies that the bounties offered. Once Dat found them, and gave them some assurances, the two readily agreed to join up with the Oakland Clan.

Now, over eighteen hundred people were packed into the boxing ring room, which was about three hundred over its originally intended capacity. Most in the Oakland Clan had heard about the possible alliance with the heavily armed Sacramento Clan. They were all waiting anxiously to hear what their new leader had to say.

“They call me Dat. I escaped from an overseers’ pod,” he yelled in a strong loud voice. Daniel waited a bit as this statement caused several gasps and some excited murmurs. “All I have heard since my escape is how the fight with the invaders is over. I am here to tell you that it isn’t. It is my intention to unite the remaining clans and launch a counteroffensive. Our enemy has had an easy time of raping and ravaging our planet for far too long!”

This brought a loud eruption of cheers from the crowd of people who had been without any real hope for a very long time. “Everyone who is able to fight, will, but not with each other. The killing and maiming of humans ends here and now. Short of defending yourselves, the killing of people is over with. Turn it on our enemy! Turn it on the overseers! Starting now, we kill them! We kill them all!”

The crowd broke into an uproar, shouting, “Dat! Dat! Dat!” Once his speech ended, Daniel made his way to a side room, where he met with some of the leaders of his new clan. Olivia was present, along with Hambone and Tiny.

There was also the light-skinned black man that Big Jim had punched out the first time that Daniel had met him. His name was Stiffy. Daniel had no interest in learning how the man had earned the name. Stiffy had curly short black hair with a well-trimmed moustache that matched his beard. 

Stiffy had been born and raised in Oakland. He used to work for the sewage department inspecting tunnels, and knew the underground city like the back of his hand. That was the kind of information that Daniel would be needing.

Another male, an older white man called Sterns, was also present. He used to have dark black hair, but it looked like white hair was starting to take over. Sterns wore a welding apron, and Daniel soon learned that he was a jack-of-all-trades concerning anything mechanical. Sterns seemed like he would also be a handy fellow.

“So, all of the fighting back and counterattack stuff was just talk to rile up the clan?” Stiffy asked.

“Depends,” Dat answered.

“On what?” Sterns bit on Daniel’s open-ended response.

“On how hungry the clan is and if they want to eat anytime soon,” their new leader stated firmly.

“What do you mean?” Olivia questioned.

Daniel spread out a map of the greater Oakland area on an old wooden table that was in the room. He had borrowed the map from the armorer Mason earlier, and stated, “You guys have been here longer than me. I am certain that you know where the overseer pods are inside of this city.”

“Off course,” Stiffy said, then added, “There’re at least twenty in Oakland alone, but they are all guarded, so we stay as far away from those places as we can.”

“We don’t have enough people to take on the overseers,” Sterns threw in his opinion.

“Do any of you know what they’re doing inside of those pods?” Daniel asked, ignoring their objections.

His five companions shook their heads no, wondering where their new leader was going with this, and after a short pause he answered, “Well I do, because I lived inside of one for over six years. They keep people inside of those pods. Slaves. And they’re producing food. Food for the slaves, for bounty hunters, and for God only knows what else.”

“So?” Stiffy shrugged.

“So, our clan is starving. I say we take that food for our people, and we free the slaves to expand our forces,” Dat explained.

Stiffy shook his head again, saying, “I said ‘so’ because we have all fought the overseers. It takes a lot of fire power to put them down and more show up within seconds. It is impossible to fight them.”

“I refuse to believe that. Don’t tell me that over the past few years, we haven’t learned anything about our enemy; about how to take them down?” Daniel questioned incredulously.

“I wouldn’t say that.” Olivia smiled at Daniel, then continued, “During my travels here, I was able to escape an overseer because I shot it in that lighted circle in the center of the chest. Just by chance really. It went down. They can die.”

“The little light that usually glows red?” Sterns asked.

  “Yes. It’s only about the size of a golf ball, but if you shoot it, they drop,” she assured the group.

“But remember, more usually come quick with those green circles,” Stiffy warned.

“And how long does it take for reinforcements to arrive?” Dat inquired.

“Twenty seconds, give-or-take a few,” Stiffy answered him.

“He’s right,” Hambone interjected. “I have seen it. They get there quick. Twenty seconds is pretty accurate.”

Daniel had the group mark all of the pod locations that they knew of throughout the city. Within a few minutes, there were now twenty-two black X’s on his map. The beginnings of a plan had formulated in his mind.

“Okay, this is how we fight these things. Hit and run tactics. We go in fast, and get out even faster. We hit, move, hit, move, and keep it up. We need to go in well organized and with a solid plan. I think that will give us a fighting chance,” Daniel strategized aloud.

“You’re the boss. We are behind you, Daniel,” Olivia backed him up.  

“Any ideas on how we can incapacitate twelve people? They’ll be docile at first, and won’t fight, until we try to take ‘em. I think that we’ll have to knock ‘em out,” Daniel speculated.

“Why would they fight us if they’re slaves?” Tiny spoke for the first time since the meeting had started.

“They don’t know that they’re slaves. They’ve been brainwashed. All they can remember is pod life,” Dat explained.

“I can make something,” Hambone volunteered. “A chemical that’ll put them down in about ten seconds. We can put it on a rag and gag them.”

“Perfect. I need it by tonight,” Daniel ordered. Then as an afterthought, added, “Another thing. The seekers are devouring our planet piece by piece. We’ll implement the same policy that you’ve already had with the drones. We drop every one of them that we see. I know that we’re short on ammo, but we do have plenty of .38 rounds. Every attack squad that goes out carries at least one .38 revolver to take out seekers. Understood?” he asked.

They all nodded their agreement.

“Also, Olivia Reyes is now my Second-In-Command. If anyone has any issues with that, then I suggest that you keep them to yourselves.”

The others heeded his advice, and nobody voiced a complaint.

“Okay, so I want forty of our healthiest people ready to go by darkness. Strong people who can climb and jump. Twenty of them need to be heavily armed. The other twenty need to have empty hands,” Daniel ordered. “Assign twelve of the unarmed clan members to carry the people out. The other eight unarmed members are to carry and fill all of the large packs that they can, with as much food as we can get our hands on. Also, make sure that we have plenty of road flares and a ladder that’ll reach eight feet.”

“Got it, boss,” Reyes said, her face showing no reaction to her newly revealed promotion, but her big brown eyes told a different story. They beamed with pride. Daniel was learning to read the pretty Hispanic woman quite well.

Once they had nailed down a solid plan, the strategy session ended with the group heading off to select people for the upcoming raid, and to get a nap in before darkness came. When the sun went down, Olivia came and got Daniel.

The petite woman was armed with a Remington pump action 12-gauge shotgun that looked just a little too big for her. Over her black t-shirt, Olivia wore a bandoliers that crisscrossed her chest.  They held at least forty shotgun shells in little rings. Her outfit was completed with a black ballcap that covered everything but her hair bun, and black military style cargo pants. She was ready for a fight.

She caught Daniel smiling at her outfit, causing the spunky woman to say, “What? If I die, it’s ain’t gonna be from lack of ammunition.”

“No, it certainly ain’t,” he said, teasing her.

His Second-In-Command led him through several tunnels to an area that was unfamiliar to him. In the shadows, a large group of his clan were waiting for him. Two of the unarmed men carried an eight-foot ladder as he requested.

Stiffy, who was carrying a .22 rifle, led the group out at a fast pace. The target site that Daniel had picked was a pod that sat right next to the San Leandro Bay. Not only had he chosen this one because it was one of the closest pods, but he was very curious about what the overseers were doing by the water.

It took the attack team about an hour to cover the three and a half miles of tunnel. They had to exit one spot and drop into a manhole cover to get into another tunnel system near Bancroft Avenue. This tunnel had about a foot of foul-smelling water in it. Finally, the small force reached the exit tunnel that they were looking for.

Once they were there, the group walked about a hundred yards through some gloomy warehouses, and set up in a drainage ditch. They watched the pod area for a half hour, detecting no lights or movement. Then they moved in, and avoiding two green power circles near the white milky pod wall, they set the ladder against it. Daniel climbed up and took the first look inside.

He shuddered at the memories once he saw that it was basically the same setup as his former orchard pod. There were six housing modules, a command module, and a dining module. As normal, the two overseer guards were standing next to the command module door. The only difference was that there was a large building positioned beside the bay, where his apple orchard would have been.

Daniel came down and advised the group that the compound matched what he had drawn out for them earlier. He explained to everyone where they should go. The large work building was conveniently next to the command module. He had two of the men move the ladder to a section of the wall where they would come down in between the two structures.

Slowly, and very quietly, the attack group made their way up the ladder and into the compound. By hanging over the edge, they only had to drop two feet. The last man pulled the ladder up and set it on the inside. He was the only one who didn’t have to drop in.

For the first time in months, Daniel found himself back inside of an overseers’ pod. He made his way to the edge of the command module, and pulling the pin on one of his grenades, tossed it around the corner.  

With the explosion, came the throwing of several lighted flares, and the sound of Olivia’s steady voice, counting, “1…2…3…”

Daniel’s people headed off in various directions, while he stayed with the food recovery team. They headed for the big warehouse, noticing that the grenade had scored a direct hit on the overseers. There was nothing left but smoking body parts. Still, the helmets were intact, although cracked. Daniel really wanted to get a look at the bodies, but he didn’t have time.

“4…5…6…7…8”

Then they were inside of the big building, so Daniel could no longer hear Olivia counting. He was surprised to see that it was a fish cannery, with several stacks of cans ready to go. The back end of the building faced San Leandro Bay and was wide open with no wall. There he observed a wooden dock the length of the building. Nearby, in crates, he could see the tailfins of fish.

“Hurry!” he ordered while his people expediently started shoving cans into their bags with both hands. Daniel, Stiffy, Sterns, and two other men stood nearby with their guns at the ready.

Once they exited back out, Daniel could hear Olivia’s voice again “21…22…”

“Over the wall!” he shouted, wasting his breath because his people were already going over it.

“23…24…25,” she continued, while Daniel grabbed a discarded ladder nearby and tossed it against the wall. Several of his food recovery people had large bluefin tuna in their hands.

“26…27…..” They continued climbing up, some handing fish and unconscious people over the wall, before escaping. About half of his people were back outside the pod now, “28…29.”

At twenty-nine the first green power circle opened and a moment later an overseer fizzed in by the command module. Daniel unloaded both shells from his 12-gauge Thunder Ranch center mass into the overseer from nearly point-blank range. The buckshot pellets shredded the glowing red circle in the black-suited being’s chest, causing his foe to stagger backwards and fall over motionless.

Another overseer appeared in the same green circle, before Daniel had a chance to reload his shotgun, with two more green circles opening nearby. It was about to get real dangerous, real quick. Daniel ran up and slugged the new overseer in the face, immediately breaking his wrist. Luckily it was his left hand since he was holding his shotgun in the right one.

The black suited alien punched him in the face twice, the powerful blows dropping Daniel to his knees, and aimed in on him with his baton. Olivia ran up and put her shotgun right over the lighted circle and fired. The blast sent the overseer toppling backwards to the ground. She helped Daniel up and the two of them hurried over to the ladders.

Red blasts started filling the air as more of the enemy arrived. A skinny woman on the ladder above Daniel took a hit in the back. The red circle enveloped her, and with a fizzle, she turned into black dust which sprinkled all over the clan leader. Daniel managed to grab her pack, but missed the .38 because his hand was broken.  

Then Daniel was over the wall and back outside of the pod. Climbing and jumping sent pain through his ribs and wrist, but at least he was alive. Some of his people were taking a moment to gather up the large tuna that they had dropped, before they had jumped down. Finally, they were all moving rapidly back towards the mouth of the tunnel, having left the ladders behind.

Once the attack team regrouped inside of the tunnel, they found that they were short a man. Another team member advised that when the missing man had jumped off the wall to get outside, he had landed in one of the green boobytrap power circles on the ground. They did a quick count and discovered that they had ten large tuna, as well as nearly a thousand cans of fish.

“Guess we should have warned you not to punch them. They are hard as steel. You aren’t the first one to break a bone trying to punch or kick an overseer,” Olivia Reyes said while gently wrapping his left hand once they were a safe distance underground.

Daniel had lost two people, but had gained twelve, making it a net gain of ten. He hated to think that way, but this was a war of numbers, and he needed every able body that he could get. They had also killed four overseers. As far as he was concerned, this was a hugely successful mission.

Daniel’s people seemed to agree. He could tell by the loud rancorous party that took place once they returned, lasting well into the afternoon. The following evening, everybody relaxed while napping and eating fresh fish. Most of them hadn’t tasted fish in a very long time.  

Everywhere Daniel went, he received loud cheers, handshakes, and slaps on the back. He could have done without the latter because he still had sore ribs. Still, the clan greatly liked their new leader. Oakland Clan Leader Daniel had given them something else that they had not tasted in several years. A victory.


Chapter 17
A Legend Is Born

By Douglas Goff

Warning: The author has noted that this contains the highest level of sexual content.

Over the next week, the Oakland Clan hit two more overseer pods, rescuing ten people. They recovered stacks of canned fruit from one, and fresh pears from the other. The clan lost three members during the first raid and a slave on the second raid. A female was missing in the second pod as well, probably sent away on “vacation.”

As far as the rescued people went, the clan had decided to lock them in some cages for thirty total days. Daniel had advised his people that it was necessary, because when the former slaves detoxed off the overseers’ drink, they would become violent and dangerous. Once he let them know about his horrible experience with the crimes of rape and murder, his people understood.

Olivia had quickly improved upon Daniel’s attack strategy, proving that she was as smart as he had expected her to be. During the raids she had their forces carry as many ladders as they could, and now had everyone carrying a large pack so anyone could grab food, no matter where they were during the attack.

The Oakland Clan had taken out six overseers at the fruit cannery and had moved fast enough at the pear orchard that they had only killed the initial two guards. It had helped that the pears happened to be in baskets already. Daniel’s clan was eating good.

Daniel learned from one of his scouts that over a hundred seekers had arrived in Haywood, a large city to the south, and were dismantling the town. It was an eleven-mile hike, which he sent thirty of his people on to deal with the seekers. Olivia and Stiffy ran the operation and they obliterated the overseers’ army of gatherers.

While all of that action was taking place, Daniel also started sending out small four person squads to eliminate the random seekers in the greater Oakland area. He didn’t have to wonder if they were getting the enemy’s attention. Two days after the Haywood raid, a long column of enemy hover cars rode into Oakland from the west. They set up at the Merritt College campus. Enemy forces were now less than three miles away.

“What’re we going to do, Dat?” Olivia asked at a meeting that Daniel had called to discuss the situation.

“Lay low. That’s what we ought to do,” Stiffy answered for him.

“We can use the tunnels to move away from them,” Sterns offered.

“What’d the scouts report about the enemy?” Daniel asked, not agreeable to any of those options.

“Ten cars, each with one of those big auto blasters on the back. Forty overseers in total, Hambone informed him. “What are you thinkin’ boss?”

“Let’s hit ‘em,” their leader said.

Sterns scratched his whitening head and whistled, “Hit ‘em? This ain’t no pod. There’re forty of them alien bastards.”

“I told you all from the beginning that we were going to take the fight to them. I expected this. Why’d you think that they drive around in those hover cars of theirs, when they can transport anywhere that they want with their power circles? It is a show of force. They’re gauging how serious the threat is and are expecting us to back down,” Daniel explained while rubbing his now casted left hand. Hambone had done a good job plastering it up, although it itched, mostly in places that he couldn’t reach.

“So, you want to smash ‘em right in the mouth and show ‘em that this is our town?” Olivia Reyes asked. “I like it.”

“No safe haven for them in Oakland,” Daniel affirmed.

“Okay. No safe haven,” Stiffy agreed.

“It’s aggressive. Let’s do it. How many men are you thinkin’ we’ll need?” Sterns joined in on the building excitement in the planning room.

“Let’s take a hundred. All heavily armed. We’ll put as many sniper rifles as we have on the nearby rooftops, to take out their auto blasters. We’ll arm ten men with grenades to toss in the vehicles. Let’s teach these aliens that this war was never over,” Daniel pounded his fist on the wooden table in front of him for effect.

“We are certainly going to lose people,” Olivia advised.

“We are fighting a war. Casualties are to be expected. Let’s just do everything in our power to mitigate the number.” Daniel words concluded the meeting.

The large attack party assembled at midnight. The only key command member that stayed behind was the obese Tiny, because the group expected to do a lot of running. Daniel was on the sniper crew, which numbered four. Each had assigned targets. Daniel broke the rest of the attack team down into nine and ten man squads, one to attack each hover car. Olivia had operational control over the ground forces, while Hambone, Stiffy, and Sterns each ran a squad.

By midnight, the four snipers were in place, while the ten ground squads had set up in various buildings along campus drive. Daniel himself was on the rooftop of the two-story Covah College High School, that was located on the campus. He rested his M40 on his casted arm, which worked quite well to steady the weapon.

Once the sun began to rise, the clan leader was able to observe the overseers’ vehicles parked in a semi-circle at the end of the street. It struck him as odd that with the rising sun, he could see that all four occupants of each vehicle were in their positions and looked to be ready to go. He couldn’t help but wonder why the enemy hadn’t been sleeping and if they were aware of the impending attack.

Daniel was about to call off the raid by walkie-talkie, when an explosion broke the early morning silence. One of his men had lit several gas cans and tires on fire at the end of the block, to attract the overseers. The enemy immediately began to drive out, hovering towards the billowing black smoke. Too late now. It looked like the fight was on.

When the hovering column approached, Daniel sighted in on one of the three auto blaster operators that he was supposed to take out. His shot would be the signal for the ambush to begin. He took a deep breath, and as he released it, fired. The round from the M40 flew true, blowing out the overseer’s little round red light. It was an incredible shot at that range.

Within seconds, gunfire sounded from all sides, followed by grenade explosions. Both the front and back cars were blown to pieces and were on fire. Red blaster beams responded to their initial assault, showing that the enemy was playing for keeps. Two of Daniel’s men were hit and turned into black dust.

He couldn’t worry about that while he reloaded the M40 and aimed in on his second gunner and fired. Direct hit! The overseer toppled from the hover car and lay motionless on the pavement. Daniel tensed up when of some of the remaining auto blasters opened up on his advancing troops, while more hover cars exploded. The overseer in the second to last hovercar, his third target, was firing long strings of red blasts.

Daniel rapidly reloaded his bolt action M40 and quickly aimed in again, and fired. His round struck low, failing to eliminate the gunner. Calm down and relax. While Daniel reloaded, the overseer swung about, and launched a long burst on a squad of ten fighters who were advancing towards one of the middle cars. A moment later, all ten were black ash piles.

Daniel stared through the scope, only seeing the enemy gunner’s back. He knew that the overseer was already unleashing on another squad, that it had pinned down behind a concrete wall. Daniel took his best guess as to where the red circle was on the other side, and fired. Down went the overseer, now unmoving!

Then a loud whistle-type alarm sounded, startling the clan leader. Daniel wasn’t sure what it meant, but knew that it wasn’t theirs. Then he saw them. Seekers. A couple hundred of them pouring out of the science center and heading straight for his people. The enemy had set an ambush of their own!

Daniel rushed to the corner of the roof that was closest to the charging seekers and began firing rounds as quickly as he could reload the bolt action rifle. When the other snipers joined in, the seekers started to go down in groups. Still, a large number of the raging bald men reached his forces.

Daniel saw the squad nearest the seekers, led by a young blond woman with a buzz cut, go down in a sea of the rampaging enemy. Several of the seekers bashed the female squad leader over and over with their bars, while even more advanced forward towards more targets.

Olivia and Stiffy lined up their people on each side of the ten burning hover cars and unleashed a blistering wall of fire at the approaching headbanded men. With the help of the snipers, the enemy numbers rapidly shrank. Daniel aimed in on one of the last remaining seekers and gasped in horror!

He recognized the man! It was Number Two from his old apple orchard pod. The big black man looked exactly the same, from his muscular body to his tall stature. Well, not quite exactly the same. He now wore the headband of a seeker and had their milky white eyes. The black man was nearly on top of Stiffy, yet Daniel hesitated to pull the trigger.

Crack! A distant rifle sounded off, dropping the man formerly known as Number Two. One of the other snipers had taken him out. Finally, all of the seekers were down and finished. Stiffy, who was close to Daniel’s building, looked up towards him and gave a thumbs up. Then a red power circle surrounded the black man and with a fizz, he was no more than black dust.

Drones! Nearly thirty of them were swooping in from all directions, firing their red blaster beams at anything that moved. Daniel saw six people turned to ash in as many seconds. Olivia blew a loud airhorn, sounding the retreat. His remaining people began to flee in various directions, with the fast-moving drones giving chase. Many of his fighters didn’t make it.

The snipers tried to cover the disorderly withdraw. Daniel took out a drone that had zeroed in on Olivia, although it took three shots to hit the moving target. A second drone was hesitating over the smoking hover cars as it seemed to be searching for a new target. Daniel dropped it with a single shot. Then the drones targeted the snipers.

One bald Hispanic male held his ground, dropping two of the three drones that came for him. The third blasted him. A second sniper was killed when he ran smack into a drone after he exited the building that he had been positioned on. Daniel didn’t know what happened to the third sniper, he was too busy running.

Red power circles blasted the ground around the clan leader while he fled for the roof access door, diving into the darkened stairwell. A drone followed him in, which immediately lit up with blue and green lights. That was followed by six rapid successive shots from Daniels .357 Taurus. All six bullets tore into the drone at close range, sending it to the ground in a pile of sparks and smoke.

Daniel quickly reloaded his revolver, then made his way down to the bottom floor of the school. He knew that most of the windows on the building had been broken out, so the drones could be anywhere. A quick peek into the room at the bottom of the stairs revealed that it was empty. He made his way to the hallway on the opposite side of the room, just as a drone passed by.

It flew right in front of Daniel’s face, causing him to instinctively swing at it, knocking it to the floor with his arm cast. He followed up by stomping on the flying machine, breaking it into several pieces. When Daniel turned around, he was facing another drone. It could have blasted him, but instead seemed to be filming him. He unloaded his six-shooter into that drone, sending it clattering across the room.

Daniel took a moment to reload his M40 and the Taurus. A quick study, by looking out of the many windows, revealed that he was surrounded. At least six drones remained outside his building, and appeared to be covering the entire high school. He made his way back up to the second floor, where he found a window that gave him a good view of three of the drones. It was in a small bathroom, maybe ten feet by ten feet

“Dat, where are you?” cracked over his walkie-talkie. It was Olivia.

“Still in the school,” he answered.

“Why? Get the hell out of there. The rest of us made it back to the tunnel entrance,” she advised.

“I’m not done here,” he relayed. “Seems they still want to play.”

“Dat, I am going to gather the survivors. We will come for you,” the walkie-talkie sounded.

“No. Hold your position. We have lost too many people already. I’ve got this,” he ordered.

Daniel took aim with the M40 and dropped the closest of the flying menaces. While he reloaded, he watched the other two visible drones approaching. Two shots later, he had another one down, then a red power circle blasted the wall right beside his head. The third drone, and now a fourth were coming straight for his window.

Daniel scurried out of the small room and slammed the door shut behind him. He counted to five, then opened the door a crack and tossed his last grenade into the room. After the loud explosion shook the small bathroom, he went back inside and was surprised to see three smoking and sparking drones scattered about the floor. That left one.

After waiting for over an hour, Daniel quietly made his way back down to the first floor. The building was clear. He let his people know that he was safe and would wait until dark to exit the high school and return to the tunnels. Once the sun fell, he could see no blue and green lights anywhere. Thinking that the last drone had left, Daniel made his move and exited the high school through the front doors.

Immediately he could see the green and blue lights coming from above him. The tricky bastard had been lying in wait above the door. Daniel went for his Taurus, knowing all too well that he would be blasted before he got a shot off.

Crack! The drone slammed against the building wall, and bounced off, falling to ground. A bullet had torn it to pieces, fired from the building across the street. A minute later, his unaccounted-for sniper came out and met up with him. She was a short muscular black woman named Tiana.

“That thing had ya,” she said, grinning.

“Would’ve if it weren’t for you.” He gave her a fist bump.

“I saw our other two snipers go down. Noticed that you never came out. I decided to hold my position and see if I could back you up. After you spoke on the radio, I knew that you might need me,” she explained.

“You sound like ex-military,” he guessed.

“US Army sniper,” she stated proudly.

“I owe you one. You saved my life,” he thanked her.

“Well, you can’t save the world if you’re dead.” Tiana smiled, happy to have helped.

The two of them collected up as many of their fallen comrades’ weapons that they could find, and headed back to the tunnels. Once they were there, Olivia ran up to Daniel and gave him a tight embrace, glad that he had survived. The thirty-two surviving members of the attack force made their way back to the underground camp.

Daniel went to his small room and sat on his bed, without speaking to anyone. He wearily placed his head in his hands. The attack had been a dismal failure. They had lost sixty-eight people. At this rate, he would have the Oakland Clan destroyed in a month.

How hadn’t he seen the trap? The enemy rolled in a squad of overseers right into the middle of the area where they had been hitting pods. Then they just sat there and waited as obvious bait. He had bit, hook line and sinker. He had rushed his forces right in and attacked. Damnit!

He would need to be much smarter in the future if they stood any chance of beating these invaders. Daniel laid back on the bed, not looking forward to the meeting that he had called for, first thing in the morning. He had a very restless sleep.

“My apologies. We got hammered out there yesterday,” he started, then letting out a long sigh added, “Losing Stiffy and all those people are on me.”

“Look, we did lose a lot of good people yesterday, but you yourself said that there will be casualties in war.” Sterns surprisingly came to his defense.

 “I hate to lose anybody, but you guys are drowning in a glass half empty,” Olivia spoke. “We took out forty overseers. Forty!”

“Not to mention about two hundred seekers,” Hambone added, lucky to have survived the mayhem himself.

“Yes, and thirty drones, ten of which you yourself took out Dat,” his cute Hispanic Second-In-Command praised, picking up where Hambone had left off. “So yes, we did lose, but they lost bigger. Let’s just move on from here and continue the fight.”

“I do have some good news,” Tiny interjected. “I got the morse code unit back up and running. You know, the system they set up in the beginning, when we thought that the clans were going to fight.”

“Are we communicating with anyone?” Daniel inquired.

“I sent a test message to several clans to see if anyone answers,” Tiny advised.

“Well?” Daniel was anxious to know who was out there.

“Sacramento Clan responded. Seems someone there is smitten with you. Several questions about how you were and when you were returning.” Tiny smiled, knowing full well who it was. “They also said that word is spreading about the rising resistance activities that occurred over here last week.”

“Dang, word spreads fast, even during the end of the world.” Sterns chuckled.

“Anything from Alcatraz?” Daniel questioned, remembering the resistance propaganda.

“Nothing,” Tiny answered.

“Alcatraz?” Sterns looked surprised, then said, “Wait a minute.”

The man dug through his pack and pulled out a small grey solar AM/FM radio. He turned it to AM and scrolled through the channels, until finally they all heard a voice. “The resistance lives . . . if you want to fight . . . come to Alcatraz . . . the resistance lives . . . if you want to fight…….come to Alcatraz,” the voice crackled over and over again, in a repeating loop.

Seeing that Daniel looked confused, Sterns explained, “That has been playing since the invasion. Over and over. Even in the beginning, and I have been with the Oakland Clan from the start. Alcatraz has never sent so much as a peep over the morse code messenger. Three times a clan leader has tried to send groups over there to check it out. Not one person has ever returned.”

“Alcatraz is a dead end my friend,” Olivia affirmed.

Tiana surprised them by rushing into the room, saying, “Bounty hunters. A complete crew just rolled into Mills College. They have white flags tied to their bikes. Looks like they want to talk.”

“Did you recognize them?” Daniel asked.

“Never seen them before, Dat. Their jackets say Dog Pack and they are wearing rockers showing that they are out of Denver,” she answered.

“Okay Tiana, this is what I need you to do,” Daniel began.

Thirty minutes later, Daniel, Olivia, and Hambone walked out of the main viaduct tunnel and headed towards the six men lounging in front of the El Campanil Tower. When the bounty hunters saw the Oakland Clan members approaching, the bikers all got to their feet. There were six beat up Harleys behind the group, two of which had sidecars.

“What brings you to our city?” Daniel spoke first.

“Business,” an older scraggly looking fellow spoke up, apparently their leader.

Daniel took a quick assessment of the group. Besides the old guy, there was a medium built black man with a long scar down the side of his face, a chubby white guy, and a Hispanic fellow that looked to be more boy than man. The last two Dog Pack members were worn-out looking middle-aged females, one with red hair and one with black. None of the crew had any visible weapons.

“We don’t make those kinds of trades anymore, now that I am in charge,” Daniel answered the man.

“You misunderstand us,” the man replied, reaching into his pocket.

Thirty members of Dat’s clan rose up on the walls of the Campanil Tower, racking shotguns and chambering rounds, while they took aim at the bikers. Tiana stood on the first floor, aiming in with a .44 Magnum pistol in each hand. It was an impressive show of force.

“If a weapon comes out of that pocket, you will all die where you stand,” the tough black woman warned.

“Whoa, whoa . . . you misunderstand. Just smokes. Cigarettes.” The old man smiled, pulling out a pack of Virginia Slims. “We’re looking for the one that they call Dat.”

Daniel was taken aback, because he didn’t know this man. “Why?”

“Word is, Dat is the man who is leading the counterattack against the overseers. I am certain that is you. My name is Petey and this is my crew, the Dog Pack. We want to join up and help you fight,” he said.

“Where did you hear this word?” Daniel inquired, surprised by what he was hearing.

“The ham operator in Sacramento still talks to the one in Denver. Solar powered radio systems are still up and running. We’re on good terms with the Denver Clan, since we agreed not to bounty from them.” Petey hesitated for a minute, as if he wanted to say more, but didn’t.

“What else? What’re you hiding?” Daniel questioned, guessing that there was more to the story.

“Look man, we bountied two days ago. Yesterday, when I went into the command module to collect, the overseers came up on the screen. They showed me a picture of you. Said that you were in Oakland. Offered a triple reward if we bountied you. We put two and two together and assumed that the man in the overseers’ screen was the Dat from the ham radio,” Petey explained.

“So, you’ve come to collect, have you?” Daniel guessed.

“They ain’t collecting nothing, boss.” Tiana smirked, while both Olivia and Hambone stepped in front of Daniel, expecting trouble.

“Stop. Stop.” It was the red-haired woman pushing through her fellow bikers with a burlap sack in her hands, which she dumped onto the ground.

Six overseer batons spilled out onto the grass. A couple of the other bikers cautiously brought over handguns, their chambers locked back to show that they were empty, and laid them next to the batons.

“I have a .22 pistol,” Petey said, slowly pulling it from his back, and holding it with two fingers, laid it on the ground next to the other weapons. “Now we’re unarmed. We surrender.”

“Surrender?” Daniel echoed his word, realizing that this had taken an unexpected turn.

“Look, we’ve had enough. We all discussed it, and we don’t want to live on the clock anymore. Please let us join up with you guys. We’re good. Very good. We’ll fight hard for you,” the redhead spoke for a second time, with the others nodding in agreement.

“I don’t like it. Maybe they’re tricking us, to bounty you later. Those sons of bitch aliens are smart enough to try something like that,” Hambone whispered back to Daniel.

“Please Dat. I knew when the overseers tried to send us after you, that they were scared.  You’re the real deal, and we just want to be part of that. You’re becoming a legend man. Let us join up,” the old man begged.

“What makes you think that we’d want to take you in?” Daniel questioned, knowing full well that he had every intention of taking them in.

“The Sacramento ham operator said that you were a jarhead. I was a marine too,” the stringy-haired old man answered.

“Really? What was the 1st General Order?” Dat tested him with a question that all marines would know.

“To walk my post from flank to flank and take no shit from any rank.” The old man smiled.

“Yep, he’s a marine.” Lance Corporal Reyes chuckled.

‘Take charge of this post and all government property in view’ was the actual correct answer to Daniel’s question. The old man’s answer was a joke that salty marines would often say to each other. The old man had definitely been a marine.

“I wasn’t a glorious one, got busted back down to private several times for conduct unbecoming, but I did get an honorable discharge. Come on man, that’s got to count for somethin’ Dat,” Petey stated. “Don’t leave us out.”

“You said that you didn’t want to live on the clock anymore?” Daniel asked, a plan rapidly forming in his mind.

“No. we’re done man,” the Dog Pack leader answered.

“Well, if you want in, I need you back on that clock one more time.” Daniel smiled wryly at Petey.

“What do you mean?” The old man frowned.

Daniel pulled out a piece of paper from his pocket and handed it to the gang leader. It had the name of fourteen towns on it. It was a list of all of the places that the Dirty Down and Dead had storage sheds. Hambone and Tiny had helped him make it a few days ago, during a supply meeting. Daniel had been trying to figure out how to retrieve the supplies from the sheds. Now he knew.

“You have twenty-eight days of freedom left. No more bounties allowed. I want you to ride to each of the towns on that paper and bust into the sheds there. They’re easy to find. They’re all by a command module and have a concrete pad next to them. Load whatever weapons and supplies you find into your side cars and bring it all back here. Then, and only then, are you in.”       

“Are they guarded? Who owns them?” Petey asked.

“We used to,” Daniel answered, then said, “You better get moving. You are now back on the clock.”

In the evening, Olivia came to his room and sat on Daniel’s bed, “Sterns got a message from the Frisco Clan. They want to meet with you in a couple of days.”

“Where? How?” he questioned, handing her a half-drunk bottle of rum that he had been sipping from.

“The overseers brought down both the Golden Gate Bridge and the

Richmond San Rafael Bridge during the initial invasion,” she revealed, taking a long swallow. “There’s a beach on Almeda Island where we used to meet to trade with them in the past. It’s been a couple of years, but the High Street Bridge is still passable, so we can get across. That’s where they want to meet.”

“Any idea what they want?” Daniel wondered, taking the bottle back for another swig.

“No clue, but I doubt that it’s to surrender.” Olivia laughed, the cute feminine way that he liked so much, while they took turns drinking.

“Well, what do you think?” he questioned.

She liked that he respected, and actually wanted her opinion. “Doubt that it’s to trade since they didn’t message that. Might be important. I think that you should meet with them. Don’t worry, we’ll have your back. You know that you can always count on me.”

“I trust you, Olivia. Completely.” He smiled, staring into her big brown eyes. He liked that she had a strong personality, yet her eyes were always tender.

Olivia finished the bottle, then leaned in and kissed him hard on the mouth, before reluctantly pulling away, saying, “I shouldn’t. You’re the boss.”

Olivia kissed him again, this time longer and more intense, her actions not matching her words. She managed to break away and rise from his bed, the booze making her feel all tingly inside. At least that’s what she told herself. “Besides . . . I . . . like girls.” She seemed a lot less confident about that statement than she had been the first time that she had told him.

“As you wish, Lance Corporal Reyes.” Daniel smiled, enjoying how cute her expressions were when she was confused.

“Ah what the hell,” she gave in with a sigh, “One more time won’t hurt anything.” The cute young woman climbed into his bed and proceeded to give him a much-needed workout for the next couple of hours.


Chapter 18
Dinner With The Frisco Clan

By Douglas Goff

Warning: The author has noted that this contains the highest level of violence.
Warning: The author has noted that this contains the highest level of language.

Daniel ordered two more pods to be hit the next night. Both were farther away, up in the Woodminster area. He was looking for supplies, and got them. Olivia led the first team, which lost only one man, and returned with numerous cans of fruit.

Daniel personally led the second group hitting a pod, that interestingly enough, turned out to be a chicken farm. The clan got into a heavy firefight with the overseers, losing six people, before Daniel managed to drop a grenade on the enemy and ended the fight.

The pod raiders returned with not only bags, but arms full of live birds, and even two crates packed with eggs. It was a huge morale booster for the clan. They had a good old-fashion breakfast for dinner that night. After they ate, his parley crew met up, ready for the upcoming night’s mission. There were ten of them. This included Daniel, Olivia, Hambone, Tiana, and six others.

The group took several tunnels, making a wrong turn at one point, now that they didn’t have Stiffy with them. After backtracking, the team eventually ended up exiting near the High Street Bridge. It was a total of about ten miles to Crown Memorial State Beach, where the meeting was supposed to occur.

It took them nearly three hours to cover the distance, because they were constantly searching for drones, and traveling in the dark was treacherous. One man stepped in a pothole and broke his ankle once they were on the island. Daniel had Hambone take the injured man back to the Oakland Clan, while the rest of them continued to the meeting place.  

Once the small group reached the beach, Olivia and Tiana took two men forward. They scouted around, making sure that this wasn’t another overseer trap. By midnight, the group of eight were waiting patiently on the beach. Then one o’clock came. Then two. Just as Daniel was about to call it off, thinking that they had been stood up, they heard oars.

Two long aluminum boats loaded with people arrived, totaling ten men and two women.  Daniel found himself wondering how hard it must have been to row all the way across the bay. He guessed that it was at least twelve miles.

“You must be the legendary Dat?” A smiling light-skinned black man came forward offering his hand. He had brown curly hair and was smiling. “I’m Stigler. I run the Frisco Clan as of about two months ago.”

“I’m Dat,” Daniel said, shaking the man’s hand, noticing that the Frisco Clan members were all skinny, sickly looking, and wore torn and damaged clothing.

“I apologize for our tardiness, the bay is full of drones tonight,” the Frisco Clan Leader explained.

“No worries. We had some issues of our own,” the Oakland Clan Leader replied.

“We haven’t come to harm you,” Stigler said. “I know that relations have been . . . tense in the past.”

“So, what are you here for?” Daniel asked.

“Several of the clans are still using the old morse code system.  We’ve heard of your efforts over here,” the small black man said.

“So, you want to join up? An alliance?” Daniel inquired.

“Actually, we need help. We’re down to less than a hundred people, and we’re starving. We were hoping that you would be willing to help us,” Stigler requested.

Daniel signaled Tiana, who came forward with a large military style duffel bag and a crate with six chickens, while he said, “This is a friendship offering. The bags are loaded with various canned goods. The chickens are roosters and are for eating. It will go a long way if you make a stew.”

“Oh, thank you brothers,” Stigler answered, signaling for some of his own people to grab the goods. Daniel could see a few of them licking their lips.

“There is plenty more where that came from.”

“What do you mean?” Stigler questioned.

“Are there overseer pods in San Francisco?”

“Not too many in the city, but numerous ones out on the north and south ends,” the man relayed.

“They’re full of food and people. Yours for the taking,” Daniel advised.

“But how? Show us Dat, and we’ll ally ourselves with you,” Stigler offered.

“Okay. Deal,” Daniel agreed. “I will come with you and show you how, for your promise of alliance. But there is one strict rule that you must agree to.”

“What?” Stigler eyed him.

“No more people eating. None. That’s over,” Daniel said.

“You show us how to get food and that won’t need to happen,” Stigler agreed, looking at the ground and then his feet; his gaze shifting anywhere but meeting Daniel’s.  

Dat held a meeting with his people on the beach and ordered Olivia and another man to return to the clan and lie low until he got back in a week. She protested, wanting to accompany him. Once Daniel explained that he needed her in charge, until his return, she agreed.

Before Olivia left, she pulled him in tight and gave him a warm hug, saying, “I’m still not so sure about this, Daniel. Remember that they are cannibals.”

“We’re so thankful to you guys. You really are saving us,” Stigler called out to him, causing Daniel to realize that he was doing the right thing.

“We have to trust people at some point.” Daniel turned his focus back to the cute Hispanic woman. He leaned down and kissed Olivia on the forehead, before releasing her. Dat, Tiana, and his four remaining people got into the boats and left with the Frisco Clan. Olivia and her partner stood on the shore and watched them leave. Her face was covered in worry.

The people in the two boats rowed for several hours, starting out by taking turns. Once Dat was on the oars, he noticed that nobody relieved him. He didn’t mind the workout, thinking that maybe the Frisco Clan members were all in a weakened state due to their lack of food.

When the boaters approached Alcatraz Island, they could see bright lights. Daniel asked about the lights, causing Stigler to say that nobody who went to Alcatraz ever came back. Several of the men in the boat kept repeating “Bad people. Bad people.”

Later, the boaters saw the lights of a couple of drones, but luckily, they remained far off. The group arrived safely at a long dock where Stigler directed Daniel to moor up. After tying up the two boats, the group walked into an open area. There was a burn barrel lit the center of it, casting off just enough light to give the scene an eerie surreal look, but failing to penetrate the surrounding dark shadows.

A second later, they were surrounded by at least fifty-armed people, aiming their guns in the faces of the Oakland Clan members The armed people were led by a young man with curly hair and a small moustache. He could have been Stigler’s twin, if he weren’t white and red-headed.

A few men came up and took the weapons from Daniel and his people. Tiana gave him an “oh shit, should we fight” look, but her leader shook his head no. There were way too many of them.

“Looks like it went well, babe,” the red-haired man said to Stigler.

“You know it, Ronnie. I brought fresh meat, as well as chickens and a lot of can goods.” Stigler replied, placing a long kiss on the man’s lips.

“Oh great, gay cannibals,” Daniel said, shaking his head.

“Shup up you toxic alpha male,” Stigler answered and signaled his people, who responded by pushing six prisoner onto their knees.

“Oh Stiggy, you told that big lummox what’s what!” the man named Ronnie giggled, slapping Stigler on the butt.

Daniel heard a gurgling down at the end and realized that the Frisco Clan members were slicing the throat of the far man. Then the second and third. Daniel tensed up, preparing to fight. He would make a play when they got to Tiana, who was right beside him. He would at least go down fighting. Then the fourth, a female, fell over drowning in her own blood.

"Not those two,” Ronnie ordered. “That tall piece of oaf is worth a lot to the overseers, and maybe they’ll give us extra for one of his lieutenants.”

“Chop those four meat bags up and have them ready for supper by tomorrow night. Grab the food they gave us and let’s move out,” Stigler ordered as he and Ronnie approached Daniel and Tiana, cracking them over the head with the butts of their rifles.

Daniel woke up on a hard floor. It was dark, and after feeling around he felt a body beside him, which let out a moan. It was Tiana, who was still unconscious. They were handcuffed, but foolishly they had been cuffed in the front, giving them more mobility.

Daniel managed to shake Tiana awake. While she came to, he crawled around in the dark, realizing that they were in a small closet. When he found the door, he discovered, unsurprisingly, that it was locked.

“Oh man, they slit our people’s throats,” Tiana groaned out. “We’re so screwed.”

“Keep your wits together. We have to wait for an opportunity,” Daniel whispered back.

“I don’t want ta’ be a people sandwich,” she cried.

“I don’t think that’s in the cards. They said that they’re going to turn us over to the overseers for a reward.”

“Shit,” she answered. “We’re gonna have to make a play. I say we jump whoever comes through that door.”

When the door did finally open, about a day later, Daniel and Tiana were sleeping. Both were dragged out of the closet by their hair and taken down a long hallway. After a painful stretch of distance, they reached a large open room, where several fires were burning in fire rings.

The smoke wafted to the ceiling, and flowed out of several windows. There had to be at least a hundred people standing around the fires eating. Stigler and Ronnie were two of the people at the biggest fire.

“Wanna say goodbye to your friends?” Stigler asked, holding out a piece of meat to Daniel. “Can you believe that he demanded that we stop eating people?”

The comment caused Ronnie to giggle, then the redhead said, “As if. Do you have any idea where you’re at, Dat?”

“San Francisco,” the captured man quipped.

“Don’t smart aleck me, boy toy,” Ronnie hissed, and smacked Daniel across the face.

“God, you hit like such a sissy.” Stigler laughed, then punched Daniel in the gut.

It was a solid hit, and catching him by surprise, doubled Daniel over.

“Do you need another slug to understand that I want you to sit?” Stigler asked, causing Daniel to go down on his butt, before he addressed Tiana, “And what about you bitch?”

Once they were both sitting down, Stigler said, “I believe that my man asked you if you knew where you are?”

“No idea,” Daniel stated truthfully.

“This is the Transamerica Pyramid Center. Forty-eight floors of Frisco Clan fabuloso!” Stigler revealed.

“Ta da!” Ronnie threw his hands into the air, palms up and wide open, to signify the splendor.

How in the hell did these two idiots take over this clan, Daniel wondered.

When neither of the two captives spoke, Stigler continued, “I might have lied a teensy bit about our clan. We’re much stronger that I let on.”

“That’s why we invented the ruse to capture you. The overlords offered us a year of free meat if we gave you to them. Seems they want the fantastic Dat!” Ronnie explained.

“You were so dumb to fall for our little trick!” Stigler giggled.

“The cute ones are always dumb, Stiggy.” Ronnie giggled back.

“The food you gave us was just a bonie,” Stigler stated.

“A bonie?” Dat asked.

“A bonus silly.” Stigler and Ronnie frowned at him.

When Daniel shook his head, Ronnie said, “Oh my, I feel like we are getting off on the wrong foot. You really don’t like gay cannibals do you, Dat?”

“I have no issue with the gay part. I could care less where you put your pecker. It’s the cannibal part that disgusts the crap out of me,” Daniel answered, truthfully.

“We told you that we weren’t going to eat you,” Stigler replied.

“Not unless you ask us much more nicely. Ooogah!” Ronnie interjected causing the two gay men to laugh out loud and high five each other. “Although your clan thinks that we already did eat you.”

“Yeah, they think . . . wait, what?” Stigler looked at Ronnie. “What’d you do?”

”I really couldn’t help myself, Stiggy.” The redhead shrugged.

“What did you do Ronnie?” Stiggy didn’t seem very happy now.  

“His people morse coded to check up on their leader and to see how he was doing. I coded back that he was great. Especially on bread with mustard and ketchup. I finished with ‘Thanks, let’s do lunch sometime,” Ronnie had to put his hand over his mouth to keep from bursting out in laughter.

“Oh my golly, that is funny isn’t it?” Stigler was now biting his lower lip to keep from laughing. “Funny, but stupid. What if his clan comes?”

“Who cares if they do? San Francisco is big. They’ll never find us in time to save the Datster here.” Ronnie’s words soothed his nervous boyfriend.

“Well, anyways, we aren’t going to eat you. I can’t promise that the overseers won’t gobble you up. Who knows what they do with the people that they take.” Stigler smiled at him.

“That’s right. You’re working for the overseers,” Daniel accused.

“Don’t be so naïve Dat. We’re working for ourselves. If that means giving the overseers what they ask for every once in a while, so that they leave us alone in our little fabulous palace, then so be it,” the black man scoffed.

“Small price to pay for peace, Datster.” Ronnie rolled his eyes.

“I’m so excited!” Stigler stuck his tongue in and out of his mouth several times at Daniel in a perverted fashion. “They’re going to give us fresh people meat for a whole year just for you, handsome.

“Oh, I’m so jealous,” Ronnie informed them and began sticking his tongue in out of his mouth in the same fashion that his boyfriend was doing, both staring at Dat.

“Oh babe, you got a little something in your teeth there.” Stigler pointed at Ronnie’s mouth.

“I do? Where is it?” Ronnie started picking at his teeth.

“Never mind, I think it was just a little piece of the Oakland Clan!” Stigler joked, causing both men to high five again.

“How did you become the leader of this clan?” Daniel asked Stigler, ignoring their crude vulgarity.

“Co-leader.” Ronnie corrected him, with the two cannibals becoming serious again.

“My daddy was the previous leader. He didn’t approve of Ronnie,” Stigler explained.

“Frightful man, really frightful.” Ronnie gave an exaggerated frown.

“Yes, so one night we chopped him up in his sleep, and ate him the next evening.” Stigler laughed.

“Ta da!” Ronnie threw his arms in the air again, striking a dance pose.

Several lights towards the front of the building interrupted their conversation. A commotion ensued, and then several people came over and whispered something to Stigler, causing him to exclaim, “Well alrighty then. It looks like your ride is here.”

Ronnie turned his back on Daniel to see what the activity at the front of the building was. It was the moment that Daniel had been waiting for. In a flash, he was up and had his cuffed hands over Ronnie’s head and around his neck. He held the small man tightly in place.

“Oh Dat, stop being so rude. I have a hundred people in this room alone. If you kill him, you will be dead before you reach the doors,” Stigler said whimsically, but Daniel could see fear in the man’s eyes.

“I may be dead, but you will be single,” Daniel laughed out, knowing that he was in control now.

“You couldn’t possibly kill him before we get to you,” the black clan leader said, pulling out a .38 pistol, while others from the Frisco Clan were closing in from behind Daniel.

“Oh, ya think so?” Tiana joined in, rising to her feet. “Wanna know how Dat here became the leader of the Oakland Clan?”

“Go ahead and tell them,” Daniel said.

“He killed Big Jim with one punch.” Tiana said, whistling sharply for affect, while Daniel picked Ronnie up off the floor by the chain around his neck, causing the small man to kick at the air frantically.

“Okay, okay, okay. Point taken, Daniel. Don’t hurt my baby,” Stigler pouted. “What do you want?”

“We are going to---” Daniel was interrupted by all hell breaking loose.

Explosions rocked the front door area. One, two, then three. They came one right after another. A couple of red blaster flashes could be seen, leading Daniel to believe that the overseers were attacking.

 Glass shattered and people screamed. Then gun fire erupted from all around the building, blowing through several windows and taking down most of the Frisco Clan members in the front of the room.

Daniel snapped Ronnie’s neck with a fierce twist, causing Stigler to unload his revolver at him. Five of the rounds hit Ronnie’s dead body, while the sixth struck Daniel in the left shoulder, knocking him down. Tiana leapt on the light-skinned black man and began pounding him in the face with her cuffed hands locked together. She beat Stiggler over and over again, until he was dead.

 A massive firefight took place in the center of the first floor, with the Frisco Clan members quickly falling. The people that had been coming up behind Daniel had faded into the shadows. Oddly, no reinforcements came from the other floors. Then Daniel and Tiana were surrounded by shadowy figures. A second later, the wounded Daniel could see Olivia’s face in the firelight. When Daniel got up, she ran over and gave him a big hug.

Sterns also came over and happily slapped Daniel on the back, bringing a panful groan from his lips. Hambone rushed over and began tending to his leader’s shoulder.  

“Oh, thank God you are alive! We didn’t know if they had really eaten you,” Olivia exclaimed in relief, while a small tear of joy ran down her cheek as she carefully helped Daniel over to a nearby bench. Every time she turned around, Daniel seemed to find a new way to lose blood. 

Author Notes If this chapter makes you hungry . . .seek professional help.


Chapter 19
Home Sweet Home

By Douglas Goff

“How did you guys find us?” Daniel asked, after Hambone had painfully removed the bullet from his shoulder and bandaged him.  

“Well, after we got a crazy morse code message from the Frisco Clan, we went down to the shore and commandeered us some boats.” Sterns scratched his head. “Once we were on this side, your girlfriend . . . er . . . whatever she is, put scouts in the tallest buildings. Didn’t take long to spot the overseers’ column moving this way.”

“We took out the overseers with some of your grenades. Then we shot it out with these Frisco fools. Olivia smiled at him.

The large force of Oakland Clan members cleared the remainder of the Transamerica Pyramid Center and found just under a thousand people locked in various rooms. It seemed that not everybody agreed with Stigler and Ronnie, and those who didn’t found themselves locked up and on the menu. The gay pair and their followers had been eating their own clan members for some time.

The rescue team stayed in Frisco for only one more day, leaving Tiana behind to teach the Frisco Clan members how to take out pods and get food. She was now in charge with twenty well-armed Oakland Clan members to back her orders. Tiana’s first order of business was to move the clan underground, and out of the overseers’ reach.

Once Daniel and his group were back on the Oakland side of the bay, they were greeted with a surprise. Several horsemen had arrived, requesting to join up. They were the survivalists from Hilt.

“Room for a few more?” The survivalists were led by a man named Kenneth Zumbolt.

“We’d be happy to have you.” Daniel shook Kenneth’s hand, happy that they were very well-armed. Kenneth Zumbolt was a bald and muscular white man with a pencil thin moustache. Kenneth seemed competent.

Another group had also arrived, this one also in search of Dat. It was Barbara’s group from the waterpark. The bookish looking portly woman gave Daniel a big hug, saying, “Do you remember us? We were living In the tunnel in the water park? You gave me bullets for my pistol.”

“Of course,” Daniel answered. How could he forget. If she had any bullets at the time, the woman would have killed him.

“You really saved us! My people were on the brink of starvation when you found us. I hid on one of the old waterslides and managed to score two deer with my .38. Thanks to you, we had meat!” Barbara thanked him.

“Outstanding!” Daniel had been astonished that she had managed to kill two deer with such a small caliber weapon and certainly looked at the woman with a newfound respect.

“We traded meat for medicine with a family that was holed up nearby. They had one of those solar operated ham radios,” she explained. “We learned that a Commander Dat was leading a resistance back in Oakland, so we packed up and came. We want to join up.”

“You are more than welcome here.” Daniel was pleased to have them.

Later that night Daniel had an intense dream. Andrea was standing in a misty fog, waving at him to come. She kept saying, over and over again, “Find us.”

Daniel startled awake, realizing that someone was in his bed. That someone smelled of strawberries, although he hadn’t seen one in years, and was snuggled deep into the crook of his arm. Olivia peered at him with a sleepy grin, “I missed you. That’s all.”

“I have ta’ go,” he said.

“Go where?” she yawned.

“Home. To Oceanside. I have to know what happened to my wife and kids.”

“That’s about four hundred-and fifty-miles Dat. How’re ya’ gonna do that?” she asked, looking worried now.

“I can take a horse.”

“Are you kidding? That’s not safe. I know Hambone got the bullet out, but maybe you have a fever. Besides, what if there’re no answers there?” she asked. “Not to mention that you just got this whole resistance thing going. It’ll fall apart without you.”

“If there’s any chance that I can get some answers, then I must try. I’ll stay for another month, firming up the resistance, but then I’m going,” he stated.

“Then I’m going with you,” she advised.

“No, I need you here. Running things in my absence.”

Olivia leaned over and kissed him on the chin, saying, “I think this is a bad idea.”

                                                                   *     *     *

The following month, the growing clan hit several pods. Many of the first people that they had rescued were now off emotional quarantine and were helping them fight. Casualties were light, and things were going very well.

The Dog Pack bounty hunter crew returned towards the end of the month. The bikers were loaded with weapons, food, cigarettes, and beer. They had stolen all of the goods from Stan the Man’s sheds, just as Daniel had ordered. Then Jilly arrived with an entourage from the Sacramento Clan. They had come to trade weapons for food.

The beautiful woman was wearing a black blouse and a tight black mini skirt, with knee high black boots. Daniel couldn’t even hazard a guess as to how she had travelled on horseback like that, but he was glad that she had. She was looking good.

A large party ensued in the underground club, where Daniel had been held captive, that went late into the night. Daniel expected trouble between Olivia and Jilly, since he had been sleeping with both women, and each had some level of undefined interest in him.

It seemed tense between the two at first, but once Stan the Man’s liberated beer started to flow, the two girls started getting along like two long lost friends. Jilly and Olivia began dancing very seductively on one of the stripper poles for him, staring at him in a way that sent shivers down his spine.

After giving Olivia a few stripper pole pointers, Jilly came over and sat on Daniel’s lap. The woman was driving him nuts, wiggling in all the right ways. The beer continued to flow, and after he got drunk, Daniel lost track of both women.

When Daniel made it back to his quarters, he found the two of them sitting on his bed, locked in a passionate kiss. He started to back out of the room, but both women jumped up and grabbed him by his hands.

“Oh no you don’t,” Jillian smiled.

“Wwwe wwwere waiting for yyyou.” Olivia giggled, badly slurring her words.

The two women pulled him back into the room, and one of them drew the curtain closed. How was it possible to be getting more post-apocalyptic action than he had ever even dreamed of back in his single days?

Five hours later, Daniel left the two spent and sleeping women. He penned a note for Olivia, telling her that he had left for home and she was in charge. After placing a soft kiss on each of the women’s foreheads, he grabbed his pack. His gunshot wound had healed up nicely, so it was time to go.

Hambone met him near the entrance to the tunnels. with a sturdy horse named Sparky. Daniel figured that if he could stay on the roads, he could do over fifty miles a day, even at night. It should take him about nine or ten days to reach Oceanside.

“He was a quarter horse. Strongest mount that we have. Still, take a day and rest him about halfway,” Hambone advised. “He’ll get you there and back.”

“Thanks.” Daniel took the reins.

“You sure you don’t want some company?” the red-haired man questioned. ”You only need ask.”

“Nah. This is my journey. I have to do this one alone,” Daniel said.

“Well, you just make sure that you come back to us. If you’re not back in twenty days, we’re coming after you,” Hambone advised.

“You just make sure that you look after Olivia,” Daniel answered as he galloped away.

Daniel rode the horse at night and slept in barns, sheds, or houses during the day. The farther south he went, the more eerie and quiet it became and the more seekers he started to see. He avoided all population centers, and took State Highway 101, thinking that the overseers’ columns mostly stuck to Highway 5.

Daniel skirted wide around Los Angeles, and finally reached Oceanside on the ninth day, with only having seen a handful of seekers and a couple of drones off in the distance at night. It had been a quiet, peaceful journey, and he liked riding the horse. He hadn’t been on one since he had worked on his grandad’s cattle ranch back when he was eighteen.

Daniel had let his mind wander to anything, except what he might find once he got home. Now he stood facing the Sea Breeze Apartment Complex, where his apartment was. It was low rent housing, as he had to survive on corporal pay, but was decent enough. Of course, the ocean was three blocks away, so there really wasn’t much of a sea breeze here.

Oceanside, like most small towns, had very little seeker damage. The majority of the bald collectors were gathering in the big cities. Oceanside looked like a normal town, minus the people, plus the grass and weeds were way out of control. Okay, now he was seriously stalling.

Daniel’s custom FXDR 114 soft tail motorcycle was long gone, but his old beat up brown 2015 Chevrolet Silverado still sat in its parking spot. He tied Sparky to a fence post and walked over to the rear fender of his old truck and ran his fingers over a small dent and two-inch scratch, where Adrian had rammed it with his tricycle. A slight smile crossed his face as he relived the memory.

A movement out of his peripheral vision caught his attention, bringing his .357 out in a flash. Daniel dropped a seeker as it charged towards him, killing it with one shot between the eyes. They may not group up in the smaller towns, but there were still singles to deal with. It was time. Daniel went up the stairs to his second-floor apartment.

The nervous man placed his hand on the dark black metal doorknob and hesitated. Did he really want to do this? How could he not? Maybe it would be locked. It wasn’t. With a slight push, he was home.

The apartment was a mess. It seemed to have been ransacked numerous times, and everything of use had been taken. There were two gunshot holes in the refrigerator door and when he went into his bedroom, he let out a long moan. Lying on the bed was a body on its stomach. It wore blue jeans and a black shirt.

When Daniel rolled the body over, he realized that it was now mostly skeleton, with remnants of dried out hair and skin clinging to it. The dead person wore an ACDC t-shirt. He breathed a sigh of relief when he realized that it had been a man. Daniel wasn’t able to find any clues as to what had happened to his family. That is until he found the note.

It had been lying on the table, under a spilt plant that was now just dirt and some dried out petals. The only thing visible was his name, in Andrea’s rushed handwriting. With trembling hands, Daniel pulled it out and after shaking off the dirt, began to read.

Danny,

Waited for you for over a week. Heard bits and pieces from neighbors that there was an invasion. They said that our military was wiped out, with only remnants still in hiding. I can only assume that something has happened to you, or you would have gotten to us.

It’s getting bad here. Lootings and killings. A man broke into the house early this morning and I shot him with that little gun that you got me for Christmas. He died right by the refrigerator.

I have packed up what we need and am taking the kids to Alcatraz, where people are talking about a resistance. People say that it isn’t as bad to the north. The Johnson kid from down the street stole your bike and I don’t think that your old truck will make it that far, so we are going in my Tahoe. If you are reading this, find us. We need you baby.

Love,

Tinkerbell

Daniel Allen Taylor sat in his kitchen chair for several minutes after reading his letter, and cried like a baby. He hadn’t grieved over his family since the invasion, always holding out a tiny sliver of hope, but now that was gone. He had only heard bad things about Alcatraz.

Daniel spent two private hours in his home, going through memories and trinkets. Once he was done, he gathered up the letter and a couple of photos. He left the place, putting it all behind him. He had one sole purpose now. He was going to go to Alcatraz and kill every single overseer that he could find. He would not rest until they were all dead. Every last one of them.

Daniel was on day three of his return trip when tragedy struck. In the dark, Sparky stepped into a pothole and broke his leg. “Damnit! Damnit!! Damnit!!!” he yelled, angry with himself.

Daniel had pushed the horse way too hard and now he was forced to put him down. This left him on foot and at least three hundred miles from Oakland. Before he lost his horse, he had been making good time, and even with skirting Los Angeles, was already on the 101 south of Oxnard, California.

The August sun was brutal, so Daniel was glad to be walking at night. Still, he had sweated out valuable liquids while sleeping in an old barn that day. He managed to locate a few wells, but they were modern ones that had run on electricity. Water might become an issue.

Daniel exited the barn and started his trek north. After walking all night, he reached Oxnard, where he started to look for his daytime shelter. Then his eye caught sight of some movement. He saw two kids standing near a building just off the State Route. He only saw them for a second, but damned if they didn’t look like Adrian and Alesia.

Daniel wiped the sweat from his eyes, knowing that it was impossible. Still, he had to check it out. He made his way over to where he had seen them. The area appeared to have earthquake damage, with a road called Oxnard Street torn up and jutting skyward. While Daniel picked his way over the uneven concrete, he lost his footing and began to slide towards a dark crevice. 

Daniel managed to catch the edge of a slab, with his feet dangling into the darkness below. Not being able to see into the black chasm, he couldn’t help but feel like a tasty morsel, hanging onto the lip of a giant underground earth beast.  

In normal conditions, the muscular man would have been able to pull himself up. But, Daniel was not healthy. He had been shot, pronged, and stabbed in his shoulders over the past two months, not to mention that he had also broken his wrist. The residual aches and pains caused his arms to give way, dropping him into the darkness below.

Daniel didn’t fall far, maybe eight feet, where he landed on something that was surprisingly soft. It took him a moment to dig out his flashlight, which flickered on, lighting the room. He quickly unholstered his .357 Taurus when he saw what he had landed on. A seeker!

Daniel looked about, noting that there were six of them, lying on bed slabs made from the overseer’s white material, the same that made the pod walls. All six seekers, including the one that he had landed on, were still asleep. He was inside of a command module that had been sucked into the earth by the earthquake.

He thought about shooting the seekers in their heads while they slept, but was unsure if the first shot would wake the others. Best just to get away from here as quickly as possible. Daniel started looking for a way out.

The front end of the module, where the screens and controls were, was crushed by a large slab of asphalt and earth. The only way out was the way that he had come, but it would be a climb. From the looks of the disturbed earth, the seekers had been doing it. Then the worst happened.

The wake-up whistle sounded, causing all six of the seekers to immediately sit straight up. They began to sniff at the air around them and growl. Daniel put two bullets into the foreheads of the two seekers directly in front of him. Then the one that he had landed on grabbed him from behind, locking him in a tight bear hug.

Daniel squeezed off one more shot, before the Taurus went sliding across the floor in the struggle. The bullet struck the knee of a seeker that was approaching him from the front. The wounded seeker swung his pry bar at Daniel, who ducked forward, causing the bar to strike the seeker that was holding him.

When his captor fell backwards, releasing him, Daniel went for his boot knife and began slashing and stabbing. Back and forth he hacked at the remaining bald men, wounding them numerous times. His arm grew weary from all of the thrusting and swinging. His knife became slippery with their blood and he accidently sliced his own hand when it slipped.

The seekers were hard to kill. It took Daniel all of five very gory minutes to end the lives of the last four. After Daniel was finished, he was covered in blood and was very exhausted. Once he wrapped his new wound, Daniel leaned back against one of the dead seekers and fell asleep.

When he woke from a peaceful sleep, his gruesome reality came flooding back in. Daniel needed to get out of this command module of death. He started the treacherous climb back up to the surface, using an exposed root to assist him. It actually turned out to be easier than he had expected, and he slipped only once.

When Daniel reached the surface, it was a bit past midday. Seeing his children must have been his mind playing tricks on him, after his heartbreaking return home. He made his way back to the highway and headed north on Route 101. After walking the rest of the day and through the night, he found an old corn silo, just in time. Not only because he was exhausted, but he also needed to clean his cut because his hand was getting infected, and he was running out of antiseptic.

Daniel spent another evening walking, and did not see the children again. It had been wishful thinking, and he had to let them go, or it would drive him crazy. He busied himself singing some of his favorite songs as he walked steadily north.  

That evening, Daniel rested in an old tool shed. His feet were aching. Motorcycles and horses had spoiled him. He popped several blisters on his feet, and inspected his hand. The infection was spreading, and it didn’t help that he was now out of water.

Daniel awoke with a fever, caused by his hand infection growing worse. The only medicine that he had left was aspirin. When he exited the shed, he almost headed in the wrong direction. Daniel walked all night, and was startled on a couple of occasions when he realized that he was mumbling randomly.

Daniel made his bed that day in the back of an old Ford truck that sat on the shoulder of the road. It wasn’t very comfortable, but it was all that he had. He wasn’t sure how long he had slept when he was awakened by gun shots. Sparse at times, then rapid, again followed by a single shot here and there. The sounds were some distance to his north.

Daniel figured that he had been making about twenty-five miles a night on foot. He wasn’t sure exactly where he was, but since the land had started rising into the mountains, he believed that he was near a town that he had ridden through on his way down south. After an hour of walking, he arrived at the place, Wheeler Springs.

“Town” was a stretch. Village would be more apt. It seemed to be a small series of buildings that grew up around a natural hot spring. None of that held his gaze. What did was the dead seekers. Someone had killed eight of them in various locations along the main street. He didn’t have to wait long to find out who had done it. That someone was coming up behind him.

When Daniel turned around, he saw horse riders. Dozens of them. Way too many to count, slowly riding towards him. Several of the riders had pistols on their hips and rifles slung over their backs. Interestingly, each one carried a stick of dynamite on their belts. This looks like an old west movie, he thought.

Over half of the riders were Hispanic, wearing large sombreros and multi-colored serapes. Now, more riders were coming up the street from the direction that he had come from. Daniel sat down in a rocking chair on the porch of a storefront. Six riders broke off from the main group and rode up to him.

“Does the Border Patrol know that you’re this far north?” Daniel winked.

One of the Hispanic men smiled at him and climbed off his horse. He had a flowing black moustache and a five o’clock shadow for a beard. He was smoking a mushy wet cigar. The man looked very dirty and even a bit tired.

“I’m Juan Carlos Cortez-Monteverde, leaders of this rag-tag bands of misfits,” he said with a very thick accent and adding extra s’s to some words.  

“I’m Daniel Allen Taylor.”

“Why do you show no fears of us Daniel Allen Taylor? A lone traveller can run into all sorts of troubles in this days and age.” Juan Carlos continued to smile at him.

“The way I see it, is that you have me out-numbered and out-gunned. Not much I can do about that, and there’s no reason to get all excited about it,” Daniel explained, holding up his bandaged hand. “Any chance you have some medicine?”

Juan Carlos nodded and called out, “Doc!”

A small white man with silver rimmed spectacles climbed off his horse and came over. He unwrapped Daniel’s hand very carefully, and after squeezing out a lot of pus, poured a white powder all over it. While Doc rewrapped the infected appendage with clean bandages, Juan Carlos and Daniel continued their conversation.

“So, you aren’t going to kill me?” Daniel questioned.

“What makes you say that?” Juan Carlos smiled again. There was a warm feeling about the guy.

“Well, you just fixed me up. Doubt you’d do that if you were planning on killing me.”

“We don’t kill peoples unless we have to,” Juan Carlos advised.

“Well, I must say that I like your handy work here.” Daniel nodded towards one of the dead seekers.

“Unfortunately, they’re no longer peoples. We tried to remove one of the headbands and they just gos completely nuts. They have to be puts down,” Juan Carlos stated.

“That’s what I’ve heard. It’s unfortunate,” Daniel said

“Doesn’t matter. You may joins us if you wish. We’ve heards of a great man leading a resistance to the north. A Major Reyes has been moose codings the reports daily. A man called Commander Dat. First, my people and I are going to get cleans in the hot springs. Then we’re going to travels north to join this great man, if he’ll have us.”

“He’ll have you.” Daniel smiled knowingly.

Author Notes More interesting characters!


Chapter 20
Say Hello To Your Old Pal

By Douglas Goff

Warning: The author has noted that this contains the highest level of language.
Warning: The author has noted that this contains the highest level of sexual content.

“So, you’re sayin’ that you’re Commander Dat?” Juan Carlos rubbed his stubbled chin. It was taking some convincing, not because Juan Carlos didn’t believe that Daniel’s name was an acronym for Dat, but because he didn’t believe that Daniel was the same man that they were seeking. “Manny, set up that moose codes thingy we got back in Tijuana.”

Daniel smiled at the man’s mispronunciation while waiting patiently for a man named Manuel checked out his story. Within an hour, the solar machine was up and running and they were able to verify that Daniel was the leader of the Oakland Clan. They also let his people know that he was okay.

“We’ve been fightin’ all the ways up from Mexico.” Juan Carlos and his horse raiders had been waging their own war against the seekers. “My country is devastated. All the big cities are gones. There’re rumors that many of my paisanos are hidings in the mountainous regions of southern Mexico, but we came north. We were hoping to find helps from the Gringos, but so far, we have only founds more destruction.” The man’s English was good, but he had a tendency to add extra s’s to his words and had a heavy accent.

“I’m sure that the invasion was worldwide. I doubt there’s any help out there. We either help ourselves, or dwindle away. That is why we’re striking back in Oakland. We’re takin’ it to them,” Daniel told Juan Carlos.

“We collected peoples in San Diego, then more along the way, and now numbers about two thousand. The horses came from ranches on both sides of the border, many of which were grazing wildly, their owners long gones. We are yours to commands, if you will have us.” The horse warriors looked to be a rugged crew of hardened fighters, consisting of both men and women.

The horses seemed to be in great shape. They were obviously grass fed, and while a bit skinny, looked rugged and sturdy. Many had nice saddles and stirrups, while others had makeshift saddles and a few even had just saddle blankets.

The group had ten old buckboard style wagons as well, that carried all manner of supplies. Fruit, vegetables, ammunition, a couple loaded with scavenged hay, and two for transporting a handful of the elderly and young.

Daniel was also surprised to see that the cowboys were herding several hundred head of cattle. He felt his mouth start to water, thinking about a juicy steak. I guess that saves them from having to scavenge for much food.

“In the beginnings, many peoples died quickly. That lefts a lot of stuff lying about to grab, not to mentions that we have found plentys of horses and cows along the way.” The Mexican leader had seen Daniel looking at his supplies with suprise. “So, will you haves us?”

“I will take anyone who is willing to pick up a gun and fight,” Daniel said, shaking Juan Carlos’ hand. He liked the confident Mexican leader. “You will remain in charge of your people and fight under my orders.”

A very clean force of Juan Carlo’s horsemen left Wheeler Springs on some well-grazed horses. Daniel noticed that only a handful of people had to ride double. It took a few days, but the group finally arrived at the Sacramento Clan compound.

Daniel took them there, because he remembered that Jilly had a very large makeshift stable behind the airfield to house their own animals. The Sacramento clan grazed their horses on the thick grass between the runways. Two thousand more horses were a lot, but they would have to make do. Hopefully it was just overnight, besides the tunnels would be no place for horses.

Daniel had intentionally kept his clan at the same location since he took over. He felt that moving would be psychologically damaging to his people. He needed them to understand that they weren’t running and hiding anymore. They were standing and fighting.

The only incident that occurred during their return ride was when a drone spotted them from a distance out, followed by a green power circle opening up in the center of the horses. Daniel went for his 12-gauge.  

“Wait . . .” Juan Carlos held his hand up to Daniel. “You won’t be needings that.”

The man nearest to the transporter quickly lit his dynamite stick and dropped it into the power circle. It closed a second later. Juan Carlos explained that he had been losing a lot of people to the overseers popping in at will, until one of his men got the idea to drop a “boom stick” into the power circle. When they did, no overseers came through. The green circles were obviously two-way transporters.

A few hours later, they reached the front gates of the Sacramento Clan.

“State your business,” the scar-faced Creeper questioned calmly, although several, more heavily armed Sacramento Clan guards were arriving to face off with the huge horse army standing outside their gates. Creeper wore the same black hooded sweatshirt and black cargo pants that he had on the first time that Daniel had seen him.

“It’s Dat, Creeper,” Daniel said, wondering if the dirty man every changed his clothes.

“State your business,” the scuzzy man repeated, his greasy black hair creeping out from the bottom of his hood like dirty black fingers. The gate guard certainly was single-minded.

“We’re here to see Jilly,” Daniel answered.

They waited for a few minutes before Jilly walked up to the gate, where at least five hundred Sacramento Clan members now faced off against Daniel’s forces. He was worried that someone was going to accidently crack off a round and a shooting war would ensue.

The black-haired clan leader was as beautiful as ever, wearing a turquoise jumpsuit. Daniel wondered how the woman always managed to look so good in such desperate times. Just the magic of Jilly, he supposed.

“We need to diffuse this situation quickly, Jilly,” Daniel said. “Have your people stand down.”

“Why are you here with so many?” she looked concerned, but signaled Creeper to send the others away. Most of her people started to wander off, now that the excitement was over.  

“We need shelter and grazing for a day or two,” Daniel requested.

“How am I going to feed all these mouths?” Jilly was hesitant to let so many in, biting her lower lip in her sexy contemplative manner.

“I understand that it’s a lot to ask,” Daniel said. “But these men have their own food and a herd of cattle.  I’m sure that he could be persuaded to give up a couple. They just need some grass to graze their horses.”

Jillian Johnson literally licked her lips as visions of juicy steaks and hamburgers passed through her mind. It had been so long since they had any beef. Daniel watched the woman, knowing that he had her. Still, she was a fierce negotiator and was always looking for an angle. She could have put the pre-invasion used car dealers to shame.  

“Okay, I guess that we could use some beef in our diet. I trust that you’ll make that happen Daniel, but nobody is coming in unless you agree to stay with me for at least a day.” The beautiful woman smiled wryly. “It’s the least that you can do after leaving Olivia and I without so much as a goodbye back in Oakland. But don’t worry, you’re cute little girlfriend more than made up for your rude departure. I have to admit, I can’t stop thinking about our last night together. So, do we have an agreement? Are you mine for a day? I asked politely this time.”

“Who could say no to that?” the Oakland Clan leader answered genuinely.

Daniel sat down to dinner with Jilly, Juan Carlos, and a couple of the Sacramento Tribunal leaders and laid out his next goal. His plan was bold, aggressive, and they all liked it. It would take a day to prepare their forces, then they were going to hit the enemy hard.

“Ninety miles in one days?” Juan Carlos shook his head wistfully while studying Daniel’s tattered and scribble-marked map. “Technically it is possible, but we would lose too manys horses and they would be worthless in the battle. Two days would still be pushing it, but would be mores feasible. Plus, the horses needs a good rest right now.”

Jilly and Daniel spent an intensely passionate day and night together. After breakfast, he decided to go and tie up some loose ends with Juan Carlos. While Daniel came down the mobile jet stairs, he saw a gruesome sight. Jilly’s two personal guards were lying on the ground in pools of blood, their throats slit from ear to ear.

“Well, don’t just stand there, Dat. Come on down and say hello to your old pal, Stan.” Stan the Man said, pointing his Baretta 9mm right at Daniel’s head from the shadow of the runway stairs.    

Daniel slowly made his way down the steps, contemplating his next move, when Stan said, “Don’t even think about it, Dat ol’ boy. Where's that smoke wagon of yours? Don't tell me that I caught you defenseless.”

“My shotgun's up in the plane with the rest of my gear.”

“You don’t have any of my frag grenades shoved up that tight ass of yours, do ya?” Stan continued.

“Just my pig sticker in my boot,” Daniel answered.

“Well, that sounds just about perfect, doesn’t it?” Stan the Man grinned his biggest grin. “Cause we gonna have us a good old fashion knife fight. Hopefully that she-cat up there didn’t sap away all of your strength. You were in there pounding that for an awful long time.”

“This isn’t necessary Stan --- “, Daniel started to say before he was loudly interrupted.

“Shut up Dat! Shut the fuck up!! I thought that we were friends. Then you put a bullet in the back of poor old Scooter’s noggin. Next you blew off Horndog’s nuts. Man, that was just wrong. Not to mention that you raided all of my cubby holes and stole my stuff. I figured the best way to settle the score was to wait for you right here. I knew that it’d be hard for you to stay away from that sweet honey pot up there. By the way, where’re our pals, Tiny and Hambone?” Stan finished his diatribe with a question.

“Oakland Clan killed them that first day,” Daniel lied, not wanting the biker leader to go after them if this went badly.

“I highly doubt that Dat. You probably got those two pussy traitors holed up somewhere real close, don’t ya?” Stan the Man smirked. “I’ll gut those two lard ass deadweights when I’m finished with you.”

The door opened above him, and Jilly came out with her AK-47, saying, “Dat?”

“Just go back in,” Daniel said. “I got this.

“Yeah Princess, listen to your boyfriend here. Just go back inside before I put a round right between those pretty dark eyes. Besides, you start shooting that big thing and you’ll end up mowing down Pretty Boy right along with me. Go back inside and Ol’ Stanley will be up for his turn in a few minutes,” Stan the Man ordered. Jillian bit her lower lip, then went back inside after Daniel nodded at her to go.

“Boy, but ain’t she a looker Dat.” Stan the Man snickered. “Too bad your woman is a merry-go-round, and everybody gets a ride!”

Daniel knew that Stan was trying to get him upset. He just stared at the dangerous man, calmly waiting for his chance. He could feel the intense adrenaline forcing heat through his veins in a rush of excitement. This was when the marine was at his best.

“Now pull out that pig sticker, Dat. Pull it out!” Stan demanded.

Daniel leaned down and slipped his boot knife free, saying, “Before we do this, I wanted to tell you about your father, Hank.”

“You got nothing to tell me Dat. That old man stopped being my dad the second that he turned me in to the cops.”

“Did he? I had an interesting conversation with the old chief. Seems that he never did turn you in. It was one of the other hookers who ratted you out,” Daniel explained.

Stan the Man scowled at him, and after setting his snub-nosed .38 on the ground, pulled out his own combat knife from a belt sheath. It was the same blade that he had finished Deacon with. “I’m going to slit you from ear to ear, boy.”

“Yeah, I don’t think so,” Daniel said, and dropped his knife on the ground. It was the moment that he had been waiting for.

“Oh Dat, don’t make this easy on old Stan. Pick up that damn knife and let’s dance!”

Daniel pulled his .357 Taurus out from behind his back, where it had been resting in his waistband, and pointed it straight at Stan’s head “Oh, did I forget to mention that I started carrying a handgun?”

“Awww geez Dat. That’s so pussy. Deacon laid down three guns for the chance to gut me with a knife.”

“Where’d that get him?” Daniel stared hard at Stan, unflinching in his resolve.

“Oh, come on now Dat.” The wicked grin had slipped from Stan’s face as quickly as the tables had turned. “Don’t be so rude. This isn’t going to go down like that. I know that you want to fight me just as badly as I want to fight you. The question of ‘who’s better’ is what that brain in your thick jarhead skull is wondering about. A good old fashioned knife fight between two equals to resolve who’s the best, mano a mano, once and for all. Don’t tell me that I underestimated you.”

“That’s where you’re mistaken. You didn’t underestimate me Stan, you misunderstood me from day one and are still doing it right up to your last moment. That mistake is going to cost you your life.”

“Misunderstood you? Hell no! You want this knife fight as bad as I do. That’s what’s rolling around in your head.”

What’s rolling around in my head is a dead woman, who was down on her luck. And because she was trying to make a few bucks as a prostitute, ended up murdered, pissed on, and buried in the back of your father’s yard. Hank’s also rolling around in my head. How you sent me in to kill your own father.”

Stan only glared at him, his anger rising, with his happy persona being gobbled up by his dark side. The transformation was almost visible, like a wolf eating a rabbit.

“Not to mention all of those survivors that you killed and stuffed into those campers over at Emigrant Lake Reservoir. I’m also thinking about all the people that you blasted, including Carmen and Rosie. This .357 here belonged to Carmen. I started carrying it so that I could kill you with it. No, I don’t see us as equals. I just see a rabid dog who needs to be put down.”

“Dat, you were always nothing more than an honor first pussy mari---“. A single gunshot ended Stan the Man’s rant.

“I don’t see the need to listen to your raving lunacy,” Daniel repeated the words that Stan had said when he had blasted the murderer in Fairfield. Thus ended the Dirty Down and Dead.

Author Notes This has been reworked more than a few times. Now it is much shorter!


Chapter 21
Cowboys And Aliens

By Douglas Goff

Warning: The author has noted that this contains the highest level of violence.

“Any drones?” Daniel asked Manny, who rode in with the last group of scouts.

“None Dat,” the petite man answered in perfect English, having worked in the states on several occasions.

“Then it’s time,” Daniel decided, and led 2,500 horse warriors out of the Sacramento complex. After a hard ride, they located an old soccer field complex, where they rested and grazed their tired animals for the night. The men ate beef stew that had been prepared in Sacramento, and slept under the stars.

The second day, a drone had to be taken out and dynamite was dropped into a couple of green power circles that opened up in their ranks. The horse riders still had to move along the highway at a good clip, but having extended the trip to two days, as Juan Carlos had requested, paid off.

“Since we left the wagons and cattle behind, and everyone is riding single, we have made good time,” Juan Carlos said to Dat after riding up to him near a large field. “Let’s rest the horses for a few hours and let them graze. Then we can walk them until it gets dark.”

“Sure,” Daniel said, not being used to such long hard riding. “My butt hurts anyways.”

When darkness fell, they remounted and started to ride more cautiously. In this manner, they completed the ninety-mile journey north. The horse that Daniel was riding hadn’t been named as it was a fairly new addition. Once Daniel learned that, the song Riding Through The Desert On A Horse With No Name by America popped into his head. For the rest of the night, he couldn’t get the annoying lyrics out of his head.   

A couple of hours before daybreak the horse army had reached Chico, having lost only a couple dozen riders due to lagging or injured horses. Juan Carlos refused to leave the tired or wounded animals alone, so their riders stayed with their mounts until they were able to fall back to Sacramento.

Scouts provided that the enemy numbers were the same as before. Nothing had changed since Daniel had been there the first time. Thousands of seekers guarded by three overseer columns, with six hover cars each.

The three overseer units were separate from each other and positioned around the outer perimeter of Chico. The enemy columns were parked about five hundred yards out from the depleted city, on overwatch. The overseer’s attempt to protect the seekers would fail today.

The only difference this time was that nearly all of the city was now gone. About half of the seekers were picking up chunks of concrete and were throwing them into white power circles. The only other debris remaining were random piles of wood and paper.

Daniel took the last half hour of darkness to go over their battle plan one more time.

“Juan Carlos, you will sweep in from the south with your thousand horsemen and hit the column positioned on the south side of the city. I will come in from the north with a thousand riders and eliminate the column to the north. Creeper and his five hundred troops will hit that column to the west. Any questions?”

“How much times do you two needs to get to your targets,” Juan Carlos questioned, looking at his solar watch.

“Fifteen minutes. Sound about right Creeper?” Daniel asked.

“Yeah, maybe twenty. I have a small wooded area to pass through, but my column is closer than yours Dat.” the dirty man calculated.

“Okay, let’s say twenty minutes. Each of the three protection columns have twenty-four overseers in them. We have ta’ take out those big guns in those hover cars, or this fight will be over before it even gets started. Once you’ve taken out your column, head straight into the rubble of the city and we’ll all converge on the seekers and destroy them. They’re the main target of this mission.”

When Daniel returned to his troops, he handed out six of his nearly depleted supply of grenades to some of his riders, saying, “One for each car. Timing is everything. We need to blow them all up at the same time, or as close together as possible, before the overseers can unload those auto blasters on us.”

Juan Carlos and Creeper’s groups were using dynamite. Daniel and his horsemen moved out at a fast trot circling the city widely, passing through several outlying suburban neighborhoods, trying to get in close to the enemy before the dawning sunlight exposed them.

It didn’t take long before explosions on the other side of the city alerted Daniel that his time was up. Juan Carlos’ force was attacking. Then Daniel’s troops were there, with the column of six cars sitting just a few yards from them.  

“Charge!” Daniel shouted, sending his horse warriors right at the overseers. Boom! . . . Boom! Boom! . . . Boom! . . . Boom! Come on, where was number six? he thought. Finally, a sixth explosion followed the first five. Red blasts responded to their attack. Luckily, they were only single beams, indicating that his men had put the grenades right under the rapid-fire gun mounts as he had ordered.

A drone exploded just above Daniel, showering him with sparks. The clan leader had placed men with sniper rifles all around the dead city for just such a purpose. They were to eliminate any drones that they saw. A surviving overseer to Daniel’s immediate front sent a baton blast at the rider beside the clan leader. enveloping both horse and man in a red circle. With a fizzle they were ash.

Daniel urged his mount forward and smashed the overseer across the head with the butt of his shotgun. The incredible blow merely turned the thing’s head sideways. The black-suited alien turned and pointed its baton at him. That is when Daniel saw the dynamite stick burning between its legs, the wick nearly spent!

Daniel instinctively threw himself off the side of his horse when the explosion demolished the overseer, and sent his horse toppling. Daniel managed to clear the dead animal just in time, rolling through the dust and landing on his butt. The side of his mount had been shredded by shrapnel from the explosion.

The only thing left of the overseer was separated arms, legs, head, and a torso. The helmet visor was cracked, but still intact. Damn these aliens had some fiercely strong armor. Daniel himself had two steaming shards of metal protruding from his right leg, about the size of pencils, plus a couple of black burn marks on his thigh.

It looked like Daniel’s group had eliminated their target column. The wounded man rose to his feet, intent upon finally getting a look at one of these creatures, when one of his men rode up and gave him the reins to a riderless horse. He took them and wobbled towards the dead overseer, when he saw rapid fire red blasts far to his west.

Creeper’s men, the third to reach their targets, had failed to take out at least one of their auto-blasters and it was wreaking havoc on them. If they didn’t eliminate that mega-blaster, then the whole mission was in jeopardy of failing.
           

“Six of you ride with me!” Daniel shouted. “The rest of you attack into the city and take out as many seekers as you can. If we fail to take out the rest of that column, then ride out after your attack run and head back to Sacramento as planned!”

Daniel mounted his new horse rapidly, ignoring the pain that it caused to his wounded thigh. He also chose to ignore the black ashes in the saddle from the horse’s previous rider. Within seconds, he was racing towards the source emitting the red power circles in a wide arc at an incredible rate.

Daniel urged his newly acquired mount to go faster, prodding it in the ribs with his heels and shouting, “Yah! Yah!” The already tired horse, panting and snorting, took him to breakneck speeds. Six of his riders paced him and soon they were moving in a line. The rest of his forces had turned towards the seekers, intent upon taking out the real goal of the mission.

Daniel’s line surged forward, wind knocking off sombreros and whipping through their hair while they raced towards their new target. To Daniel, it felt like they were in some kind of surreal old west cowboy movie, only they weren’t after some villainous cattle rustlers, they were after aliens.

It took a couple of minutes, but they finally reached the enemy column. Four of the six hover cars were burning wrecks. The two closest to Daniel and his men were still intact and heavily engaging Creeper’s retreating forces. At least half of the fleeing man’s horses and riders had been reduced to ashes. All eight overseers from the two intact alien vehicles were still in the fight.

Daniel and his six fighters came in from the city side of the column. They were a hundred yards out when the two nearest overseers, the drivers, turned and began firing their batons at the seven advancing horsemen.

At ninety yards out, the horse to Daniel’s immediate left turned to ash, sending the rider toppling off into the dust. At seventy yards, the man and horse to his immediate right was enveloped in a red power circle and disappeared with a fizzle, leaving an ash trail floating in the wind.

The remaining fighters closed ranks and continued advancing. Daniel would rather that they’d spread out, to make themselves harder targets, but knew that it was human nature to close in during times of danger.

Daniel crouched low in his saddle and urged his panting steed forward, focusing on destroying those guns. At fifty yards another rider disappeared, while one of the big guns began to swing towards them. Crap.! Crap!! Crap!!! This was going to be close.  

At thirty yards, Daniel grabbed the two frag grenades hanging on his vest and pulled straight down. This not only freed them, but released the pins, starting his five- to seven-second count. The last rider to his left fizzled away into a red glow of ash.

The man to his right had lit his dynamite stick too early, and had to toss it behind them before it blew him up. The woman next to that man was struggling to get hers lit in the racing wind, then the point was moot, as she transformed into ash.

At ten yards out several things happened simultaneously. The big gun locked in and aimed at them. Daniel tossed both of his grenades and turned his horse hard along the already burning hover cars, nearly crashing into them. The pair of horsemen continued along the burning hover cars. Daniel was hoping that the smoke would provide them some cover while they retreated. His last mounted man was riding hard on his heels.

The explosions rattled their teeth, with Daniel having cut that much too close for comfort. Fortunately, the grenades had eliminated both the enemy cars, and their operators. When they went back for the rider who had toppled into the dust, they discovered that he had broken his neck during the fall.

The two remaining riders turned towards the city, seeing that their forces were reaching the outskirts. Daniel’s entire breakoff attack had taken less than four minutes, although it felt much longer.

A loud shrill whistle sounded, repeatedly blaring out an annoying blast. In the distance, Daniel could see that a group of seekers had been pushing a command module towards a green power circle, where it dropped in and disappeared. The group of seekers were turning to get another module from a line of several, when the alarm had sounded.

The seekers immediately stopped working and let out loud growls. After sniffing the air, they turned and began to run towards the charging pair of horsemen at a sprint. In other parts of Chico, a couple thousand seekers were charging headlong in different directions, heading for various attackers. Gunfire could be heard erupting across the wooden remnants of the city.

Daniel and his partner stayed astride their mounts and once the enemy drew close, engaged. Daniel dropped two seekers quickly with his Ranch Edition shot gun, then drew the Taurus .357, thinking that he should’ve brought something that was easier to load and carried more rounds for this mission.

“Rat . . . tat, tat, tat . . .rat. tat, tat, tat!” His partner opened up with an M-4, mowing down seven seekers in a row. “Blam!” Daniel dropped the last one with a shot from his revolver.

Numerous gunshots and explosions , followed by screaming, sounding off from ahead of them in the rubble. The pair moved forward, anxious to get into the devastated city to help their embattled friends.

Once in, Daniel saw that the former big city was now only wooden beams, house frames, and papers blowing all about. Apparently, the aliens had no use for wood or wood byproducts. The enemy just left it behind, marking where a city once stood.

It looked like an eerie skeletal graveyard marked by what looked like long outstretched wooden hands making one last dying grasp at the sky above. Everything else was gone! Everything but a few thousand seekers.

Daniel and his man came upon six of the milky-eyed bald men that were beating a black man to death with their pry bars. The clan leader dropped two with his 12-gauge, while his partner shot the rest with his M-4 and reloaded a fresh magazine.

A Hispanic lady came running around from behind a pile of wooden beams, chased by two seekers. She was blocking their line of fire on her pursuers. Just then a green power circle opened near her. Daniel reached in his pack and grabbed his last frag grenade, tossing it into the circle.

The middle-aged, wide-hipped, portly Hispanic female was rapidly losing the footrace with her attackers. She was breathing heavily, her eyes wide with fear.

No municion! No municion!! Ayudame!!!” she screamed as one of the seekers caught up and struck her on the back with his pronged bar. Daniel’s partner dropped the attacking seeker with two rapid shots from his M-4.

The chunky woman had been knocked towards the green power circle. Daniel leapt from the back of his horse, simultaneously sending two rounds into the second pursuing seeker with the .357 that was held in his right hand, while catching the woman’s own reaching hand with his left.

Ayudame . . .” she pleaded again.

Daniel was holding onto the woman’s hand, with half of her body now in the energy circle, which closed in response to his grenade attack. He had been staring into her fear-filled, panic-stricken brown eyes, which quickly glazed over with the cold lifeless stare of death. Her body had been cut in half when the circle closed. Daniel turned away from the smoking cauterized mess, resting his face in the dirt. Damnit! I thought that I had her.

When Daniel rose to his feet, he heard a single shot from the M-4. His partner had dropped a third seeker who had come around a wood pile and was about to pound Daniel on the head with his pry bar. The Mexican man had saved Daniel from certain death.

Daniel remounted his horse and they continued farther into the wooden ruins, riding between various piles of debris. Gunshots still rang out all around them. When the pair rounded the next pile, they were facing at least fifty charging seekers, who immediately smelled them approaching. With several loud growls, more of the brain-erased men began to pour out from around other piles of wood. Daniel and his partner were surrounded.

“We’re screwed,” Daniel said to the Mexican man.

Se acabo,” his partner agreed, and opened up with his M-4. Daniel pumped two rounds into the closest two seekers with his shotgun and then unloaded his .357 into the wall of enemy to their front. He went for his boot knife, not having time to reload since the seekers were closing in fast.

A hail of gunfire erupted from behind them, mowing down the seekers to their rear, followed by numerous horsemen riding past the pair of relieved men, to engage the rest of the enemy. Creeper had brought his remaining forces back into the fight!

“Not gonna let you steal all the glory, Dat.” The burnt-faced man smirked at Daniel, who had never been happier to see the stringy-haired scuzzy man in his life.

There was a final smattering of gun fire erupting here and there, then it died off. Juan Carlos rode up with a dozen riders and nodded at Creeper and Daniel, asking, “Casualties?”

“I lost at least half my men, maybe a little more,” Creeper answered.

“No idea,” Daniel said, not even sure where the rest of his riders were.

“Why didn’t the overseers reinforce theirs troops? We’ve been heres for a while?” Juan Carlos seemed perplexed.

“We blew out a green circle.” Daniel grimaced at the horrible memory. “I think it’s a good sign though. Maybe we’re draining their resources.”

The man beside Daniel, the one who had stayed with him the whole time, held out his hand and said a long phrase in Spanish. The man finished speaking and smiled, revealing that his two top front teeth were capped in gold.

When Daniel looked confused, Juan Carlos translated, “He said that his name is Paco. He used to owns a brothel in Tijuana that ran a donkey show. Now he kills aliens. He wants to know if he can stays with you as your personal guard. He said that you needs one because you fights like a crazy wild man.”

Daniel grasped Paco’s hand, laughing as he shook it, saying, “Si.”

“So, original plans boss?” Juan Carlos questioned in his thickly accented voice.  

“Yes, sound the signal. We separate into small groups of ten and you guys make your way back to Sacramento. Travel slow and rest the horses. They are exhausted. Everyone makes sure that the camp is clear of drones before entering the complex. Only go through the gate at night,” Daniel ordered.

One of the men with Juan Carlos sounded three long blasts on a trumpet, signaling the departure. Doc, the white man with silver spectacles, quickly tended to Daniel’s shrapnel wounds before they departed. On the way out they heard several explosions, relaying that Daniel’s troops were dynamiting the command modules as he had ordered.

When Daniel and Paco went to separate from the others, Juan Carlos turned and said, “You can keeps that horse, Commander Dat. Her name is Ocioso. In Spanish it means idle … or useless. Because she was very difficults to tame and train.”

Daniel smiled to himself. The beautiful mare was anything but useless. We all have a role to play, and Ocioso had just played hers well, helping to win the battle for Chico.

Author Notes Only four more chapters after this one. The next two are "big reveal chapters", and the final two are the conclusion chapters.

PS I know that the blue lettering is back. It only shows up here and is a system issue.


Chapter 22
Alcatraz

By Douglas Goff

Warning: The author has noted that this contains the highest level of language.

Boy was Major Olivia Reyes gonna be pissed. Daniel chuckled to himself while he rowed towards the well-lit island. When he had returned to the Oakland Clan, about a week ago, he had learned a lot of good news.

When Olivia saw him, she had run and jumped on him, wrapping her legs around his waist, while she clung to him tightly, saying, “Oh, I should be careful, I’m carrying your child.”

She climbed off, and showed him her tiny baby bump, informing him that he had knocked her up. Daniel wasn’t sure how he felt about that. He was sure that this was a terrible time and place to birth a child, but he did have strong feelings for his spunky cute partner.

“Really? From only a couple of times?” He knew it could happen but was still surprised.

“Technically it was three . . . wait four times.” She had laughed and kissed him on the chin as she liked to do.

“And what’s this ‘Major’ stuff?’ he asked, frowning.

“Well, I though colonel was a bit pretentious. Besides, I made you a commander,” she answered.

“That’s not even a Marine Corps rank.” He frowned again.

“Daniel, people are coming in daily. Not just marines. All branches of the military, plus former police, national guard, basically everything that you can imagine. A group just arrived from Montana! We’re over ten thousand people strong now. We have to hit three pods a day just to feed this clan alone. We needed structure to maintain control. You were gone and left me in charge, so I took charge.” She was serious now.

“Okay, ‘commander and major’ it is.” Daniel now understood.

“We weren’t the only ones who got promoted. I made some captains and lieutenants as well, to lead pod raids.”

“Who did you pick?”

“That survivalist Kenneth and Barbara are both captains. That lady may look like a librarian, but I’ll tell you what, she has already led six successful long-range pod raids. They’re using Molotov cocktails and some homemade explosives to take out the overseers. Barbara showed us how to make the bombs. Smart lady. Oh, and I made Petey of the Dog Pack bounty hunters one of the lieutenants. Never seen a prouder man before. He’s doing well.”

“Sounds like all solid choices.”

“I also picked specialists for specific fields. Sterns is a Mechanical Specialist. Hambone medical, and Tiny communications. The whole ranking system is working out quite well and our people are following it.”

“Smart, beautiful, and resourceful. You are a triple threat.” Daniel gave her a warm smile.

“I have also assigned squads to make rounds to attend to the orchards. No sense letting our food supply go to waste. We will still have to eat when all of this is over with. We can keep a lot of those fruit trees going with minimal effort for now,” she smiled brightly at him.

“Damn, you’re the best choice that I’ve made in this whole war,” Daniel smiled, quite pleased with the intelligent woman’s efforts. She was a natural born leader and a good strategist.

“Damn right I’m the best choice you’ve made.” Olivia leaned in and kissed him on the mouth this time, lingering for a moment, before changing the subject entirely by saying, “So what gives with Jilly? Are you in love with her?”

He could hear just a hint of jealousy in her voice, and saw even more in her expressive eyes. Daniel figured it was best just to speak truthfully, “I’m not really sure what Jillian and I have. It’s intense, as you know . . . but kinda confusing . . . like us. I’m just not sure where any of this is going. I don’t love her, it’s just raw passion and heat. Besides, I don’t think that I’m capable of loving anyone else, not until I find out what really happened to my wife.”

“Well, I’m sorry, but I am,” Olivia said with nervous apprehension, while staring at him with her big brown tender eyes.  

“Are what?” he asked, a little confused.

“In love with you,” she answered, then quickly added, “I just thought that you should know in case something happens to either of us.”

Daniel leaned in and gave her a longer kiss, then said, “First we win this war. Then we can take some time and figure us out.”

“Hmmm . . . that’s fair,” she said. “Let’s keep it the way that it is for now. We’ll decide how to move forward after we kick these aliens off our planet.”

Daniel had also learned that the Battle of Chico, which it was now being called, had been a huge success. Even with their losses being at about four hundred, they had killed thousands of the seekers and over seventy overseers. They needed big enemy losses like that to win this thing.

It was becoming apparent that the overseers were hurting. Returning attack squads had reported that two of the pods that they had hit didn’t even have overseer guards, and none came to defend them. The clan had been able to take all of the food.

Things were going smoothly. That was until last night, when he had the dream again. Andrea standing in a mist, waving at him to come, repeating, “Find us.”  It was the “us” part that really got him. If this really was some type of supernatural visit from her, then was there some chance that his kids were still alive? Some sliver of hope?

He had really wanted to put it all behind him, after his trip to Oceanside, but he couldn’t do that with Andrea’s continued nocturnal visits. Either his mind, or this manifestation of his spirit wife, was trying to tell him something.

Olivia had taken to sleeping with him for warmth and comfort, but it had remained platonic. He thought it best, not that her sleeping in just panties made it easy on him. He believed that she was trying to give him some space to try and sort out his emotions.

Daniel had slipped away from her warm embrace just after midnight. Now he was landing on the shore of Alcatraz Island, blinded by a spotlight, which was coming from somewhere above. He didn’t plan to surrender. He uncharacteristically didn’t have any plan at all. Daniel just wanted answers.

Daniel had a lot of time to think while he was rowing across the bay. He knew that the chances of him returning were slim. He also knew that Olivia was quite capable of running the resistance and he had left her a note telling her to stick to the plan and that she was the new commander if he didn’t return.

It did bother him, a lot, that she would have to raise their child alone in this fucked up world. Still, he had to have answers. Andrea would not stop haunting his sleep until he found out what had happened to her. Somehow, he was certain of that.

Four men walked out from a fenced in area, carrying Uzi style sub-machine guns and flashlights. At least they are human. They searched Daniel, and after taking his .357, led him into the prison complex. It was odd that no words were spoken, as if they captured people daily. Daniel had finally made it to Alcatraz.

The guards walked Daniel over to a structure that bore a historical sign identifying it as Building 64, the old residential housing for the long past guards that used to work in the old prison. He had never been on the island before, and was surprised when the tower lights revealed that the building was several stories tall.

Once inside of the building they passed through a gated entrance where another pair of guards were stationed. Daniel noted that all of the sentries were wearing matching camouflage uniforms and the two new ones also had Uzis, although theirs were strapped to their backs. This is well organized.

The same four guards that initially “captured” Daniel took him through the gate and up two flights of stairs. Daniel was equally surprised to see that they had electricity inside, and that the whole place had been remodeled. The guards took him to an office at the far end of the hall. The door was open.

One of the guards went in and placed Daniel’s unloaded .357 on a desk. The guard and a man sitting behind the desk began whispering. Daniel recognized the sitting man the second that he saw him. He was Robert Rogers the governor of California. His campaign slogan had been “Have a problem? Call on Bobby!”

The slogan was weak, just like the man. Robert Rogers was an independent, who had walked the line like he was on a tight-rope, and flip-flopped on every issue. He would answer issues depending solely upon what group of people he was addressing, always trying to appease people. Whenever he was confronted with something that he didn’t want to answer or talk about, he would always say, “That is under committee review,” although nobody knew who the committee was and when the review would be over.

Governor Rogers waved him in and pointed at a chair. The guard exited and waited just outside the open door with the other three men, Uzi’s at the ready. Rogers opened a drawer in the desk and pulled out a file. After looking through it, he took off his expensive brown rimmed glasses and rubbed his eyes. He looked to be in his late fifties, was a tad over-weight, and had salt and pepper black hair.

“The infamous Commander Dat. Daniel Allen Taylor. Corporal. United States Marine Corps,” the older man said.

“Robert Rogers. Governor of California. First term,” Daniel answered in kind.

“Call me Bobby,” the former governor stared down at his hands for a moment, then said, “Look Dat, this isn’t a pissing contest. You really don’t understand how much trouble you’ve caused.”

“No, I really don’t. Why don’t you explain to me just how much trouble I’ve caused,” Daniel asked.

“How about I start with the questions. You showed up here with a revolver and six bullets. You obviously didn’t come here to fight. And you didn’t come to join the resistance because you are the resistance. So, why exactly are you here?”

Daniel thought for a moment. “You’re my governor. If you have a problem, call Bobby. Well, I came a calling.”

“Well, first off, I’m no longer a governor. I’m now an ambassador,” he corrected Daniel, then put his fancy glasses back on. “So, what’s this problem?”

“My family. They came here seven years ago,” Dat said, pulling out a picture of his wife and children from his shirt pocket. “I just want to know what happened to them.”

The older man took the picture and leaned back in his leather chair, saying, “Oh, family. I guess that is a pretty serious issue.”

Bobby studied the photo for a long moment, then said, “Thousands of people came through here over the past seven years. I can’t remember all of them, but I’ll check our records. Andrea, Adrian, and Alesia Taylor, correct?”

“Yes, how’d you know that?”

Ambassador Rogers pointed down at the open file on his desk and waved a guard in. “Take him over to the Quartermaster’s Building. I’ll meet you there in a few minutes.”

The same four men led Daniel back out the same route that they had come. On the way past the first level, he heard a man and woman arguing and farther off, a baby crying. Families must live here.

The five men walked a short distance and entered another large building, where they waited for a few minutes in a small lobby. In front of them were two large black iron doors that led further into the building. Then Robert Rogers arrived.

The ambassador approached the double doors, and after pulling a card free from around his neck, he passed it over a scanner that was on the wall beside the doors. Next, the man placed his hand on a black fingerprint scanner. Why all the security?

The doors slid open with a “whoosh” sound and all six men entered the room. Daniel had to shut his mouth, once he realized that it was hanging open. The room was a replica of a command module, only much larger. There was a computer console, with at least a hundred or more screens around the walls. Daniel tensed up when he noticed an overseer standing in the far corner. It didn’t move.

“What the hell . . .“

“Not hell Dat, quite the opposite really. Sanctuary.” Bobby smiled.

“What do you mean?” Daniel asked, confused by the comment.

“I checked on your family. They never made it here. No record of them showing up at Alcatraz at any time in the past seven years,” the ambassador revealed, not answering his question.

“So, what happens to people when they do show up to join the resistance?” Daniel asked.

“They’re sent through the green power circles. We can’t have those types running around causing trouble.” Bobby shook his head in disdain.

“What exactly is going on here?” Daniel didn’t like the situation.

“How’s about I fill you in on some missing details. It’s not like you’re leaving here anyways.”  Bobby grinned. “Come over here.”

He led Daniel over to the overseer and said, “May I?”

The red circle on its chest turned from red to green. Bobby reached up and touched a button on the helmet, sliding the face visor open. Daniel stared in disbelief. It was empty!

“Robots?” he questioned, staring at the hollow space, trying to grasp the implications. Segmented body parts and never any blood, now making total sense to him.

“Yes, in the sense that they’re not alive. Yet, a bit more complicated than I have time to explain right now. It suffices that you know that they’re all controlled by the Overlord.” Bobby continued his stunning revelations.

“Overlord?”

“There’s only one Daniel. There has only ever been one. In our language, he calls himself Overlord, and he controls all of the overseers.” Each revelation from the ambassador was more surprising than the last.

“Just one? So . . . you work for him?”

“He came to several world leaders about a month before the invasion. He showed us things, revealing that we had no chance to resist him. Then he offered sanctuaries to us as ambassadors. It was an unfortunate situation commander, but we really had no choice.” The former governor defended his actions.

“So, you built this place?” Daniel asked.

“The Overlord picked the location, but yes, I had thirty days to get this place renovated and to move key people here.”

“How many key people?” Daniel was firing off questions at will.

“The Overlord allowed a thousand. He provides us with food, as well as fuel for the large generators.”

“So, you saved your friends,” Dat scowled.

“Friends? Hell, no, who has friends in politics. I brought a few family members, but most of the people here are doctors, engineers, military men, and experts. You know, the type of people who can keep this place running.”

Daniel stared at the weak man in disbelief, saying, “You had choices. You were governor of millions. You could’ve warned the state. Hell, you could’ve warned the country and the world. Instead, you sit here and turn over anyone who wants to fight.”

“There was no fight option, Commander Dat. Come over here and let me show you what happens to any who show disobedience,” Bobby said, walking over to the computer console, where he placed his right hand on one of the black pads. He pushed a button with his left, and twenty of the screens flashed to life. Eight held pictures of empty rooms similar to the one that they were in, while twelve were fuzzy.

“Pad doesn’t run by fingerprints. It’s a DNA scanner. Checks your sweat,” Bobby offered. “Anyways, this is the link to the original twenty sanctuaries. Any slight failure to follow the Overlord’s orders have resulted in immediate destruction. Tokyo went down just last week for housing 1,001 people. Now, there’re only eight sanctuaries left.”

Daniel studied the screens. There was one showing their room, plus one marked Block Island, Rhode Island, that was now fuzzy. The active sanctuaries were marked Isle of Man, Gozo Island, Palm Jumeirah, Dzaoudzi Island, Isla Hermite, Flinders Island, and Sung Kong. Each of those screen views showed that the similar rooms were empty at this hour.

“We hold electronic meetings though these rooms once a month,” Bobby advised. “So now, how about I show you something that you’ll like.”

He typed in Daniel’s full name and the man’s entire life history came up, to include his parents’ names, all previous addresses and schools, and hospital information. It interestingly listed him as the leader of the Oakland Clan and the resistance. Several photos of him flashed on various screens, including a fairly recent one from when his clan had attacked the first overseer column at Merritt College.

It was obviously a drone picture and had large red letters across it reading “WANTED”. The rest of the pictures went all the way back to baby photos. Plus, a couple from his old orchard pod.

“Who else would you like to see?” Bobby smiled at him.

“Andrea,” he whispered, but when the governor punched her name in, nothing came up. The same for his children.

“What does that mean?” he asked.

“The Overlord only provides us with limited access. Some people don’t come up.”

“Jillian Johnson,” Daniel said.

After Bobby typed, Jillian’s life history popped up, followed by numerous photos. Some were from her stripper days, causing Bobby to whistle. Over the most recent photo was large green letters that read “COMPLIANT”.

Daniel debated if it was wise to check any more of his people, but figured that the enemy already knew who they were, so maybe it was a good idea to see just how much this Overlord knew. Daniel had the ambassador check several others. Hambone and Tiny both shown as bounty hunters, with red “NON-COMPLIANT” banners over them.

Olivia Reyes came up as a member of the Oakland Clan, but there wasn’t much more. The governor interjected, “The Oakland Clan has been a huge thorn in our side for years.”

“If the overseers’ aren’t alive, then they obviously aren’t afraid of the sewers and tunnels. So why haven’t they transported in and finished them off?” Daniel questioned, curiously.

“I wish that they could’ve exterminated those rats a long time ago, but they can’t. The overseers operate by some type of signal from the Overlord. It doesn’t reach them underground. If they transported in, then they would become nonfunctional.” Bobby scowled his disapproval. “For all of his highly-advanced technology, he still can’t get his forces underground.”

This guy is such a low-life piece-of-shit scumbag. Robert Rogers noticed that Daniel was frowning at him and said, “You don’t like me much, do you?”

“I don’t like you at all. You were a weak man before the invasion and you’re a weak man now. That is why the Overlord picked you as an ambassador. He knew that you’d roll over and play his game. Now you hide in your fake kingdom while the world is dying out there. They’re taking everything. Why don’t you ask this Overlord why he’s raping our planet?”

“Why don’t you ask him yourself, Commander? He wants to see you,” the ambassador revealed. “I’m sure that he’ll have better answers for you than I would. Of course, I thought that you should’ve been recycled, but he’s the boss.”

With that, the man nodded at the overseer. A moment later a green power circle opened in the floor next to Daniel. The overseer’s chest circle turned back green, and it came over and searched the commander.

“The last time that I went into one of these, I ended up completely naked in a room full of strangers.” Daniel said with a grimace.

“The circles can have different settings. Those didn’t allow anything but flesh to pass through. This one does allow objects through. The green power circles are two-way. None of the other colors are. Time to go commander. This is what you came for. He will have answers about your little family. This isn’t the time to get light in the loafers. It’s the opportunity of a lifetime. You’re about to meet an alien!"

Daniel closed his eyes and thought, Here goes everything. The Oakland Clan leader stepped into the circle. With a fizzle, he was gone.


Chapter 23
The Overlord

By Douglas Goff

The Overlord had a head over twice the size of that of a man’s. Its body size and shape were more comparable to that of a human’s. It was hairless and had dark purple veins running in various directions under its light purple skin.

The eyes were a deep amber color with black pupils, reminding Daniel of cats’ eyes. The alien’s mouth was round like a circle, and not flattened out like that of a human. Still, none of this was as disturbing as the hands.

They looked normal all the way until the fingers, where tentacles started.  No knuckles or bones, just wavy tentacles, and there were not just ten. Each hand had at least twenty of the worm-like extensions on them. The tentacles freaked Daniel out because they were continuously moving about, touching the buttons on the console in front of the creature.

“Daniel Allen Taylor. Come forward.” The Overlord’s lips never moved.

Daniel just heard the voice in his head. He made his way farther into the round room from where the circle had transported him. Thankfully, he had his clothes on. The overseer from back on earth appeared in the power circle, stepping out right before the green ring disappeared. The transport circle lasted only ten seconds from the time that Daniel had arrived.

Daniel moved even farther into the room, which was perfectly round, with black walls. On the walls were a honeycomb design with various sizes of hexagons across the entire surface of the circular room. He couldn’t see a door anywhere. The whole place felt alien.

The Overlord was sitting at a console in the center of the room. His chair was black and looked somewhat spongy. The console was flat, and had no screens on it. Just hundreds of tiny, unmarked buttons. The numerous tentacles were resting on several of them. The only other thing notable was a black tube hanging near the Overlord’s face. It dropped down from the dark ceiling.

“Are you a God?” Daniel asked.

“Primitives conclude this. But no, I have an expiration, as do you Daniel Allen Taylor,” the voice said in his head. It was smooth, and methodical, yet also alien.

“Why did you come here? Why did you invade us?” Dat exclaimed.

“Invade? No invade. We are symbiotic. Namuh and Quid,” the Overlord said in his mind.

“I don’t understand. Namuh? Symbiotic? You crushed our world.” Daniel frowned, knowing that it was important to keep control of his anger.

            “You are Namuh. That was the original name of your race. You came from planet Namuh 1, very far from your planet, Namuh 12,973, or Earth as you named it. We are Quid. Namuh and Quid are symbiotic.”

“We were Namuh? Not from Earth?” Daniel was confounded, feeling like his brain was struggling to grasp what the Overlord was saying.

With certainty,” the voice sounded. “Namuh is the reverse of your word ‘human.’ Your race works the name Namuh into a language on every planet. Subconsciously, you have never forgotten who you really are. You were once a lazy, peaceful race that lacked motivation or drive. Your planet was over-populated, yet you continued to produce offspring at incredible rates.”

“Then you Quid came?” Daniel guessed.

“With Certainty. We had been symbiotic with a race called the Zohr. They were a hairy simian-like race. They were also very violent and paired mates only produced an offspring every four rotations of their sun. Inefficient,” the voice explained. “We implanted the Zohr on a series of planets, but the majority of times they would merely wipe each other out in wars and infighting. Inefficient.”

“Let me guess. You Quid replaced the Zohr with us Namuh,” Dat said, starting to see the big picture.  

“With certainty. Your race produce offspring at an incredible rate. Namuh females could birth in each rotation of your sun. Still, you were lazy, so we Quid made adjustment to your DNA,” the Overlord stated.

“Adjustments? What kind of adjustments?” Daniel wasn’t sure that he wanted the answer.

“We added in small amounts of Zohr DNA. It took several adjustments, but with their violence and hatred, combined with your reproduction capacity, we came up with the perfect symbiotic race,” the voice in his head explained.

Daniel shook his head. “You keep using the word symbiotic. How do you see it that way?”

“With certainty we Namuh and Quid are symbiotic. We have implanted your race on thousands of planets where you thrive. Namuh are now the most populated race in the known universe. Your people thrive for several generations before the harvest,” the Overlord voice answered.

“Harvest?” Daniel questioned.

Unavoidable. Once your people have nearly depleted a planet’s resources, we come and take them. Then we implant your offspring on a new world. With certainty, your DNA never ends. Sometimes we harvest early if you Namuh are about to destroy yourselves, or are about to reach advanced technology or space travel. Sometimes adjustments are needed on the DNA mixes. With certainty, we are Symbiotic,” the voice reasserted its claim.

“Our DNA may not end, but we do. You cause that,” Dat accused.

The Overlord took the tube hanging by its head into his mouth and sucked on it, then tentacled a few buttons on the console before the voice returned, This is your original DNA provider from Namuh 1. He was called Sardu, and was a leader amongst the Namuh people, Daniel Allen Taylor.”

On one of the big hexagon squares on the wall, the image of a face popped up. It was some type of advanced viewing screen. Daniel’s mouth fell open as he stared at the oval head with large black eyes and dark skin. He was looking at one of the “grays” that people often claim to dream about.

Somehow the long-lost relatives of the human race had remained in their subconscious minds. Supposedly this Sardu was a relative of his from thousands of generations ago. He wanted to believe that the Overlord was lying, but staring at the face, he somehow knew that he was not.

The Overlord spread his tentacles across the console board and pushed several more of the buttons. Every hexagon in the honeycomb designed room flashed alive with different faces, looking more and more human as they went on. The whole room was screens. They kept flashing through face after face, spanning generations.

“Daniel Allen Taylor these are your DNA donators throughout the generations that our races have been symbiotic. With each adjustment, the race of Namuh shows slight physical changes. With certainty, you will live forever,” the voice was back in his head.

“That is why I was with Number Seven? To impregnate her so that you could send my unborn child to a new Earth . . . or, Namuh?” he asked.

With certainty,” the voice continued. “But you were with Number Sevens, Daniel Allen Taylor. DNA screening provided that the best type of females for you to mate with were category number seven.”

“How many number sevens?” Daniel was trying to wrap his mind around the implications of what he was hearing.

The Overlord took another sip from the tube hanging from the ceiling and tentacled a few more buttons. The familial faces disappeared, replaced by ten female faces in ten of the smaller hexagon screens.

“In the seven of your earth years since we began to harvest Namuh 12, 973, you have impregnated nine number sevens. They all carry offspring with your DNA. Once the adjustment process has completed on the fetuses, then they will be implanted on Namuh 23, 852, starting another cycle,” the Overlord revealed.

“Nine?” Daniel was nearly speechless, staring at the ten women, nine of whom he had no recollection of.

With certainty. The last Number Seven that you remember was only with you for three weeks. It was inefficient that she was expended,” the voice sounded cold, although it hadn’t changed in tone much since their conversation had begun.

“Three weeks? Impossible. I remember being with her for over six years.” Daniel struggled with what he was being told, then remembering that she had just been on vacation before his “awakening.” How could he have forgotten that?  This creature’s tarty fruit drink packed some kind of whallop!

“The memories that you have were implanted. You were with the last Number Seven for three weeks before she was inefficiently expended,” the Overlord reiterated.

“You mean murdered,” Daniel said with a hint of anger in his own voice, unsure of how any of this was possible.

Expended, the voice in his head repeated.

“What happens to the pregnant mothers? Do you expend them as well.” Daniel was afraid to hear the answer.

“They are implanted on new Namuh planets with their offspring, only they are banded like your so-called seekers. They are programmed with one sole mission. To protect their young. Still, many of the implants are killed by the native creatures on each planet, but eventually another new Namuh world begins,” the Overlord advised. Expedient and symbiotic.”

“Creatures? On each planet?” Daniel was once again stunned by what he was learning in such a short span of time. His brain felt like it was going to overload.

“With certainty, yet different classifications on each world. We implanted on Namuh 6,732, where there was a desert creature that dwelled in the sand. We Quid had missed it with our surface scans. The beasts wiped out our entire implantation subjects. Such an inefficient waste.” The Overlord shook his large bald head

“Yet you ‘expend’ millions of Namuh people with each harvest. Why don’t you just mine the planets yourself?” Daniel asked, incredulous at what he was hearing.

“Unavoidable losses, but acceptable expenditures for the harvest,” the Overlord voice coldly answered, then explained, Quid females reproduce at a rate of one offspring every four hundred or so of your earth years. This does not allow for much population growth. Plus, Quid are more cerebral while Namuh are more physical. It would not be expedient for Quid alone to implant new planets nor harvest them. Symbiotic,” the alien voice answered.

“Where do the seekers come from? How do they fit into the plan?” Daniel asked, happy to change the subject, believing that the subject was moot since the Overlord was the only Quid left.

“DNA tests show that some of you are overly violent and aggressive. They become your so-called seekers. Also, the infertile males, as well as troublemakers. It would be inefficient to expend them. Their minds are wiped clean. All are programmed with one primary focus, and work efficiently to complete the harvest,” the Overlord revealed.

“Wiped clean? Can they ever come back?” Daniel’s mind struggled to grasp the horror of a mind wipe.

“Inefficient. They never come back. With certainty they work solely for the harvest,” the Overlord explained.

“And after the harvest is complete?” Daniel asked. “Do you ‘expend’ everyone who is left?”

Inefficient. There is no need to do anything. Within a generation, or maybe two, a depleted and dying Namuh world will expend itself.” The answer chilled Daniel.

“And the seekers? What happens to them, after they fulfill their primary function.” Curiosity was driving the man’s questioning.

“When we mind wipe them, we heightened their sense of smell. They are programmed to smell two things, at great distances. One is their primary collection item. The second is Namuh. Once they have completed their collection task, then they seek out the only remaining thing that they smell and destroy it. An expedient and efficient use of resources.”

“So that is how we really become extinct.” Daniel realized.

“In a generation. Two at the most,” the alien answered.

“Yet you are now killing us with the red beams. That doesn’t seem efficient,” Daniel pointed out.

“The harvest is more than halfway complete. The need for further seekers and pod workers is waning. Expediently expended.”

“I saw what’s inside of your overseer suits. Robots. Yet, you keep saying ‘we’. Just how many Quid are there?” Daniel inquired with great curiosity, happy to change the subject again.  

“Overseers are not robots. I am symbiotic with them, so they are an extension of me.”

“Still, you say ‘we’,” he pressed.

There were seven Quid just a few hundred years ago. Six males and a female. We were competing for the same Namuh type planets with the same Namuh subjects. It was inefficient. I called a plenum to discuss the inefficiency of the situation. When they arrived, I expended the other males.”

“Yet, you still say ‘we’?” Daniel continued his line of questioning.

The Quid took another long suck on the tube then pushed a single button in front of him. Immediately Daniel’s ten former lovers disappeared, and a female version of the Overseer appeared on the largest hexagon. The only way that he would have known that she was female was from the one single breast in the center of her chest.

The female alien was in a glass tube floating in a transparent liquid. It looked somewhat like clear oil. A tube from above was extending into the liquid and was resting in her mouth. She looked dead.

“Is she ‘expended’ as well?” Daniel couldn’t take his eyes off the oddity displayed before him.

My mate is suspended in an unanimated state. I placed her there after I implanted her with my offspring. I have lived for eons and eons and my culmination is nearing. My son will be birthed in a little over twenty of your earth years. I will train him to continue the symbiotic relationship with Namuh, so as to implant more worlds,” the Overlord voice informed him.

“Still doesn’t explain why you froze the old lady.” Daniel would have laughed at his pun if he weren’t so shocked right now.

“In this manner she will not age much at all, thusly providing my son and other future Quid with a mate when the time eventually comes. It is efficient,” the voice said.

“Not for her,” Daniel quipped.

It is with certainty that your primitive mind does not understand. We are symbiotic because it is efficient,” the Overlord voice simply stated.

It’s with certainty that I do understand,” Daniel said sarcastically. “You took a peaceful race. You fiddled with their DNA and created a more aggressive breeder slave people that you place on planets to dig up the minerals. Once they’ve depleted the planet, you come and harvest the goods. You expend the children and the very old. You pair the survivors up to mate, then take the pregnant women and start all over again. Does that about sum it all up?”

“With certainty. Symbiotic,” the Overlord said.

“So how many planets do you have implanted now?” Daniel kept his questions coming, not sure how long the Overlord would allow him to continue his interrogation.

The Overlord took another deep draw on his tube and began running his tentacles over more buttons. The image of his mate disappeared, and soon all of the hexagon screens were filled with pictures of various planets.

Daniel surprisingly noted that all had water, although some had only one land mass, while others had numerous continents. The Quid pushed another single button and all the screens filled with new planets. He did this six more times. There must have been thousands of planets.

We are always harvesting a few planets at a time, as the process can take many of your earth years. At the same time, my main force is always being prepared to start the submission process on the next developed planet. Expedient,” the Overlord shared.  

When Dat didn’t fire off another question, the Overlord did, So many inquires Daniel Allen Taylor, yet you still have not asked why you are here.”

“Fair enough. Why am I here?” the man asked.

“I wish to be symbiotic with you Daniel Allen Taylor,” the voice revealed.

“On our first date?” Daniel joked, more out of nervousness than anything else.

“I need you to deliver to us the clans that you have brought into dissention,” the Overlord advised.

“Betray them?” Daniel asked.

“Deliver them to be expended,” the Quid explained.

“Now why would I do that? They’re my friends.” Dat shook his head in disgust.

“Because I have that which you desire most,” the Overlord advised.

“You’ve destroyed my world. You have nothing that I want,” Daniel spat out in disdain.

The Quid took another sip from his black tube and pushed a few buttons, causing three pictures to show up. One was of Daniel’s beautiful wife, Andrea. The other was the passionate Victoria. The third was the kind and caring Carmen.

Daniel’s heart leapt into his throat as he asked, “Where are they?”

Another sip and some further button pushing and an image of Carmen picking bananas in a pod came up. Also, one of Victoria frozen in a capsule flashed onto a screen. Her face was frozen in a look of shock. The third image caused Daniel’s stomach to tighten and his muscles to tense up in fear. It was Andrea, frozen in another capsule, with a very panicked look on her face.

“What about the little girl, Rosie?” Daniel was afraid to ask.

Rosali Maria DIAZ-Uvalde. Expended,” the voice said.

“And my own two children?” Daniel whispered hoarsely.

All children are expendable. It is efficient,” the voice explained, coldly.

“And my wife is in the tube because she was . . . impregnated?” his voice trembled, with him barely able to control his urge to attack the Overlord.

When we arrived for harvest, she was already implanted. Andrea Angel Taylor carries your offspring,” the voice explained.

Daniel understood the “us” in his dreams now.

“How’d you capture my family?”

The Alcatraz Ambassador turned them over to me.” The answer caused Daniel’s blood to boil even further.

“So, what exactly are you offering me?” the shaken man asked.

“Your race is driven by its urges. The Namuh side of you will deliver your friends to satisfy your mating desires. You may choose one. I will allow you to live with your chosen mate at the Alcatraz Colony,” the Quid made his offer.

“Doesn’t make sense. Surely you have the forces and power to destroy the clans yourself. Haven’t you ever been confronted by a strong resistance before?” Daniel questioned.

“With certainty. We mistakenly allowed Namuh 6 get too advanced. The Namuh there, or Umhan as they called themselves, fought hard. It took eight years and many assets to quell them and their mighty war machines. Fortunately, the Namuh on Namuh 7 had advanced much slower and we Quid had time to replenish. But to bring the main force back here to quell an uprising now would be inefficient. That is why I have brought you here to become symbiotic with my plans,” the alien voice explained.

“And if I say no?”

“I only have a very small fraction of my forces left on your planet. A harvest detachment. If you do not become symbiotic with me, then I will be forced to send the main invasion force back to Namuh 12,973, and smash the rebellious planet, losing much efficiency in the process.”

“Then return all three of them,” Daniel begged, his feelings for the women driving him.

Inefficient. You can only mate so much. Pick one Daniel Allen Taylor,” the voice said.

It would be Andrea. Not just because he would be saving his unborn child as well, but because she was the love of his life. It would always be Andrea.

“Give me my wife,” he said. “Not because I need to mate. I choose her because of love.”

“Love? Did you experience bouts of love when you stopped the control drink? No, you experienced real emotions Daniel Allen Taylor. Anger, joy, sadness, guilt, fear, and lust. Love is a made up Namuh emotion. It does not exist.”

“Just give me my wife back,” Daniel stated firmly, not wanting to debate the philosophy of love with an alien tyrant.

Then we are now symbiotic?” the Overlord asked.

“We are,” Daniel whispered, a tear running down his cheek.

“I will send you back now, the Overlord said. “You will bring the resistance forces to the place you call the Eastmont Town Center in your city of Oakland. You will do this within seven sunrises on your planet. My forces will do the rest. Andrea Angel Taylor will be delivered to you once they are there. Deliver each of the resisting clans to me or I will expend Andrea Angel Taylor and your unborn offspring. That includes Oakland, Frisco, and the ones who ride the equine creatures.”

The Overlord took a long drink from his straw and pushed a button. All of the occupied screens disappeared, and one flashed a new image of the Sacramento Clan Complex Gate, with his own horse warriors exiting. “You will also deliver the Sacramento Clan.”

Daniel grimaced. This damn alien knows everything.

“It will be done, but one last question if I may? What do you do with all of these minerals, metals, and items that you harvest. I mean it’s just you really. Why do you need all this stuff?” Daniel asked, more out of curiosity than anything.

“I make things. Invent. Create. Efficiently. Perhaps in your terms, we Quids are artist,” the voice relayed.

“Seriously? All of this because you are a tinkerer?” Daniel gasped.

Tinkerer? the Quid voice questioned.

“Disney reference. Oh, never mind.” Daniel frowned.

The Quid Overlord took a long suck on his black tube and pushed a button. Within a second, the image of Sacramento was replaced with several images of Tinkerbell, causing the alien to say, With certainty.”

So, all this is really about more stuff,” Daniel said, sadly shaking his head, wondering if somehow the Quid knew that his nickname for Andrea had been Tinkerbell. “More trinkets, toys, and ships.”

“Ships?” The Quid seemed confused for the first time.

“Yes, spaceships. The ones you used to get to our planet, and the other planets,” Daniel stated.

The Quid pushed more buttons with some of his right-handed tentacles. Three new scenes replaced the Tinkerbells on the largest hexes. One was of a giant pincher arm holding a Chevy Silverado in the air. Below it were thousands of vehicles in a giant pile. Other pinchers were removing tires and plastic and metals from the hanging Silverado, dropping them down various chutes.

The second was of metal parts dropping from several chutes into a huge smelting type bowl, where the items were melting. The third screen showed liquid metals flowing down a chute, where it mixed with an odd white and bluish liquid that then flowed down another chute into a form that was in the shape of an overseer.

“I am not at your planet, nor any other Namuh world, Daniel Allen Taylor. We are millions of light years away from your earth. Right now, you are on my home planet, in the only environment available here. This is the only installation. Everything is created here. It is the optimum of efficiency. With certainty, there are no ships. There have never been any ships. Primitive inefficient concept. With the power circles, distance has no meaning. We Quid never have need to leave our home world. That would be inefficient.”

A long skinny tentacle from the Overlord’s right hand slithered up to the far top right button on the console and pushed it, opening a green power circle next to Daniel. The tentacles on the left hand had never stopped moving about pushing buttons during their entire conversation. The creature was a master multi-tasker.

“With certainty, our meeting has come to a successful conclusion Daniel Allen Taylor. You now understand that we are symbiotic,” the Quid Overlord’s voice in his head stated.

“With certainty.” Dat smiled and stepped into the green power circle. With a fizzle, and in a heartbeat of time, he was back home on Namuh 12, 973.

Author Notes This chapter was hard to write as I wanted to annotate the Overlord's mind voice differently than Daniel's so I wasn't sure if it should be italicized or bolded. I went with italicized, but then couldn't use that for Daniel's thoughts. Perhaps one of the FS grammar gurus can straighten me out?


Chapter 24
The End Game

By Douglas Goff

Commander Dat stared at the faces sitting around the table. Olivia, Jilly, Hambone, Tiny, Sterns, and Tiana were all there. Also in attendance were their three captains, Barbara, Kenneth, and Juan Carlos. He knew that these people trusted him with their lives. He just wasn’t sure how far he could push that trust.

“Let me start by saying that we’re not fighting an army. We’re fighting one alien.”

“One?” Several of them gasped in disbelief and confusion.

“We’ve all seen and fought many overseers. You yourself have killed many, commander.” Tiana shrugged. “What’re you talking about?”

Daniel held up his hands, saying, “Let me lay it all out for you guys, then you can hit me with your questions. There’s only one. He calls himself the Overlord. The people at Alcatraz work for him and sent me to see him through a power circle.

The Overlord isn’t even here. He controls everything from his home world. The overseers are some kinda super-advanced robots that he’s in mental connection with. They don’t come down into the tunnels because he loses that connection underground. I’m not sure why the communication travels through so much space, but not through ground.”

Daniel walked back and forth with his hands on his hips, wondering just how much he should relay. Honesty seemed to usually work best, especially with friends.

“This thing planted us on the earth. Once we spent generations creating and building and digging up the resources, it returned to reap the benefits of our labor. We’re nothing more than worker ants to this Overlord, to be used as he sees fit. It’s emotionless and meticulous, concerned only with efficiency and its own goals and purpose. It’s cold and efficient. The concepts of sympathy, empathy, or love are foreign to it. The Overlord will show no mercy and his end game is the death of our world.”

When Daniel finished, Olivia spoke, “Okay, well , , , that sucks. So, what do we do? Seems like taking out the overseers won’t accomplish much. We have to get to this Overlord, but with all his technology, can we even kill him?”

“It’s true that he is more advanced than us, but not really by far. He uses plastic, rubber, and metal just like us, even if his is much stronger. And he breaths the same air, and can die just like us,” Daniel assured them.

“It doesn’t add up,” Sterns shook his head, “Why not have his robots dig up minerals that he needs.”

“This creature likes to be master. He calls us primitives. He has an incredible superiority complex feeding his giant ego. I think that the Overlord likes to play God.” Daniel shrugged, sharing his opinion.

“Same question.” Olivia frowned. “What do we do?”

“Dat has a plan. He always does,” Hambone said. “So lay it on us, Commander.”

“Yes, I do have a plan, but you guys aren’t going to like it,” the clan leader sighed. “In order to win this thing, we have to take out the Overlord. I need all four of our groups to go to the Eastmont Town Center here in Oakland within six days. Oakland Clan, Frisco Clan, Sacramento Clan, and the Horse Clan.”

“Alright! We’re going to launch a major attack!” Tiny exclaimed.

“No, quite the opposite. You’re going to be attacked,” Daniel revealed. “The Overlord requested that I turn ya’ all over in exchange for my wife.”

“Daniel!” Olivia gasped while others shook their heads, with more still frowning.

“Just wait,” Daniel raised his hands again to silence them. “Once you are there, I’ll be in Alcatraz waiting for Andrea to arrive. When she does, I’m going to go kill the Overlord. That should end this. But I can’t get to him if you guys don’t agree to bring your entire clans to Eastmont as bait.”

“Everybodys? Even womens and childrens?” Juan Carlos asked.

“Everybody,” Daniel answered.

“What if you fail?” Jilly asked what everyone in the room was contemplating.

“Then we’re all dead,” their leader simply stated, refusing to sugar-coat it.  

Daniel’s last comment caused the room to erupt in discussions that quickly led to arguments. He let it go on for a bit, gathering his thoughts, before he silenced them.

“Look, I know that I’m asking a lot of you. Using you all as bait is the last thing that I ever wanted to do, but this isn’t just about you, me, or us. There are thousands of worlds implanted with our race by this Overlord. A few are being harvested like us, right now. Other planets have already been obliterated, while the rest are just waiting for the Overlord to come and destroy them at his will. If we manage to pull this off, we aren’t only saving the remnants of our planet. We will be saving billions of lives.”

Daniel paced back and forth again, letting those words sink in, then finished with, “We have come a long way together. Many of you have put your trust and lives in my hands more than a few times. I’m asking you to do it one more time. One more time for the win. So, I need to know who is with me?”

This caused a long silence, where several people let out deep sighs. Daniel thought about saying more, but he remained quiet, giving them time to mull over the entirety of what he was asking. Finally, Olivia spoke.

“Oakland Clan is in. I trust you, Commander Dat. You won’t let us down.”

He smiled at her, then Jillian spoke, “Well, who would’ve ever thought that a stripper would be given a chance to help save billions. Sacramento Clan is behind you, although I don’t relish the thought of your wife returning and taking you away from me.”

“Well, the Frisco Clan is a mess. Won’t be losing much if we get blown to pieces. Count us in.” Tiana’s declaration sent all eyes on Juan Carlos.

“Geez, I just becames a captain,” he chuckled. “Ah hell. We’re all dyings anyways. Might as well happens in Oakland during a magnificent and glorious last stands battle! Only this times, we Mexicans will be the Alamo! Let’s do it.”

With that they were decided. Commander Dat briefed them on the details of his plan. They all agreed that it was their best shot. Everyone headed off to prepare for their upcoming roles because there was much to be done. That is everyone except Dat, Hambone, Paco, and Captain Kenneth from the survivalist compound. They went and took naps.

The four men headed out on horseback, right as the sun reached the middle of the sky, leading riderless horses with them. As the four horsemen rode, Daniel couldn’t help but feel like they were ringing in Armageddon from Revelations in the bible.

Their target was just over fifty miles to the northeast. Daniel was leading them back to Fairfield. They needed to make that distance by morning, so they took Interstate 80 at a good pace.

The only time they stopped was when Paco spotted an approaching drone. They used the occasion to switch out horses. Once the drones passed, the group continued at a trot. Dat’s second horse was Ocioso, who gave him no trouble. She was a good horse. The men reached Fairfield a bit before dawn, and arrived at their target a half hour later.

Travis Airforce Base sat just east of the actual city of Fairfield. The base had been staffed by 15,000 military and civilian employees, so wasn’t considered large by comparison to other California bases.

There was a medical center on base, but more important, it housed the 60th Air Mobility Wing, largest air group of the Air Mobility Command. Air mobility units were used by the air force to transport supplies and personnel all over the world. This base focused primarily on the Middle East.

Daniel led his three partners through the destroyed front gate, past some large buildings, and straight to the headquarters building. They found several piles of clothes outside of the front doors. After dismounting, Daniel dug through the piles and pulled out access cards on lanyards, that probably had hung around the victim’s necks.

“Look for these cards and bring me any that you find. We are looking for a specific one,” he ordered, dropping the two that he had picked up. “It belongs to the base general. It should be in, or around this building.”

The base had no visible seeker damage, although it was apparent that looters had been there. None of the clothing piles had weapons, although many had holsters. For about forty-five minutes, Kenny, Paco, and Hambone brought various badges to Daniel, but he discarded each one.

“Over here!” Kenneth shouted from a nearby parking lot.

Daniel went over and saw the survivalist digging through a pile of belongings in a driver eat of the car. “Got it!” he said, holding up a scan card that identified the man as General Richardson.

It was the card that Daniel wanted. The men mounted up and rode out onto the runway. Here they found overseer damage. Huge, charred marks and blown-up planes littered the tarmac. Daniel passed by all of that, as well as the major hangers.

Their commander led them to a series of non-descriptive aluminum buildings that looked like maintenance facilities, where Daniel dismounted. Here, the men saw their first seeker, prying on the aluminum siding on one of the hangars.

The bald man was tossing the aluminum sheets into a brown power circle that was open behind him. The group dismounted, and Kenneth walked up behind the seeker and put a bullet in the back of its head with his .44 Magnum.

Daniel approached the hangar next to the damaged one, which had a padlock on it, along with a sign that read “Runway Supply Building.”  The commander pulled out his .357 and shot the lock which stayed on.

“That only works on tv,” Kenneth said, and grabbing the dead seeker’s pry bar, he managed to tear the lock off. Paco and Daniel slid the two huge double doors open. 

Just behind the sliding doors was a large bunker that stood about twenty feet high. The bunker had a normal sized steel door with a scan pad beside it. The entire aluminum building was concealing the bunker within. On the steel door read “Authorized Personnel Only. This is a Restricted Area.”

Daniel pulled out the general’s card and inserted it into the scan pad. The three red lights on the pad turned green and the steel door slid open. Daniel told Kenneth, “Go check the other hangars to see if they hold anything of value.”

The remaining three men entered the bunker. Daniel flipped a switch and to his companion’s surprise, lights came on. “Solar. The lights and scan pads are all powered from cells on the roof.”

 The bunker held row after row of weapons, causing both of his companions to let out low whistles. Various armaments from M-4 assault rifles to 9mm pistols lined the numerous metal gun racks.  There were also stacks of crates marked as various types of grenades and rockets.

“This isn’t even the good shit.” Daniel walked past all the shelves to another fenced in area at the very back of the bunker. They had to pry off a second lock there. Inside were more crates and a large metal square cabinet, that looked to be about the size of a bank vault.

 Daniel searched around the caged area until he found two long rifle cases. “We’ll need these,” he said, handing both to Hambone to carry up to the front of the hangar.

Daniel pulled out the general’s card again, and explained, “A handful of the other cards would have gotten us this far into the bunker, but this’s the only card that can open the special weapons vault.”

With that, Daniel stuck it in a card pad on the side of the cabinet and with a hum and a click, he was able to open the door. Inside were several metal briefcases with keypads on them and digital screens. Daniel looked at a couple, and then grabbed one marked “TH-B662-04.” He exited the special weapons box, and closed it back up.

Now the men just needed to grab an assortment of other weapons to help their cause. Unfortunately, the horses could only carry so much weight, but at least they still had extra mounts that they could pack up.

When they made their way back to the front of the bunker, Kenneth came in excited, sweat glistening on his bald head. “Come on guys, you gotta see this!”

They followed the muscular man to a nearby hangar, where he showed them a completely intact Bell UH-1 Huey. For an old chopper, it looked to be in great shape. Kenneth ran up to it and slid the side door open, showing them the interior.

“Must have been one of the ranking officers ‘pet’ projects,” Daniel guessed. “Sure wish we had a pilot.”

“You do!” Kenneth exclaimed. “I flew one of these babies back in the day. If I can get her fired up, then we could take her. Shouldn’t take much. These babies could fly through think and thin.”

“I can co-pilot. I flew a traffic chopper after I got out of the military. I think that I could handle this one as well,” Hambone offered. “Holy shit, Dat. We could take a lot of these much-needed guns back! We should’ve come got these sooner.”

“It was in the works. I just wasn’t sure how we’d transport such a load, and food always seemed to be the more important priority,” the commander answered.

“Well, now we have a way.” Kenneth seemed excited. “We’ll probably need to fly this baby during the day though, so I can see where we’re going and so’s our lights don’t attract too much attention.”

“What about the horses?” Hambone asked. “It would suck to lose eight beauties like these.”

“We could have Paco take the horses back,” Kenneth suggested.

“Okay, let’s do that. We’re all tired, so we’ll sleep the rest of today. Tonight, Kenneth’ll work on getting this bird running while the rest of us’ll load the Huey with weapons. At first light, Paco will head back with the horses, and we’ll take off in the chopper,” Daniel instructed.

When the group stepped back out onto the tarmac, a red power circle nearly struck Daniel, fired from a drone. The sky was full of them, maybe twenty. The three men retreated back into the relative safety of the Huey hangar.

Two drones managed to follow the men in before Kenneth and Hambone were able to slide the hangar door shut. “Rat . . . tat, tat, tat . . . rat, tat, tat, tat, rat, tat, tat, tat, tat!” Paco unloaded a full mag of M-4 rounds into them, sending both flying machines smashing to the ground in smoking heaps.

The four men pulled on hoods with eye holes that they had in their packs. They had made them for just such occasions. They couldn’t have drone photos revealing them to the Overlord and destroying their plans.

“They have us trapped boss,” Hambone said.

“Eighteen drones are too many to attack out into,” Kenneth surmised.

Paco spoke some very fast, excited Spanish, seeming to agree with them.

“I need to get back over to the bunker and get a weapon that can take them out,” Daniel told them.

“It’s a good forty yards,” Kenneth advised.

“We won’t make it half that!” Hambone scoffed.

Again, Paco was speaking fast and with excitement.

“Maybe you three can hit the drones at the front while I make a break for it out the back,” their leader suggested.

“I’m sure that they’ll have all sides covered, boss,” Hambone assumed.

“No doubt. We have to be smart about this,” Kenneth added.

Mira! Mira! Mira!” Paco was yelling and pointing now.

“What’s he saying?” Daniel asked.

“He’s pointing at those barrels . . . oh my . . . he’s right! We can use those barrels to get out of here. They’re full of oil.” Hambone ran over and inspected them. There were at least eight full oil barrels lined along the wall, plus two with fuel.  

“We’re going to need a lighter,” Daniel said.

Paco flipped his thumb igniting a flame, showing that he already held one in his closed fist. He had a huge grin on his face, exposing his two golden teeth. Daniel walked over and warmly slapped the Hispanic man on the back. He was really starting to like this fella.

They rolled the oil barrels over to the hangar door and stuffed rags into the small holes that were on each of the lids. While Paco lit each one, the other three men slid the door slightly open and rolled them out. Within seconds, the sky was filled with rolling plumes of black smoke, because oil burned dirty.

The men gave the burning oil some time to spill into puddles on the tarmac and watched while the huge streams of billowing black smoke blocked out the sun. No worries about alerting anyone as to their presence, the enemy was already here.

The four men left the bunker in a tight diamond formation, with Daniel at the point. They were hacking and gagging by the time that they reached the weapon’s bunker, but at least they didn’t encounter any drones.

When the wind shifted about an hour later, the four men exited the bunker in a line. Each carried a belt fed M60 machine gun with long ammunition belts dragging along the ground behind them. The drones started to come in fast, when the gun-toting warriors opened up.

All four men shook while the powerful weapons chewed through and spitting out the belt fed rounds. After about fifteen seconds, all four M60’s fell silent, their bullets spent and their chambers smoking. The eighteen drones had been shot to pieces. The hooded men went back into the weapon’s bunker and Daniel secured the iron door.

The group slept the rest of the day. That night, after making sure that the tarmac was clear, they got to work. Kenneth worked on the helicopter while the other three loaded it with weapons and grenades. Daniel secured the TH-B662-04 case under one of the rear seats, along with the two rifle cases that he had initially grabbed. The men had finished in just half the night.

After securing the special weapon’s bunker, they went to the chopper and waited for morning. Captain Kenneth had easily got the chopper running. It was in great condition. He had also hooked up a runway tractor to the platform dolly that the UH-1 sat upon. He actually had more trouble getting the tractor started than anything. Once that was done, they were ready to go.

“So, how’d you know about this place commander?” Hambone asked. “I thought that you were stationed down south in Camp Pendleton before the war.”

“Yes, I was a member of a small Marine Security Forces Detachment,” Daniel answered. “We escorted special weapons to various bases.”

“Yes, you jarheads always guarded the nukes, or so I heard,” Kenneth interjected, all three of his companions now paying very close attention.

“Not just nuclear weapons. More advanced stuff as well.” Daniel smiled wryly.

“Is that what’s in that metal case that we came for?” Hambone questioned. “Something more advanced?”

“Did you guys ever hear about the Russian briefcase scare in the late 90’s? When our intelligence agencies thought that the commies had lost some of their nukes?” Daniel asked.

“Oh yeah! That was a big deal.” Hambone snapped his fingers. “I read about it. It was believed that they’d lost over a hundred nuclear bombs that were the size of briefcases.”

“Is that what we have Daniel, a nuke?” Kenneth asked, apprehensively eyeing the seat that the case was under.

“No, this isn’t a nuclear authorized base. But the Russian scare got our country thinking, and working. Our weapons scientists developed several briefcase sized weapons in response to the threat.”

“I, for one, am glad that it’s not a nuke. We’d all be glowing by now,” Hambone smirked.

“In our case we have a thermobaric bomb, also called a vacuum bomb. It basically uses the oxygen in the air around it to create an explosion, multiplying the shockwave and overpressure. It crushes a person to death, causing major damage to internal organs, and ruptures the lungs. It also smashes structures. The Overlord breaths oxygen the same us. It’s the perfect weapon to take him and his complex out,” Daniel explained.

“How’d you know it was here?” Kenneth asked.

“I was on the security team that brought it, and a few other items to Travis, just about a month before the invasion. I was hoping and praying that it was still here,” he answered.

“Can’t help but feel that we’re the Four Horsemen of the Apocalypse, carrying that thing around,” Hambone solemnly stated.

“I don’t think that the Bible had them in a chopper.” Daniel chuckled, then added grimly, “Besides, it isn’t our apocalypse that we’re delivering.”

By first light, they were ready to go. Kenneth removed the tiedown straps that secured the helicopter to the platform dolly, and jumped in the tractor and began pulling the chopper out of the hangar, while Hambone started the pre-flight checklist. What none of them expected was the rows of overseers lined up on the tarmac, just on the other side of the still smoking oil patches.

“Get this thing running!” Daniel ordered.

“I’ll try,” Hambone said, while flipping switches and pushing buttons. The craft fired alive, with loud engine noises and a belch of smoke.

When the helicopter was halfway out of the hangar, Kenneth jumped from the moving tractor while red blasts exploded all round him from the enemy batons. He turned to run when a red power circle struck him in the back and enveloped him. With a fizzle, Captain Kenneth Zumbolt was ash.

“It’s on you now Hambone. They just took out Kenneth. Get this bird in the air or we’re going out with him.” Daniel jumped in the now-empty front seat beside the red-haired man.

Paco was on the .50 cal. machine gun that they’d mounted at the door last night, just waiting for a clear shot at the overseers. The propeller was rotating fast now, so Hambone pulled back on the throttle and with a shudder, up she went.

The sound of the .50 cal. exploded in their ears, alerting them that Paco now had a clear shot. The chopper swung along the line of overseers, with Paco screaming out in delight whenever he struck one of the enemy. Red bursts exploded all around the chopper, coming from above!

A cylindrical shaped object, made of the same white material that the pod walls were made from, flew by. It was about the size of the helicopter and had made the blasts from above. It was an overseer airship, like the one that Daniel and Hambone had seen at Chico. Hambone accelerated hard, sending the Huey skimming along ten feet above the ground, straight south.

They were all surprised to see the overseer aircraft, because they were so rare. Paco began exchanging bursts with the pursuing craft. It didn’t fire power rings. It fired red energy blasts, that they knew would blow them from the sky. Hambone weaved the chopper back and forth, keeping it from being struck.

Paco would have been thrown to the earth if he hadn’t smartly put on his safety strap. Several of his rounds struck the enemy craft, but merely bounced off it. Daniel climbed back into the rear of the chopper and popped the latched on one of the crates. He removed a FIM-92 Stinger. These man pads were known as air-to-air rockets and could be fired from choppers.

Daniel had it operational in seconds, and after a near miss from a red blast, he put it on his shoulder, shouting, “Turn!”

When Hambone came around, Daniel had a clear shot at the overseer craft. “Clear!” he shouted once his target acquired indicator locked on, and pulled the trigger.

The heat seeking missile shot out in a puff of smoke. It zeroed in on the alien craft which did no evasive maneuver. The missile exploded on contact, sending the overseer craft spinning towards the earth. They did not see it again.

In about twenty minutes, they were setting down on the Mills College Campus, near their base. Even with the loss of Kenneth and all six horses, the mission had been a success . . . and then some.

Author Notes I enjoyed writing this chapter as I was in Marine Security Forces on a special weapons detail. So, if anything in this chapter makes you say "No way". I say, "Way". Nuff said.


Chapter 25
Children Are Expendable

By Douglas Goff

Warning: The author has noted that this contains the highest level of violence.
Warning: The author has noted that this contains the highest level of language.

It was go time. All the plans and preparations had been made. The clans were on the move towards the Eastmont Town Center, and would be arriving shortly. Daniel couldn’t help but feel that all of the forces in the universe were pushing him towards an inevitable showdown with the Overlord. A showdown that he wouldn’t be returning from.

“What do you mean that you’re not coming back?” Olivia gasped. Just throw the damn bomb into one of the collection circles! You said the Overlord has just one complex.” Daniel had never seen her angry before.

“We don’t know how big his complex is, or how much his super-material will dull the blast. I have to go with the weapon and make sure that the Overlord is in the room when it goes off. We only get one shot at this.”

“Daniel . . .“ Her big tender eyes swelled with tears. “Don’t do this.”

“I have to finish what I’ve started.” He grabbed her hands. “I have to save Andrea. Promise me that you will take care of her.”

“Daniel . . .” She wanted to protest again, but was well aware of his unflinching resolve, so simply said, “Damn it. You know that I will.”

Olivia hugged him tightly and planted a long tender kiss on his lips, saying, “You will come back to us. I know it.” Then they set off.

Daniel and Paco took turns rowing to the old prison island. With the help of the tower lights, Daniel could see the silhouette of the large prison backlit in the light of a full moon. For a second, he shivered, thinking that it looked much like Dracula’s Castle had.

Daniel and Andrea had visited the spooky place while honeymooning in Brasov, Romania. His wife had a strong obsession with old monster movies and the trip had been a surprise for her.

When Daniel and Paco were a hundred yards out, they waited. A “zing” rang out, and with some sparking, the large light on the opposite side of the island went out. A second shot brought on more darkness.

Paco sat on the bench seat of the rowboat and aimed in with one of the two silenced .50 caliber sniper rifles that they had taken from Travis. He zinged off a shot, blowing out the third and final spotlight on the island. Alcatraz was now dark, save a few dim building lights visible here and there.  

Me gusta mucho!” Paco whispered. Daniel didn’t understand his words, but was certain that they had something to do with the man liking the rifle.

The pair rowed the rest of the way to shore, landing on the same small beach that Daniel had landed on before. The clan leader opened one of the two long rifle boxes that he had taken from the special weapons locker at the airbase. Inside were two scoped rifles and several darts.

They were called “snoozers” and were one of the best kept secrets of the United States military. They were real “James Bond” level weapons. The rifles came complete with night optics scopes, and the darts could put a man down for eight hours. Daniel had no intentions of massacring a bunch of civilians and men that they might need later.

The two men could see three sentries at the gate that they had taken Daniel through on his first visit to Alcatraz. In the scope, the guards appeared to be having an animated discussion about the disappearing lights. “Pitthh” sounded from beside the commander, causing one of the men to grab his neck. “Pitthh” came from Daniel’s weapon, hitting the second man.

The third guard, a female, began to spray the beach with fire from her Uzi. Paco hit her with a dart. The guards fell down in a row; one, two, three, like dominoes. Daniel and Paco had to move quickly, now that the sound of gunfire had alerted the other residents of the island. Once Daniel and Paco were through the gate, they could hear several gunshots coming from the other side of the island. The pair rapidly headed straight for the Quartermaster’s Building.

When the two men arrived, they were relieved to see that they were the only ones there. A minute later, they saw four camouflaged men leading Ambassador Robert Rogers towards the building that they were standing in front of. Obviously, he was intent upon warning the Overlord.

Daniel and Paco took aim with their snoozers. “Pitthh” . . . “pitthh” sounded off, followed by two more “pitthhs” from behind the ambassador’s group. All four of the ambassador’s guards fell to the ground. Olivia and Hambone lowered their “snoozers” and came up behind the befuddled island leader and pushed him towards their commander.

Daniel had hated to bring the pregnant woman along, but she had insisted. Olivia had wanted to make sure that things went smoothly.

“If you fail, then we’re all dead anyways,” the young woman had aptly argued. Daniel gave up. When you argued with Major Olivia Reyes, you usually ended up on the losing end.

“What the hell is this all about?” Ambassador Bobby demanded to know, scowling angrily. They ignored his question and led the upset man to the iron key card door.

“Oh, hell no, I’m not going to open that. The Overlord is gonna wipe us all out,” Bobby sniveled.

Daniel sat the bomb case on the floor and slid the general’s card into a slot at the top. After pushing some buttons, a three-minute countdown was displayed on the black panel screen at the top.

“Oh no, Commander Dat. What’s that? What’d you do?” The trembling man was nearly crying now.

“This is a thermobaric vacuum pressure bomb. I set it to go off in just about two minutes and forty-five seconds. When it does, it’s going to suck your internal organs out through all of your orifices. You’ve no time to escape governor. It’ll take out this entire island. There’s only one way to get rid of it now. Get over there and open that door. Once we’re in, you’ll get the Overlord to open a power circle, or we’ll all be dead in just over two minutes,” Daniel calmly explained.

“Shut it down,” the former governor pleaded.

“Not a chance.” Commander Daniel stared at the weak man, unflinching.

Robert Rogers thought for about five seconds, staring at the countdown clock on the black screen of the case. Daniel wasn’t worried, he had known men like Bobby his whole life. There was nothing more important to his personality type than self-preservation. The man would open the door.

But a little encouragement never hurt, Daniel thought as he unsheathed his boot knife. “Don’t think for a second that I won’t rip that access card from around your neck and chop off your hand to gain access.”

The ambassador let out a loud sigh, then placed his hand on the print pad and pulled out his key card, sliding it into the slot. With a “whoosh,” the small group entered the room. Daniel noted that it all looked the same as the last time that he had been here, complete with the overseer in the corner. Bobby Rogers went over to the console and placed his hand on the DNA pad, stating, “He’s here.”

A moment later, a green power circle opened up in the same spot that it had last time. A jumble of thoughts came rushing to Daniel’s mind. He only had a couple of seconds to talk with his long-lost wife, and had planned out a couple of quick sentences, but now his mind was frozen as she came through and stood before him.

It was Andrea, only it wasn’t. He stared horrifyingly at his wife. Her eyes were milky white, and she wore the metal headband of the seekers. Her once beautiful skin looked withered and cracked, apparently from having been frozen for so long. He reached out to touch her, causing her to snarl at him like a rabid dog.

“Six seconds commander. You have to go, before that circle closes,” Olivia advised, her face distressed at his emotional anguish.

“Do you think that this’ll work? I mean if it does, I was always on your side Commander Dat. Make sure your people know that.” Robert Rogers smiled at him, failing to see the mental torment that Daniel was going through.

“It’s under committee review,” Daniel hissed out. With one fluid motion, the traumatized man shoved his combat knife straight into Bobby’s throat.

“That’s for lying to me about my family you piece of shit,” Daniel said. The man fell to the floor gurgling in his own blood. Former California Governor Robert “Bobby” Rogers was no more.

“Four seconds and that circle closes, Daniel. If you are going to do this, you have to go now!” Olivia shouted while the overseer in the corner came to life and began advancing forward, raising its baton. “I’ll take care of Andrea.”

Paco and Hambone began wrestling with the overseer’s arms. Olivia ran and jumped onto the robot machines chest, wrapping her legs around its waist. She pushed the helmet visor button exactly where Daniel had taught her. When the visor spring up, she shoved a fragmentation grenade into the empty face hole.

Daniel didn’t have time to see how that ended, because after taking one last longing look at his mind-erased wife, he dove into the green power circle just before it disappeared. With a fizzle, he was gone!

A second later, Daniel was galaxies away, standing in the Overlord’s room. Daniel set the metal case on the floor and looked at the screen on top of the thermobaric bomb. The red digits continued to count down on the black panel, “30 . . . 29 . . .  28.”

Daniel Allen Taylor, with certainty you should not be here,” the Overlord’s voice was back in his head.

“27 . . . 26 . . . 25”, the countdown continued ticking away the precious seconds.

“With certainty I am here, and this time I brought you a little present, to thank you for mind-wiping my wife, crapping on my planet, and animalizing my race. But to be completely honest, I’m mostly here because I simply don’t like you.”

“24. . . 23 . . .22”

This is not symbiotic Daniel Allen Taylor,” the voice said.

I personally can’t think of anything more symbiotic than you and I exploding into space together.” Daniel looked down at the bomb screen.

“21 . . . 20 . . .19”

What about my species? My mate? My offspring?” the voice rang out in his mind, with the first hint of panic in it. Good, it fears death.

“Children are expendable.” Daniel used the alien’s own words against him.

“18 . . .17 . . .16”

 Death was coming . . . or maybe not. Daniel was running now, straight towards the Overlord and threw himself at the panel. Daniel reached for the top right button that he had watched the Overlord tentacle last time. The creature grabbed the man’s outstretched arm with the tentacles on its right hand. Daniel could feel the wet and slimy worm-like appendages sliding along his arm.

“15 . . . 14 . . . 13”

With one last effort, Daniel shoved his arm forward and pushed the button, opening a green power circle in the same spot that the last one had just closed at. Then something unexpected happened. The Overlord sprang across the counter with a speed that surprised Daniel. More surprisingly, the alien had four large stumpy tentacles, like an octopus, where its legs should have been.

“12 . . . 11 . . .10”

Daniel realized with a sickening feeling that the Overlord was going to try and push the suitcase bomb back through the power circle, where it would kill everyone on Alcatraz. The commander sprang into action with cat like speed. Daniel reached the alien and leapt on its back, just a mere foot from the bomb.

Both man and alien fell to the floor, with the latter still trying to crawl towards the case.

“9 . . .8 . . .7”

Daniel started to slug the Overlord in the back of its large head, realizing that it didn’t have a boney skull. It was moist and spongelike. With each punch, Daniel’s hand sank into the huge head at least four inches deep.

“6 . . . 5 . . .4”

The alien got its left-handed tentacles on the bomb and began sliding it towards the green circle. In one fluid motion Daniel swung his entire body about and landed a well-placed kick on the case, sending it sliding away from the pair of fighting humanoids. When Daniel let go of the Overlord, it scurried after the bomb.

“3 . . . 2 . . .1”

But Daniel could no longer see the countdown. He had rolled into the green power circle, fizzling away, a second before it closed.

                                                        *     *     *

A couple of months later, Major Reyes approached Commander Dat as he sat on the porch of the Commander’s Quarters on Alcatraz, relaying, “Scouts have reported another massive group of seekers coming in from the east. At least five thousand heading towards the Sacramento Colony.”

Olivia had moved into Daniel’s home as soon as they had moved their headquarters to Alcatraz. She had a way of handling him. The intelligent woman knew exactly how to steer Daniel in the best direction, and they were good together. Very good.

He stared into the cute woman’s big brown eyes, knowing that he loved her. Once he came to grips with the fact that his wife’s mind was gone and would never be coming back, he had allowed himself to feel those emotions again.

Daniel rubbed Olivia’s large belly, then looked over at Andrea, who was sporting a similar maternal package. Of course, he could never rub her belly. His former wife was sitting five feet away, which was fine. Any closer, and she would attack. Even though he would never have her back, at least his child would have a fierce defender at its side.

The seekers were a real problem. Not that there weren’t many other problems. But, once the overseers had stopped functioning, and all of the power circles had dissipated, the mind-washed bald men began rampaging.

Their free Overlord food tubes were now gone, and they were hungry. The seekers turned into flesh eating lunatics that were constantly sniffing out and tracking down humans. When they found them, they attacked without fear and devoured anyone that they could. What’s worse, they hunted in packs, like wild dogs.

Humans had killed each other at unimaginable levels in the post-invasion world, plus the Overlord had taken an unknown amount of pregnant women to his world. They had no way to rescue those poor frozen souls or their unborn children.

With about half of the world’s people now dead or missing, it left the numbers between seekers and survivors just about even. Unfortunately, many survivors were in pods and it was a constant race to rescue them, before they killed each other, or fell to the seekers.

Still, things weren’t all bad. Specialist Sterns said that he would have the power back up and running in the San Francisco area within a month. That would be huge for the Bay Area Colony. Daniel had done away with the term clan, as there were way too many bad connotations with those names.

“Call in the air calvary and have the mounted units head that way,” Daniel ordered.

“Already done, commander. The helos will be here in seconds.” Major Reyes never failed to impress him.

Commander Dat got up from his chair, feeling the many pains from his war wounds. He had received numerous broken bones, had been shot, stabbed, bitten, cut, and pronged. Neither his broken hand, nor his broken nose had ever quite set right, but he didn’t worry too much about those things.

He knew that they would wrangle this planet back into order. There was no way that they couldn’t with people like Major Olivia Reyes, Governor Jilly of the Sacramento Area Colony, Governor Tiana of the Bay Area Colony, Major Juan Carlos Cortez-Monteverde of the Mounted Horse Battalion, Hambone the Medical Specialist, Sterns the Engineering Specialist, Big Man Tiny the Communications Specialist, and Paco the former brothel owner and donkey show host turned alien slayer at his disposal. Who could oppose a crew like that?

Daniel climbed into the UH-1 Huey, and after nodding at Paco on the door gun, signaled Hambone to takeoff. Tiny turned and smiled at Daniel from the co-pilot seat. The helicopter climbed into the air, heading away from the island, taking them to their next great adventure. 

Author Notes The conclusion is finally upon us. I hope you enjoyed my book!


One of thousands of stories, poems and books available online at FanStory.com

You've read it - now go back to FanStory.com to comment on each chapter and show your thanks to the author!



© Copyright 2015 Douglas Goff All rights reserved.
Douglas Goff has granted FanStory.com, its affiliates and its syndicates non-exclusive rights to display this work.

© 2015 FanStory.com, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Terms under which this service is provided to you. Privacy Statement